Civil Works Spec

BMM ISPAT LTD

EXPANSION OF STEEL PLANT IN DANAPUR VILLAGE NEAR HOSPET BELLARY DISTRICT, KARNATAKA

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION FOR CIVIL WORKS

MECON LIMITED BANGALORE – 560 004

INDIA MEC/01/56/Q6WX/CIVIL WORKS/TS/201, Rev.0

DECEMBER , 2011

BMM ISPAT LTD EXPANSION OF STEEL PLANT AT

DANAPUR VILLAGE NEAR HOSPET, BELLARY DIST, KARNATAKA


“Copyright © 2011. MECON Limited. All Rights Reserved”

Page 1 of 10

CHAPETER – I

SECTION–I

GENERAL SCOPE FOR CIVIL WORKS 1.0 SCOPE AND SCOPE RELATED GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

1.1 SCOPE

1. This section of the specification covers entire Civil engineering work including Design and

engineering for all buildings, structures and facilities for Indoor Switchyard and other related auxiliary units including foundations for all buildings and equipment, roads, ramps, paving, parking areas, storm water drainage and faecal sewers, plumbing and sanitary fittings, service lines and all other miscellaneous civil engineering work as shall be necessary for completing this package on a turnkey basis within the battery limit.

2. The construction materials required for successful execution of civil works are included in

the scope of work of the Bidder. 3. Construction water shall be provided free of cost by the client at one point. The bidder shall

make his own arrangements for emergency supply and distribution. 4. Works shall include amongst others all activities as detailed below but not limited to them

for the entire plant facility. 5. Cable and pipe trenches within the battery limit. 6. Permanent road and its connection to the plant main road and pavements for the various

facilities including providing culverts, drains etc. Surface drains are to be connected to storm water drainage system of the plant within the battery limit and its connection to plant network.

7. All plumbing, sanitary and water supply fittings and fixtures, rainwater drainage, sanitary

faecal sewerage and industrial contaminated sewerage and connection to manholes / junction boxes of plants area drainage and sewerage network located upto a distance of 20m from outer face of any building / premises / open area are in the scope of this contract.

8. All necessary waterproofing, heat resisting, fireproofing, and anticorrosive treatment to

buildings, concrete structures and foundations including underground construction.

9. All necessary protective civil works below roadways for water and other services inside

battery limit.





Page 2 of 10

10. Necessary sealing arrangement and PVC water stops at expansion joints. 11. All under deck type roof insulation wherever necessary. 12. Civil work for utilities and services. 13. All temporary facilities and preliminaries like buildings, offices, labour colonies, staff

quarters, roads and services for construction for this package. 14. Removal and disposal of debris, micro leveling of the site up to battery limits all around

buildings and premises within the scope of contract prior to completion of work. 15. Within battery limits, diversion, relocation and protection of existing underground services

at no additional cost to the purchaser. 16. Protection of existing service lines beyond battery limits, if required, shall be done while

executing the work within battery limits. 17. All necessary civil work required for approach roads, connected culverts and road lighting

with in the battery limits. 18. Dismantling of buried / semi‐buried structures, if any, encountered within the battery limit

and disposal of generated debris as directed by the owner 19. Earthwork including dewatering, side shoring as required for buildings and equipment

foundations, trenches, pits, sewers and other construction work including controlled blasting of soft rock or hard strata as required. If at all, blasting is required, it shall be done at no extra cost with the prior approval of the owner. Apart from shoring and temporary supports, all other necessary measures like use of sheet piling etc. shall be provided, if necessary, at no additional cost to the owner.

20. Site micro leveling, clearing, dressing and grading of formation of ground up to maximum

of top 200 mm of soil to achieve required terrace levels and compaction as necessary within the battery limit.

21. Necessary Survey work as may be required for the execution of work. 22. Soling and sub‐grade work including backfilling and compaction for all foundations, floor,

apron, paving, trenches, pits and other underground structures. 23. Reinforced concrete foundation system, as required in foundation for building, equipment,

technological structures, pits, sumps, trenches, concrete encasing, grouting, basement and all underground structures.





Page 3 of 10

24. Concrete and Reinforced concrete work in columns, tie beams, beams, slabs, frames and other super structures.

25. All masonry works in substructure and superstructure including plastering as required. 26. Fixing and finishing of Doors, windows, ventilators, louvers, rolling shutters, fire check doors,

gates, shutters etc. 27. All finishing work to flooring, walls, ceiling and false ceiling as required. 29. All finishing and painting work to masonry, concrete structures, steel works. 30. All necessary technological and equipment supporting structures. 31. Hand railings, inserts, kerb angles, bolts etc. 32. All fencing and gates as required. 33. Encasing all conduits above ground and below ground wherever necessary with PCC M–15. 34. Maintenance facilities for gutters, rainwater down pipes. 35. The scope shall also include setting up by Bidder complete testing laboratory in the field to

carryout relevant tests at specified / required frequency and manning of field lab by competent technical personnel.

36. The Bidder shall undertake within the battery limits any change in the location of the units /

items and/or building numbers / parameters, sizes etc which may be necessary during engineering / execution from those indicated by the Bidder in their contract drawings at no additional cost to the owner.

37. It is not the intent to specify herein all the works in the scope of this contract. Construction shall conform in every respect to all local and state regulations governing such works and to stipulations of Indian Standards unless stipulated otherwise in detail specification.

38. Necessary Co‐ordination with Other Package Contractor/Bidder / other agencies / Statutory

bodies / Client’s etc. shall be done by the Successful Bidder, without affecting the Project Schedule.

2.0 GENERAL 2.1 The detailed specifications given hereafter are for the items of works described in the

schedule of quantities attached herein, and shall be guidance for proper execution of work to the required standards.





Page 4 of 10

2.2 It may also be noted that the specification are of generalized nature and these shall be read in conjunction with the description of item in schedule of quantities and drawings.

2.3 All the structures constructed are expected to be crackfree, seepage free and leakproof.

Adequate care shall be exercised during construction phases to ensure these aspects. Post constructional problems, if any, leading to the above mentioned conditions shall be immediately rectified to the complete satisfaction of the Owner / Engineer In charge at no extra cost.

2.4 All construction works, mainly, underground works, shall conform to the requirements of

IS6316:1981 – Code of Practice for AntiTermite measures in Buildings – Part I – Constructional Measures.

2.5 If the contractor has any reservation about the achievement of the requirements stated in 2.3

above using the specifications given in the tender document, he shall bring it the notice during prebid meeting.

2.6 The work also includes all minor details of construction which are obviously and fairly

intended and which may not have been referred to in these documents but are essential for the entire completion in accordance with standard engineering practice.

2.7 The Chief Engineer or his authorised representative shall be the deciding authority as to the

meaning, interpretations and implication for various provisions of the specifications and his decision in writing shall be final and binding on all concerned.

2.8 In case of any difference or discrepancy between the specifications and the description in the

schedule of quantities, the schedule of quantities shall take precedence. 2.9 In case of any difference or discrepancy between the specifications and the drawing, the

specification shall take precedence. 2.10 Unless specifically otherwise mentioned, all the applicable latest codes and standards

published by the Bureau of Indian Standards shall be referred therein. In case for any work BIS is not available, the work shall be executed to international standards. workmanship, quality, properties of materials, method of testing and method of measurements.

2.11 The Contractor will have to draw up the program of work in consultation with the Consultant

and the project authorities to match with the overall project requirements. 3.0 DRAWINGS 3.1 The work shall be executed in accordance with the specification and the drawings `Issued for

Construction’. Drawings will be issued in stages in close coordination with the availability of data and sequence of construction. Only latest revisions of the drawings shall be followed. All





Page 5 of 10

old revisions shall be clearly marked `SUPERSEDED’ and kept separately or destroyed as directed by Engineer Incharge.

4.0 SITE RECORDS 4.1 All works shall be recorded in appropriate proformas to be firmed up by the contractor in

consultation with the Engineer Incharge. Wherever required, reference to drawings and clauses of specification shall be recorded in the correspondence.

4.2 Records of steel receipts, issue, and consumption shall be scrutinized from time to time by

Engineer Incharges and Owner. Statement of steel receipts, statement of theoretical consumption and reconciliation should accompany every bill. Records of spot levels jointly recorded before the start of the work shall form the basis of all measurements.

5.0 SCOPE OF WORK 5.1 Setting out of all structures including layout and levels, etc. shall be made by the Contractor at

his own cost from the general grid of the plot and bench mark given by the Engineer Incharge. Contractor shall provide all instrument, materials and men to the Engineer Incharge for checking the layout and levels. However, the Contractor shall be fully responsible for correctness of layout and levels.

5.2 The work to be performed under this specification consists of providing all labour, materials,

construction equipment, tools and plant, scaffolding, supplies, transportation, all incidental items not shown or specified, but reasonably implied or necessary for successful completion of the work including Contractor’s supervision and in strict accordance with the drawings and specifications. The nature of the work shall generally involve site clearance including jungle clearance, re‐plantation of trees, earthwork in excavation, construction of retaining walls, under ground passage ways, controlled filling, dewatering, backfilling around completed structures, grading, disposal of surplus excavated materials, concreting including reinforcement and formwork, brickwork, inserts (embedded parts), steel gratings, architectural items and finishes like plastering, painting, flooring (including access flooring & special floorings), doors, windows and ventilators, rolling shutters, false ceiling, expansion joints, light structural work, platforms, etc., anchor bolts, RCC trenches with covers, folded plate roofs, water proofing and public health works, roads, culverts, drains etc.

5.3 The drawings included with this document provide a general representation of the work to be

performed under the scope of this contract. These are preliminary drawings only and are by no means the final drawings or show the full range of the work under the scope. Work has to be executed according to construction drawings to be released by the Engineer Incharge progressively.

5.4 The contractor will be required to set up site laboratory at his own cost and maintain all the

equipment in proper condition with all calibration and certificates of the equipment. The site laboratory will be manned by an independent qualified engineer. The cost of setting up site





Page 6 of 10

laboratory and performance of all the tests shall be borne by the Contractor. In case, any specific test such as testing of reinforcement, testing of any specific materials requiring specialist equipment and conditions, they shall be done in approved laboratories. The cost of such tests and the arrangements for witnessing such tests shall be borne by the Contractor.

5.5 The scope of work also includes clearance of site of any vegetation, bushes, scrap, debris, etc.

before starting the work and recording spot levels at the site of work as well as storage areas. The Contractor shall also clear the construction site of all debris and construction materials before handing over.

5.6 All specimens and approved samples shall be retained with the Engineer Incharge for

reference unless handed over to Contractor for safe custody. The Contractor shall make arrangements for proper storage of the same. These specimens may be retained with the owner as a permanent record.

6.0 APPROVAL AND TESTS 6.1 A high standard of quality is required for all materials and workmanship in construction work.

They shall be best of the kind obtainable indigenously in each case and shall be procured from manufacturers of repute in order to ensure uniformity of quality and timely supply.

6.2 The quality of work shall be of highest standard. The executed works shall be open to

inspection by high level committees from time to time. The direction of the committee will be binding on the contractor.

6.3 All materials shall be subjected to inspection and testing. The Contractor shall submit samples

for testing as may be required by the Engineer Incharge. Sampling and testing shall be carried out in accordance with relevant IS Standards.

6.4 Where ever IS codes are referred to, they shall be the latest edition/ publication as on date

irrespective of the date of finalisation of the work. 6.5 Contractor shall prepare and submit quality assurance plan for the execution of work. The

frequency of testing shall be guided by the quality assurance plan approved by the Engineer Incharge.

7.0 REJECTION OF MATERIALS 7.1 Any material brought to site which, in the opinion of the Engineer Incharge is damaged,

contaminated, deteriorated or does not comply with the requirement of this specification shall be rejected.

7.2 If the routine tests or random site tests show that any of the materials brought to site, do not

comply in any way with the requirements of this specification or of IS codes as applicable, then that material shall be rejected.





Page 7 of 10

7.3 The Contractor at his own cost shall remove from site any and all such rejected material

within the time specified by the Engineer Incharge. 8.0 ACCEPTANCE CRITERIA 8.1 The criteria for acceptance of work shall be generally in accordance with the testing norms

and approved quality assurance plan. Any defective workmanship will be rectified/ replaced complete to the satisfaction of the Engineer In‐charge solely at the cost of contractor.

8.2 Rectification of defective work shall be taken up by the contractor at no extra cost the owner

including such measures which need use of specialised materials/ treatments/ injections. 8.3 Percentage of wastage of materials meant for reconciliation shall be decided with the

successful tenderer. 9.0 QUALITY MANAGEMENT REQUIREMENTS 9.1 This chapter specifies requirements to be incorporated in the contractor’s quality assurance

programme for construction. The contractor is responsible for planning and developing a programme that assures that all the construction management, procurement, technical coordination and technical responsibility for quality are incorporated and executed effectively. The programme is aimed primarily at ensuring efficient quality management in construction and taking corrective actions, when necessary.

Planning and detailed written procedures are essential for specifying how such activities as the following, which affect quality, are to be performed and controlled. a) Responsibilty of inter disciplinary works coordination. b) Procurement. c) Construction. d) Special processes. e) Measuring and testing equipment. f) Inspection and test. g) Handling, storing, preservation , packaging and shipping. h) Item identification and traceability. i) Documentation and quality records. j) Disposition of non conformances and corrective action.

9.2 APPLICABILITY The requirements of this chapter apply to the construction activities.





Page 8 of 10

9.3 CONTRACTORS RESPONSIBILITIES

The Contractor’s responsibilities are– a) To develop and implement the controls and quality assurance procedures, specified

herein, that will promptly detect and dispose of, or prevent, non conformances to contractual requirements.

b) To comply with the requirements as specified in the contract. c) To prepare a quality assurance manual which shall be submitted for the Engineer’s

concurrence before the contract is awarded or at the latest before the work starts. d) To prepare a quality plan which shall be submitted to the Engineer before the work

starts. e) To update and resubmit the quality assurance manual and quality plan to reflect current

practices when significant changes occur in the Contractor’s programme or organization in order to improve its effectiveness or to prevent recurrence of non‐conformance.

f) To initiate corrective measures promptly when the quality assurance representative notifies the Contractor of deviations from established requirements.

g) To submit a detailed activity schedule (unit / building wise/ activity wise) in PERT / GANTT chart form. This shall be submitted immediately after placement of order. The schedule approved by the Engineer Incharge shall be tracked and monitored on a fortnightly / monthly basis and submitted to the Engineer Incharge for review.

9.4 BASIC REQUIREMENTS

9.4.1 Quality Assurance Programme.

The Contractor shall plan, establish, implement and maintain a quality assurance programme that complies with the requirements of this chapter.

9.4.2 Organization

The Contractor shall:

a) Clearly define management polices, objectives and responsibilities for quality assurance, including the responsibility of each division within a multi‐divisions organization. The responsibility and authority for quality of those managing and performing the work and of these audition and verifying conformance to quality requirements shall be defined and their relationships shown on organization charts.

b) Provide for the review by management of the status and adequacy of the quality assurance programme.





Page 9 of 10

c) Appoint a representative who shall report regularly to management at a level that ensures that quality assurance requirements are not subordinated to design, manufacturing, construction or delivery and define his authority to resolve quality matters. Engineer shall be notified of the appointment in writing.

d) Design the responsibility and authority of personnel who are primarily responsible for quality assurance and their organizational independence during audits and define the responsibility and authority of personnel who are primarily responsible for quality control and their organizational independence to:

• Identify and record quality problems. • Initiate or recommend or provide solutions through designated channels. • Verify the implementation of dispositions. • Control further processing, delivery or installation of a non conforming item or

service untill the deficiency or unsatisfactory condition has been resolved. • Note that, generally, audit personnel shall not be within the pattern of daily

activities. e) Use competent persons for inspection, other than those performing or directly

supervising the work being inspected, unless specifically designated otherwise in the quality plan. Such persons shall report to an adequate level of management, excluding direct reports to supervisors responsible for producing the work being inspected.

9.4.3 Quality Assurance Documents

a) Quality Assurance Manual

i) The Contractor shall:

Prepare a quality assurance manual, approved and signed by a senior management official, and submit it for the Engineer’s concurrence before the contract is awarded or at the latest before the work starts. A quality assurance manual submitted under a previous contract or tender may be referred to. Review and update the manual to reflect current quality assurance policies and procedures and resubmit the resulting manual. Implement the programme according to the provisions specified in the manual.

ii) The quality assurance manual shall deal as appropriate with the following:

Organization – The manual shall define the organizations measures.

Quality manual – The manual shall define the organizational measures.

Quality plan – The manual shall identify the group responsible for the quality plant as specified and define its main principles and features in adequate procedures.

Quality assurance procedures – Documented quality assurance procedures as





Page 10 of 10

specified shall be included or shall be outlined and cross referenced. Referenced QA procedures shall be made available to the quality assurance representative.

Manual review – A statement shall be incorporated for reviewing and updating the

manual as specified. b) Quality plan i) The Contractor shall:

• Plan the inspection and test activities. • Identify in the quality plan the inspections and tests to be performed on the items

listed in the contract, in compliance with contractual and / or technical requirements.

Submit the plan for the Engineer’s concurrence following the award of the contract

and before the work starts. Referenced inspection and test specifications and / or procedures shall be made available to the quality assurance representative during the implementation of the quality plan.

Update the plan during the life of the contract to reflect current conditions of

manufacturing, construction, inspecting and testing and resubmit the plan to the Engineer.

ii) The quality plan may be of any format to suit the contractor’s system. The quality plan

shall deal as appropriate with :

Identification of the characteristics or items to be inspected and tested. Identification of required inspection, test and special process operations and their

relative location in the construction cycle. The contractor may include additional in‐process inspection points for his own evaluation of quality which will not be subject to acceptance and witness by the quality assurance representative.

Reference to inspection, test and special process procedures, standards, acceptance criteria and sampling plan, if any.

Indication of hold points beyond which the activity shall not proceed until the required inspections or tests have shown satisfactory results and have been documented.

Provision for the Engineer Incharge to insert witness points at which the activities are to be observed. The activity may nevertheless proceed beyond a witness point should the Engineer fail to attend in spite of due notification.

iii) The quality plan for subcontracted items, when concurred with by the Contractor, shall be submitted to the Engineer as applicable, for concurrence and insertion of witness points.





Page 1 of 139

Chapter‐ I

SECTION – II: DETAILED SPECIFICATION FOR CIVIL CONSTRUCTION WORKS

TABLE OF CONTENTS

Section Title

C‐01 Technical Specification For Site Clearance And Grading

C‐02 Technical Specification for Excavation and backfilling

C‐03 Technical Specification for Anti ‐ termite treatment

C‐04 Technical Specification for Soling and Hardcore

C‐05 Technical Specification for Plain & reinforced concrete and allied works

C‐06 Technical Specification for Masonry and Allied Works

C‐07 Technical Specification for Plastering & pointing

C‐08 Technical Specification for Flooring & Allied Works

C‐09 Technical Specification for Steel Doors, Windows, Ventilators, Louvers

C‐10 Technical Specification for wood work, carpentry & joinery

C‐11 Technical Specification for Rolling Steel Shutter & Grills

C‐12 Technical Specification for Aluminum works

C‐13 Technical Specification for Glass and Glazing

C‐14 Technical Specification for Painting, White‐Washing. Distempering and other finishing work

C‐15 Technical Specification for Drainage, Sanitation and Water Supply

C‐16 Technical Specification for Road & Pavements

C‐17 Technical Specification for Supply and Laying of RCC pipes

C‐18 Technical Specification for Water proofing treatment for roofs.

C‐19 Technical Specification for Heat Resistant Concrete.

C‐20 Technical Specification for Site Levelling and Load Bearing Fills.





Page 2 of 139

C ‐ 01: SITE CLEARANCE & LEVELLING

1.0 SITE CLEARING 1.1 This specification covers the requirements of site clearance and site leveling. 1.2 The Tenderer shall inspect the site to determine the extent of all items to

be cleared and the cost of this work is deemed to be included in the item allowed for site clearance.

1.3 No trees or bushes are to be cut without the prior approval of the

Department who shall have to be notified at least 48 hours before starting this work. All trees and bushes cut shall become the property of the Department and shall have to be stacked in an orderly manner by the Tenderer and as directed by the officers of the Department adjacent to the main road so that they can be easily loaded on lorries by the Department

1.4 All boulders shall be stacked in neat piles on approved sites and locations. 1.5 All combustible matter shall be disposed of as directed by the Consultant 2.0 LEVELING 2.1 The site shall be brought to a fairly good level for grid marking pillars to be

established. The formation level of the site shall be a minimum of 150mm higher than the average existing ground level, unless otherwise specified in the drawings.

2.2 Any special natural features such as small hillock, trees, etc., shall not be

disturbed and shall form part of light landscaped area. 2.3 The site development includes leveling and filling, outside the boundary for

approaches, construction of compound walls, drains, and culverts at required locations





Page 3 of 139

C‐ 02 : EXCAVATION WORK AND BACKFILLING 1.0 SCOPE 1.1 This section of the specification covers the technical requirements for

excavation and filling & around structures, buildings, pipes, foundations, trenches, pits, drains, channels, cable ducts, underground facilities & similar works. It also covers filling areas and plinths with selected materials, conveyance and disposal of surplus spoils at the waste dumps shown on the drawings and/or stacking them properly as directed by the Engineer/Consultant.

1.2 The Tenderer shall be fully responsible for proper setting out works, profiling

in excavation, stacking, etc. taking adequate safety measures etc. The Tenderer shall carry out all works meant within the intent of this specification even if not explicitly mentioned herein. All works shall be executed to the satisfaction of the Consultant.

1.3 Existing trees, shrubs, any other plants, pole lines, fences, signs,

monuments, buildings, pipelines, drains, sewers or other surface or subsurface systems/ drainage facilities within or adjacent to the works being carried out which are not to be disturbed, shall be protected from damage by the Tenderer. The Tenderer shall provide and install suitable safeguards approved by the Consultant for this purpose.

1.4 Excavated material if permitted by Consultant shall be used for filling/

backfilling. Unsuitable material/ excess material shall be disposed off as directed by Consultant at waste dump locations shown on the tender drawings.

2.0 GENERAL 2.1 The Tenderer shall make his own surveying arrangements for locating the

coordinates and positions of all work and establishing the reduced levels (RL’s) at these locations based on two reference grid lines and one bench mark which will be furnished by the Owner. The Tenderer has to provide at site all the required survey instruments, along with qualified surveyors, to the satisfaction of the Consultant so that the work can be carried out accurately and according to the specification and drawings.

2.2 The Tenderer shall control the grade in the vicinity of all excavations so that

the surface of the ground will be properly sloped or dyked to prevent surface water from running into the excavated areas during construction.





Page 4 of 139

2.3 Excavation shall include removal of trees including roots & organic remains, vegetation, grass, bushes, shrubs, plants, poles, fences etc. that are in the area to be excavated as well as beyond the excavation line so as to ensure safety of the excavated side slopes and of men and equipment operating in the area. Before start of excavation work, joint measurements of ground level shall be taken after clearing all grass, vegetation etc.

2.4 Excavation shall include the removal of all materials required to execute the

work properly and shall be made with sufficient clearance as decided by the Consultant to permit the placing and setting of forms, inspection and completion of all works to the satisfaction of the Consultant for which the excavation was done.

3.0 CODES AND STANDARDS 3.1 All standards, specifications, acts and code of practice referred to herein

shall be the latest editions including all applicable official amendments and revisions.

3.2 In case of conflict between this specification and those (IS standards, codes

etc.) referred to here‐in, the former shall prevail. 3.3 Some of the relevant Indian standards, Acts and Codes are referred to here

below:

IS: 3764 1992 Safety code for excavation work IS: 4081 1986 Safety code for blasting and related drilling

operations IS: 4701 1982 Code of practice for earth work on canals IS: 9759 1981 Guide lines of dewatering during

construction IS: 10379 1982 Code of practice for field control of moisture

and compaction of soils for embankment and sub grade

Indian Explosives Act 1940 as updated. 4.0 EXCAVATION IN SOIL 4.1 Side and bottom of excavation shall be cut sharp and true to line and level.

Undercutting shall not be permitted. When machines are used for excavation, the last 300 mm before reaching the required level shall be excavated manually or by such equipment that soil at the required final level





Page 5 of 139

will be left in its natural condition. Suitability of strata(at the bottom excavations) for laying the foundation thereon shall be determined by the Consultant.

4.2 Excavation for foundation shall be to the bottom of lean concrete and as

shown on drawing or as directed by the Consultant. The bottom of all excavations shall be trimmed to required levels and when excavation is carried below such levels by error, it shall be brought back to the specified level by filling with concrete of nominal mix (1:3:6) (cement: coarse sand: 40 mm down aggregates) as directed by the Consultant at no extra cost.

4.3 All excavation for installation of underground facilities, such as pipe lines,

drain lines etc. shall be open cuts. For deep and huge excavations and in other excavations, if required by the Consultant, the Tenderer shall submit for Consultant’s approval an “Excavation Scheme” showing the methodology to be adopted for excavation.

4.4 When excavation requires bracing, sheeting or shoring etc. the Tenderer

shall submit drawings to the Consultant, showing arrangements and details of proposed installation. The Tenderer shall also furnish all supporting calculations as called for and shall not proceed until he has received written approval from the Consultant. However, the responsibility for adequacy of such bracing, sheeting, shorting etc. will rest with the Tenderer, irrespective of any approval of the Consultant.

4.5 The Tenderer shall have to constantly pump out any water collected in

excavated pits and other areas due to rain water, springs etc. and maintain dry working conditions at all times until the excavation, placement of reinforcement, shuttering, concreting, backfilling is completed. The Tenderer shall remove all slush/muck from the excavated areas to keep the work area dry. The Tenderer, if required, shall employ sludge pumps, for this purpose.

4.6 The Tenderer shall remove all materials arising from excavations from the

vicinity of the work either for direct filling, stacking for the subsequent filling or for ultimate disposal at the waste dumps shown on the drawings and as directed by the Owner/Consultant. In no case shall the excavated soil be stacked within a distance of 1.5 m from the edge of excavation or one‐third the depth of excavation whichever is more. Material to be used for filling shall be kept separately.





Page 6 of 139

5.0 EXCAVATION IN ROCK 5.1 For the work of excavation in rock, Tenderer shall engage specialized agency

having experience of excavation in rock involving wedging and blasting. The agency shall be approved by Consultant and the Tenderer shall furnish details of relevant experience in support while seeking approval for the agency. All relevant approvals from the Licensing agency and regulations shall be followed.

5.2 In case of over breaks in rock excavation, the excavated level shall be

brought to the level shown on drawings with plain cement concrete of nominal mix (1:3:6) as described earlier.

5.3 Where blasting is prohibited for any reasons or it is not practicable in the

opinion of the Consultant, then the excavation shall be carried out by chiseling, wedging or any other approved method. The decision of the Consultant in this regard shall be final binding on Tenderer.

6.0 EXCAVATION BELOW GROUND WATER TABLE 6.1 The Tenderer shall dewater and maintain dry working conditions by

maintaining the water table below the bottom of the excavation level by well‐point dewatering or deep well dewatering or any other method approved by the Consultant. He shall continue doing so till excavation, concreting, curing, and all other operation included in the scope of work, which require dry condition in the area are completed.

7.0 FILLING 7.1 MATERIALS

7.1.1 Materials to be used for filling purpose shall be approved earth, stone, sand

or other inorganic materials and they shall be clean and free from shingle, salts, organic matter, large roots and excessive amount of sod, lumps, concrete or any other foreign substances which could harm or impair the strength of the substances in any manner. All clods shall be suitably broken to small pieces. When the materials are mostly rock boulders, these shall be broken into pieces not larger then 150 mm size. Sand used for filling shall be clean, medium grained and free from impurities. Fines less than 75 microns shall not be more than 20%. In any case, the materials to be used for filling purposes shall have the prior written approval of the Consultant.

7.1.2 If excavated materials are to be used for filling, then the Tenderer shall select the materials from the stockpile, land and transport this material and





Page 7 of 139

execute the filling. This shall include excavation of earth, which may become hard due to laying in stockyard for a long period of time.

7.1.3 In case the materials have to be brought from pits/quarries, it shall be the Tenderer’s responsibility for identification of such quarry areas, obtaining approval from their use from concerned authorities, excavation/quarrying loading and carriage of such material, unloading and filling at specified locations. The Tenderer shall pay any fees, royalties etc. that may have to be paid for utilization of borrow areas.

7.2 FILLING PROCEDURE 7.2.1 After completion of foundation, footings, walls and other construction

below the elevation of the final grades, and prior to filling, all temporary shoring, timber etc. shall be sequentially removed and the excavation cleaned of all trash, debris, and. perishable materials. Filling shall begin only with the written approval of the Consultant. Also, areas identified for filling shall be cleared of all soft pockets, vegetation, bushes, slash etc. In case of plinth and similar filling the ground shall be dressed and consolidated by ramming and light rolling.

7.2.2 Fill materials shall not be dropped directly upon or against any structure or

facility where there is danger of displacement or damage. Filling shall be started after the concrete/masonry has fully set and shall be carried out in such a manner so as not to cause any undue lateral thrust on any part of the structure.

7.2.3 All space between foundation (concrete or masonry) and the sides of

excavation shall be filled to the original surface after making allowance for settlement, Fill shall be placed in horizontal layers not exceeding 200 mm loose thickness. Each layer shall be watered and compacted with proper moisture content and with such equipment as may be required to obtain a compaction/ density as specified. Trucks or heavy equipment for depositing or compacting fill shall not be used within 1.50 meters of building walls, piers for operation. The methods of compaction shall be subjected to approval of Consultant under any circumstances.

7.2.4 Fill adjacent to pipes shall be free of stones, concrete etc. and shall be hand

placed and compacted uniformly on both sides of the pipes and where practicable up to a minimum depth of 300 mm over the top of pipes. While tamping around the pipes, care should be taken to avoid unequal pressure.

7.2.5 Filling shall be accurately finished to line, slope, cross section and grade as

shown on the drawings. Finished surface shall be free of irregularities and





Page 8 of 139

depressions and shall be within 20mm, of the specified level. 7.2.6 Where filling with stone from excavated materials is specified, it shall be

from broken pieces of boulders. At first a 75 mm thick cushion of selected earth shall be laid over which the 200mm thick graded stones shall be laid in loose layers of 200mm, then the interstices filled with properly graded fine materials consisting of selected earth brought from borrow areas. Each layer shall be watered and compacted to the specified density before the next layer is laid. However, no cushion shall be required where filling is over non‐rocky surface.

7.2.7 Where filling with 65 mm down graded stone obtained from excavated, it

shall be selected stone laid over and initial 50 mm thick cushion layer of selected earth and then stone laid in 200 m loose thick layers, interstices filled with the specified density before the next layer in laid. However, no cushion shall, be required where filling is over non‐rocky surface.

7.2.8 Where clean stone fill is specified, it shall consist of clean selected stone

metal of 40 mm nominal size. It shall be laid in layers not exceeding 150 mm (loose) and lightly tamped before the next layer is laid. No compaction shall be required for this type stone filling.

7.3 COMPACTION 7.3.1 Where compaction to 95% Standard Proctor Density or more is called for, it

shall be by mechanical means only. Where access is possible, compaction shall be by 12 tonne rollers smooth wheeled, sheep foot or wobbly wheeled as directed by the Consultant. A smaller weight roller may be permitted by the Consultant in special cases, but in any case not less than 10 passes of the roller will be accepted for each layer. Each layer shall be wetted or dried by aeration to a moisture content of 3‐5% above the Optimum Moisture Content to be determined by the Tenderer. Each layer shall be watered, rammed and compacted to the density as specified Consultant.

7.3.2 For compacting each sand layer, water shall be sprayed and kept flooded for

24 hours to ensure maximum compaction. Vibro‐compactors shall also be used if necessary to obtain the required degree of compaction. Any temporary works required to contain sand under flooded condition shall also be undertaken. The surface of the consolidated sand shall be dressed to required levels or slope.

7.3.3 After the compacted fill has reached the desired level, the surface shall be

flooded with water for 24 hours, allowed to dry and then rammed and consolidated to avoid any settlement, at a later date. The compacted surface





Page 9 of 139

shall be properly shaped, trimmed and consolidated to an even gradient or level. All soft spots shall be excavated, filled and consolidated.

7.3.4 The degree of compaction of compacted fill in place will be subject to tests

by the Consultant as the work progresses, and the Tenderer shall provide the necessary facilities to make such tests. If any test indicates that the compaction achieved is less than the specified degree of compaction, the Consultant may require fill placed subsequent to the last successful test to be removed and re‐compacted by the Tenderer. Compaction procedure shall be amended as necessary to obtain satisfactory results.

7.3.5 When semi‐compacted fill is specified by the Consultant, the Tenderer shall

fill up such areas with available earth from stock piles of borrow pits or directly from excavation without special compaction except that obtained by moving trucks etc.

C‐ 03: ANTI ‐ TERMITE TREATMENT

1.0 GENERAL 1.1 Pre‐constructional anti–termite treatment shall be provided to all buildings

with a chemical barrier against the sub‐terrain termites. 1.2 Anti‐termite treatment being a specialized job, should be got executed

through specialized agencies only. The specialized agency should be preferably a member of the Indian Pest Control Association.

1.3 The scope of pre‐constructional anti‐termite treatment covers the soil

treatment with approved chemicals in water emulsion in foundation trenches for columns, plinth beams, pile caps, brick walls, service trenches, lift pits, steps, ramps etc., in top surfaces of plinth filling, at junction of walls and floor, in expansion joints etc., in stages as detailed in this specifications and drawings, unless otherwise specified, the anti‐termite treatment will be carried out as per IS : 6313 (Part‐II)‐2001 and / or as per direction of the Consultant.

2.0 CHEMICAL TO BE USED 2.1 The following chemical in water emulsion, after approval from the

Consultant, shall be used uniformly over the area to be treated.





Page 10 of 139

CHLROPYROPHOS 2.2 The Tenderer should produce voucher (s) for the chemical purchased and

should get verified the sealed container(s) of the specified chemical from the Consultant before preparing the emulsion / use for the treatment.

3.0 GUARANTEE 3.1 The Tenderer has to furnish the guarantee for 10 (ten) years from the date

of completion of work, stating that in case of reappearance of termites within the building area due to defective materials or workmanship or due to any other reasons, the Tenderer will carry out the necessary post constructional treatment to keep the entire area free from termite, once again, without any extra cost to the Department during the guarantee period.





Page 11 of 139

C – 04: SOLING & HARDCORE 1.0 GENERAL 1.1 The work covered under this specification includes all type of soling work

either by rubble stones laid under floors / hardcore under foundations, hand packed, complete as per specification and applicable drawings.

2.0 RUBBLE STONE SOLING 2.1 The rubble stone shall be of best variety of black trap / granite / basalt or

other approved variety of stone available locally. The stone shall be hard, durable, free from defects and of required size and shall be approved by the consultant before incorporation in the work.

2.2 Preparation of Surface & lying: 2.2.1 The bed on which rubble soling is to be laid shall be cleared of all loose

materials, leveled, watered and compacted and got approved by the Consultant before laying rubble soling. Cable or pipe trenches if shown in the drawing and as required by the Consultant shall be got done before the soling is started.

2.2.2 Over the prepared surface, the stone shall be set as closely as possible and

well packed and firmly set. The stones shall be of full height and shall be laid so as to have their bases of the largest area resting on the sub‐grade. Soling shall be laid in one layer of 230mm or 150mm or other specified thickness and no stones shall be less than 230mm or 150mm depth or specified thickness of soling with a tolerance of 25mm.

2.2.3 After packing the stones properly in position, the interstices between them

shall be carefully filled with quarry spoils of stone chips of larger size possible to obtain a hard, compact surface. Spreading of loose spoils or stone chips is prohibited.

2.2.4 All interstices shall be filled with approved murrum. Excess murrum if any

over the surfaces shall be removed. Unless otherwise specified, the murrum shall be supplied by the Tenderer at his own cost from the selected areas. The surfaces shall then be watered and consolidated with mechanical or sufficiently heavy wooden tampers and log‐rammers as approved by the Consultant to give the required slope or level and dense sub‐base. After compaction, the surface shall present clean look. Adequate care shall be taken by the Tenderer while laying and compacting the rubble soling to see that concrete surfaces in contact with soling are not damaged.





Page 12 of 139

3.0 HARDCORE FOR FOUNDATIONS 3.1 Where specifically mentioned in the drawings, on specific recommendation

of soil expert, hardcore layer shall be provided as a preparatory surface to receive blinding concrete/ leveling course.

3.2 Hardcore layer shall comprise of well‐graded broken stones 80mm nominal

size with the following gradation:

IS Sieve designation % passing 80 mm 100 63 mm 85‐100 40 mm 0‐30 20 mm 0‐5 10 mm 0‐5

3.3 The hard broken stones layer shall be directly placed over the compacted

layer of under lying soil in layers. The stones shall be hand packed and crevices filled with broken stones.

3.4 Each layer shall be covered with clean river sand and thoroughly worked into

the crevices with a water jet. Additional layers of sand shall be placed on top and worked into the void spaces. The process shall be repeated until no more sand and water get into the voids.

3.5 Earth rammer shall be used to compact each layer if directed by Consultant. 3.6 The thickness and area covered beyond the blinding concrete shall be as

indicated in the drawings or as indicated by Consultant.

C‐ 05: PLAIN AND REINFORCED CONCRETE & ALLIED WORKS 1.0 SCOPE

1.1 This specifications covers the general requirements for concreting to be

used on jobs using on‐site production facilities including requirements in regard to handling, storage of ingredients, proportioning, batching, mixing and testing and quality assurance. This also covers the transportation of concrete from the mixer to the place of final deposit and the placing consolidation, curing, protecting, repairing and finishing of concrete.





Page 13 of 139

1.2 The Tenderer shall carry out all works meant within the intent of this

specification even if not explicitly mentioned herein. All works shall be executed to the satisfaction of the Consultant.

2.0 CODES AND STANDARDS

2.1 All work shall be carried out as per the stipulations contained in various

sections of these specifications and the latest Indian Standards, Acts, Codes and best practices.

2.2 All applicable standards, specifications, etc. and codes of practice shall

generally be the latest editions, including all applicable official amendments and revisions. A complete set of all these documents shall generally be available at site, with the Tenderer.

2.3 In case of conflict between the stipulations contained in various sections of

these specifications and stipulations of Indian Standards, Codes, etc. the requirements of stipulations contained in various sections of these specifications, shall prevail over that of Indian Standards, Codes, etc.

2.4 The following are the various relevant Indian Standards:

IS ‐ 73 1992 Specification for paving bitumen IS – 216 1961 Specification for coal tar pitch IS – 269 1989 Specification for 33 grade Ordinary Portland

cement IS – 280 1978 Specification for mild steel wire for general

Engineering purposes IS – 383 1970 Specification for coarse and fine aggregates from

natural sources for concrete IS ‐ 432 (Parts I) 1982 Specification for mild steel medium tensile steel

bars and hard drawn steel wire for concrete reinforcement – Mild steel & medium tensile bars

IS ‐ 432(Parts II) 1982 Specification for mild steel medium tensile steel bars and hard drawn steel wire for concrete reinforcement ‐ Hard drawn steel wire

IS: 455 1989 Specification for Portland slag cement IS: 456 2000 Code of practice for plain and reinforced concrete IS. 457 Code of practice for plain and reinforced concrete

for dams and other massive structures. IS. 515 Specification for natural and manufactured

aggregate for use in mass concrete.





Page 14 of 139

IS: 516 1959 Method of test for strength of concrete IS – 650 1991 Specification for standard sand for testing of

cement IS: 702 1988 Specification for industrial bitumen IS: 800 1984 Code of practice for general construction in steel IS: 816 1969 Code of practice for use of metal are welding for

general construction in mild steel IS: 1161 1998 Specification for steel tubes for structural purpose

IS: 1322 1993 Specification for bitumen felts for waterproofing and damp proofing

IS: 1363 (Part 1) 2002 Hexagon head bolts, screws and nuts of product grade ‘C’ – Hexagon head bolts (size range M 5 to M 64)

IS: 1363 (Part 2) 2002 Hexagon head bolts, screws and nuts of product grade ‘C’ – Hexagon head screws (size range M 5 to M 64)

IS: 1363 (Part 3) 2002 Hexagon head bolts, screws and nuts of product grade ‘C’ – Hexagon nuts (size range M5 to M 64)

IS – 1609 1991 Code of practice for laying damp proofing treatment using bitumen felts.

IS – 1786 1985 Specification for high strength deformed steel bars and wires for concrete reinforcement.

IS: 1834 1984 Specification for hot applied sealing compound for joints in concrete

IS: 2016 1967 Plain washers IS: 2074 1992 Specification for ready mix paint, air drying, red

oxide zinc chrome IS ‐ 2386 (Part 1) 1963 Methods of test of aggregates for concrete –

Particle size & shape IS ‐ 2386 (Part 2) 1963 Methods of test of aggregates for concrete –

Estimation of deleterious material and organic impurities

IS ‐ 2386 (Part 3) 1963 Methods of test of aggregates for concrete – Specific gravity, Density, voids, absorption and bulking

IS ‐ 2386 (Part 4) 1963 Methods of test of aggregates for concrete – Mechanical properties

IS ‐ 2386 (Part 5) 1963 Methods of test of aggregates for concrete – Soundness

IS ‐ 2386 (Part 6) 1963 Methods of test of aggregates for concrete – Measuring mortar making properties of fine aggregates

IS ‐ 2386 (Part 7) 1963 Methods of test of aggregates for concrete – Alkali





Page 15 of 139

aggregate reactivity IS ‐ 2386 (Part 8) 1963 Methods of test of aggregates for concrete –

Petrographic examination I.S. 2438 Specification for roller pan mixer. IS – 2502 1963 Code of practice for bending and fixing of bars for

concrete reinforcement. I.S 2505. Specification for immersion type concrete

vibrators. I.S. 2506 Specification for screed board concrete vibrators. I.S. 2514 Specification for concrete vibrating table. IS – 2571 1970 Code of practice for laying in‐situ cement‐concrete

flooring. IS – 2645 2003 Specification for Integral cement water proofing

compounds for cement mortar and concrete I.S. 2722 Specification for portable swing weigh batcher for

concrete. IS ‐ 2751 1979 Code of practice for welding of mild steel plain and

deformed bars for reinforced concrete construction.

IS. 3025 Methods of sampling and test (physical and chemical) for water used in industry.

IS ‐ 3037 1986 Specification for bitumen mastic for use in water proofing of roofs

IS ‐ 3150 1982 Specification for hexagonal wire netting for general purposes.

I.S. 3366 Specification for pan vibrator. IS ‐ 3370 (Part I) 1965 Code of practice for concrete structures for the

storage of liquids – General requirements IS ‐ 3370 (Part II) 1965 Code of practice for concrete structures for the

storage of liquids‐ Reinforced concrete structures IS ‐ 3384 1986 Specification for bitumen primer for use in

waterproofing & damp proofing. IS ‐ 3414 1968 Code of practice for design and installation of joints

in buildings. IS ‐ 3550 1965 Methods of test for routine control for water used

in Industry. IS ‐ 4130 1991 Safety Code for demolition of buildings. IS ‐ 4326 1993 Code of practice for earthquake resistant design

and construction of buildings. IS ‐ 5525 1969 Recommendations for detailing of reinforcement in

reinforced concrete work. IS ‐ 5624 1993 Specification for foundation bolts. IS ‐ 7861 (Parts I) 1975 Code of practice for extreme weather concreting –





Page 16 of 139

Recommended practice for hot weather concreting IS: 8112 1989 Specification for 43 Grade Ordinary Portland

Cement IS ‐ 10262 1982 Recommended guidelines for concrete mix design. IS. 12269 Specifications for high strength ordinary Portland

cement (Grade 53). IS.13311 (Part‐I) Non‐destructive testing of concrete: Method of test

for ultrasonic pulse velocity. IS. 13311 (Part‐II) Non‐destructive testing of concrete: Method of

testing by rebound hammer. SP ‐ 23 1982 Handbook of concrete mixes. SP ‐ 24 1983 Explanatory Handbook on IS: 456 SP ‐ 34 1987 Handbook on concrete reinforcement and

detailing.

3.0 MATERIALS 3.1 GENERAL: 3.1.1 All the materials used in the manufacture of concrete shall be in accordance

with these specifications, Storage and Handling of Common Building Materials, which shall be deemed to form a part of this specification.

3.1.2 The Consultant shall have the right to inspect the sources of materials, the

layout and operation of procurement and storage of materials, the concrete batching and mixing equipments and the quality control system. The Tenderer shall arrange such an inspection and the Consultant s approval shall be obtained prior to starting the work.

3.2 AGGREGATES 3.2.1 Aggregate shall consist of natural sand, crushed stone/gravel from a source

known to produce satisfactory aggregate for concrete and shall be chemically inert, strong, hard, durable against weathering, of limited porosity and free from deleterious materials that may cause corrosion to the reinforcement or may impair the strength and / or durability of concrete. Aggregates shall conform to IS:383.





Page 17 of 139

3.2.2 STORAGE OF AGGREGATES: All coarse and fine aggregates shall be stacked separately in stock piles in

the material yard near the work site in bins properly constructed to avoid inter mixing of different aggregates. Contamination with foreign materials and earth during storage and while heaping the materials shall be avoided. The aggregate must be of specified quality not only at the time of receiving at site but also at the time of loading into mixer.

3.3 CEMENT 3.3.1 The cement generally used shall be the Ordinary Portland cement 43 / 53

grade. However, any special type of cement such as High strength cement or sulphate resisting cement may be used under specific circumstances.

3.3.2 The Tenderer shall make his own arrangements for the storage of adequate

quantity of cement. If supplies are arranged by the Department, cement will be issued in quantities to cover work requirements of one month or more, as deemed fit by the Consultant and it will be the responsibility of the Tenderer to ensure adequate and proper storage, which will provide complete protection from dampness, contamination and minimize caking and false set. Cement bags shall be stored in a dry enclosed shed (storage under tarpaulins will not be permitted), well away from the outer walls and insulated from the floor to avoid contact with moisture from ground and so arranged as to provide ready access. Damaged or reclaimed or partly set cement will not be permitted to be used and shall be removed from the site. The storage arrangements shall be such that there is no dead storage. Not more than 12 bags shall be stacked in any tier. The storage arrangement shall be got approved by the Consultant. Consignments of cement shall be stored as received and shall be consumed in the order of their delivery.

3.4 REINFORCEMENT

3.4.1 Steel reinforcement bars for concrete shall be corrosion resistant TMT bars

with strength requirements conforming to Grade Fe‐415/Fe500 of IS: 1786 manufactured by SAIL, TATA or RINL.

3.4.2 Storage: Steel reinforcement shall be stored in such a manner that they are

not in direct contact with ground but stacked on top of an arrangement of timbers sleepers or the like. Bars of different classifications and sizes shall be stored separately. In cases of long storage or in coastal areas, reinforcement shall be stacked above ground level by at least 15 cm, and a coat of cement wash shall be given to prevent scaling and rusting at no





Page 18 of 139

extra cost to the owner. Fabricated reinforcement shall be carefully stored to prevent, distortion, corrosion and deteriorations.

3.5 WATER 3.5.1 Water used for mixing and curing shall be clean and free from injurious

amounts of oils, acids, alkalis, sugar, organic materials or other substances that may be deleterious to concrete or steel. Potable water is generally considered satisfactory for mixing concrete. The maximum permissible values of impurities shall be as given in clause no. 5.4 of lS: 456.

3.6 ADMIXTURES 3.6.1 Admixtures in concrete for promoting workability, entraining air for similar

purposes may be used only after the written permission from the Consultant is obtained. These shall be free from injurious amount of chloride, etc. Addition of admixtures should not reduce the specified strength or durability of concrete and should not have detrimental effect on reinforcement. The admixtures shall conform to lS‐9103 and shall be of proven make and from a reputed manufacturer. Calcium chloride as accelerating admixture is not permitted to be used other than in mass concrete works. The Tenderer shall produce latest test results carried out at approved Government Test Houses for the approval of the Consultant, before use.

3.7 EMBEDDED PARTS 3.7.1 Steel for light structural work and for preparation of inserts and embedment

shall conform to IS:2062. 3.7.2 Bolts to be embedded in concrete shall, unless otherwise detailed in

drawings, conform to IS:5624. Material for bolts, shall, unless otherwise mentioned in drawings or the schedule of items, be corrosive resistant/coated steel conforming to IS:2062.

3.7.3 Nuts and locknuts shall conform to IS:1363 (Part 1 to 3) for diameters 6 to

39 and IS: 3138 for Hexagon Bolts and Nuts (M‐42 to M‐150) 3.7.4 Plain washers shall conform to IS:2016 and spring washers shall conform to

IS:3063.

3.7.5 Steel pipe sleeves shall conform to Medium class of IS:1161.





Page 19 of 139

4.0 CONCRETE MIX, WORKABILITY & DURABILITY 4.1 Concrete mix proportions shall be selected based on the requirements of

workability, strength, and durability. The proportions of cement, aggregates and water shall be determined only by designing the mix. Design mix concrete shall be designated as M20, M25, etc.

4.2 WORKABILITY

Workability of fresh concrete is mainly governed by placing conditions and compaction. The degree of workability necessary to allow the concrete to be well compacted and to be worked into the corners of formwork and around the reinforcement shall be as stipulated under clause no. 7.0 of IS:456. a) Consultant may permit use of plasticizers for improving workability. Use

of certain other admixtures such has water proofing compounds also have an effect on workability and shall be considered during mix design.

4.3 DURABILITY OF CONCRETE:

a) Durability requirement is decided, depending on the exposure conditions as stipulated in clause 8.2 of IS:456. is to be taken into account while designing the mix. For given aggregates, the cement content should be sufficient to make sufficiently low water cement ratio and table 5 of IS: 456‐2000 shall be taken as guideline for durability considerations.

b) Stipulations of minimum cement content and limiting water cement

ratio should be considered during design of mix. 5.0 PREPARATORY WORKS 5.1 Earth surface on which direct placement of concrete is to be placed shall be

rammed and consolidated such that it does not crumble and get mixed with concrete during or after placement. If the foundation is quite wet, the same shall be kept dry and then sufficiently consolidated, if necessary, a thin top layer of the wet soil shall be removed and replaced by sand or other suitable materials as directed by the Consultant without any extra cost to the Owner. Where specified, lean concrete shall be provided in the earth stratum for receiving concrete. The surface of absorptive soil against which concrete is to be placed shall be moistened thoroughly so that no moisture will be drawn form the freshly placed concrete. In case the drawings indicate hardcore below the blinding concrete, the same shall be provided as per relevant specifications.





Page 20 of 139

5.2 Preparation of concrete surface upon which additional concrete is to be

placed later, shall preferably be done by scarifying and cleaning while the concrete is between its initial and final set. This method shall be used wherever practicable and shall consist of cutting the surface with picks and stiff brooms and by use of an approved combination of air and water jet as directed by Consultant. Great care shall be taken in performing this work to avoid removal of too much mortar and the weakening of the surface by loosening of aggregate. When it is not practicable to follow the above method, it will be necessary to employ air tools to remove laitance and roughen the surface. The final resulting surface shall be a pitted surface, from which all dirt, unsound concrete, laitance and glazed mortar have been removed.

5.3 All such joints shall have continuous square bond grooves to produce a

substantial and water‐tight key. Where the placement of concrete has to be resumed on a surface which has hardened, it shall be roughened, cleaned by wire or bristle brushing, compressed air, water jet etc., and thoroughly wetted.

6.0 FORMWORK AND STAGING 6.1 Formwork shall compose of steel, best quality wood or non‐absorbent type

plywood. Timber shall be free from significant knots and shall be of medium grain as far as possible and hard woods shall be used as caps and wedges under or over posts. Timber shall be well seasoned, free from sap, shakes, wormholes, warps or other surface defects and shall have smooth finish.

6.2 The Tenderer shall maintain necessary camber in centering for all floor slabs

and beams in all spanning directions, so as to offset the deflection and assume correct shape. The camber shall have the crown of not less than 8 mm for every 5 metres span unless otherwise shown on the drawings. For cantilever, camber at free end shall be 1 in 100.

6.3 The Tenderer shall begin the removal of formwork only after approval of the

Consultant. Forms of various types of structural components shall, under normal circumstances, not be removed before the minimum periods specified in Cl. 11.3 of IS:456

6.3.1 Tolerances is a specified permissible variation from lines, grade or

dimensions given in drawings. Unless otherwise specified, the following tolerances will be permitted.





Page 21 of 139

TOLERANCES FOR R.C. BUILDINGS

Variation from the plumb In the line and surfaces of columns, piers, walls and in buttresses

5 mm per 2.5 m, but not more than 25 mm

For exposed corner columns and other conspicuous lines In any bay or 5 m. maximum (+/‐) 5 mm

1

In 10 m. or more (+/‐) 8 mm. Variation from the level or from the grades indicated on the drawings

In slab soffits, ceilings, beam soffist and in arises.

In 2.5 m (+/‐) 5 mm. In any bay or 5 m. maximum (+/‐) 8 mm

2

In 10 m. or more (+/‐)15mm For exposed lintels, sills, parapets, horizontal grooves and other conspicuous lines In any bay or 5 m. maximum (+/‐)15mm

3

In 10 m. or more (+/‐)10mm Variation of the linear building lines from established position in plan and related position of columns, walls and partitions In any bay 5 m. maximum (+/‐) 10 mm

4

In 10 m. or more (+/‐) 20 mm. 5 Variations in the sizes and locations of

sleeves, openings in walls and floors except in the case of and for anchor bolts

(+/‐) 5 mm

6 Variation in cross‐sectional dimensions of columns and beams and in the thickness of slabs and walls

(+)10mm / (‐)5 mm

Footings variation in dimensions in plan (+) 50 mm / (‐) 5 mm Misplacement of concentricity 2% of footing within the

direction of misplacement but not more than 50 mm.

7

Reduction in thickness (‐) 5% of specified thickness subject to maximum of 50 mm.

Variation in steps In a flight of stairs Rise (+/‐) 3.0 mm

8

Tread (+/‐) 5.0 mm





Page 22 of 139

In consecutive steps Rise (+/‐) 1.5 mm Tread (+/‐) 3 mm

TOLERANCE IN OTHER CONCRETE STRUCTURE

All structures Variation of the constructed linear out line from established position in plan In 5 m (+/‐) 10 mm.

1

In 10 m. or more (+/‐) 15 mm. Variation of dimensions to individual structure features from established positions in plan In 20m. or more (+/‐) 25 mm.

2

In buried constructions (+/‐) 150 mm Variation from plumb, from specifies batter or from cured surfaces of all structures In 2.5 m (+/‐) 10 mm. In 5.0 m (+/‐) 15 mm. In 10.0 m. or more : (+/‐) 25 mm

3

In buried constructions (+/‐) Twice the above limits. Variation from level or grade indicated on drawings in slabs, beams, soffits, horizontal grooves and visible arises In 2.5 m (+/‐) 5 mm. In 7.5 m. or more (+/‐) 10 mm

4

In buried constructions (+/‐) Twice the above limits 5 Variation in cross‐sectional dimensions of

columns, beams, buttresses, piers and similar members

(+) 10mm./(‐) 5 mm.

6 Variation in the thickness of slabs, walls, arch sections and similar members

(+) 10 mm./(‐) 5 mm

FOOTINGS FOR COLUMNS, PIERS, WALLS, BUTTRESSES AND SIMILAR MEMBERS

1 Variation of dimensions in plan (+) 50 mm./(‐) 10 mm 2 Misplacement or eccentricity 2% of footing within the

direction of misplacement but not more than 50 mm

3 Reduction in thickness 5% of specified thickness subject to a maximum of 50 mm.





Page 23 of 139

7.0 REINFORCEMENT PLACEMENT 7.1 All reinforcement for concrete works shall be provided as per approved

drawings. The Tenderer shall prepare and furnish to the Consultant, bar bending schedules for all RCC works for his review and approval. No work shall commence without the approval of the bar bending schedules by the Consultant in writing.

7.2 All bars shall be thoroughly cleaned before being fabricated. Pitted and

defective bars shall not be used. All steel for reinforcement shall be free from loose scales, rust coatings, oil, grease, paint or other harmful matters immediately before placing the concrete. To ensure this, reinforcements with rust coatings shall be cleaned thoroughly before bending/placement of the same.

7.3 Unless shown otherwise on the drawings, minimum clear concrete cover for

reinforcement (exclusive of plaster or other finishes) shall be as specified in Cl. 26.4 of IS:456.

7.4 Special requirements in corrosive atmosphere: Unless special protective

coatings are used, the appropriate measures for structures exposed to sever conditions shall be followed.

8.0 EMBEDDED PARTS 8.1 Embedded steel parts shall be supplied, fabricated and erected by the

Tenderer and shall include items such as, but not limited to, foundation grillages, anchor bolts, pipe sleeves, equipment mounting plates, steel rolled sections with or without properly welded lugs, plate inserts, edge protection angles, as shown on the drawings, auxiliary framing for equipment supports, pegstay plugs for door and window frames, miscellaneous frames, etc. Embeded parts shall not be welded to the reinforcement.

9.0 MIXING OF CONCRETE 9.1 Concrete shall be mixed in a mechanical mixer conforming to IS:1791.

However, mixing shall preferably be done at a single central batching plant, conforming to IS:4925, situated within the area allocated for the Tenderer’s particular use as directed by the Consultant. The plant shall have a mechanically operated mixer of an approved size and type, capable of ensuring a uniform distribution of the materials throughout the mass and the mass is uniform in colour and consistency.





Page 24 of 139

9.2 BATCHING OF CONCRETE 9.2.1 Aggregates and Cement shall always be batched by weight. A separate

weighing device shall be provided for weighing cement. Where the weight of cement is determined by accepting the weight per bag, number of bags shall be weighed separately to determine the average net weight of cement per bag and the same shall be checked regularly. Water may be measured either by weight or by volume.

9.2.2 Any solid admixture, to be added, shall be measured by weight, but liquid or

semi‐liquid admixture may be measured by weight or volume. 10.0 TRANSPORTATION OF CONCRETE

10.1 Concrete shall be handled and conveyed as rapidly as practicable, from the

place of mixing to the place of final laying, by approved means, before the initial setting of the cement starts. Concrete shall be conveyed in such a way that there is no segregation or loss of any of the ingredients and maintaining the required workability. If segregation does occur during transport, the concrete shall be remixed. During very hot or cold weather, if directed by the Consultant, concrete shall be transported in deep containers, which will reduce the rate of water loss by evaporation in hot weather and heat loss in cold weather, at no extra cost to Owner.

10.2 Concrete may be conveyed and placed by mechanically operated

equipment, e.g. pumps or pneumatic placers only with the written permission of the Consultant, who shall also review the entire scheme for which comprehensive details shall be furnished by the Tenderer.

11.0 CONCRETE PLACING 11.1 Before the concrete is actually placed in position, the inside of the formwork

shall be inspected to see that they have been cleaned and oiled. Temporary openings shall be provided to facilitate inspection, especially at bottom of columns and wall forms, to permit removal of saw dust, wood shavings, binding wire, rubbish, dirt etc., Opening shall be placed or holes drilled so that these materials and water can be removed easily. Such openings / holes shall be later suitably plugged.

11.2 Formwork and reinforcement shall be approved in writing by the Consultant

before concrete is placed. Concrete shall be placed only after all preparations for casting have been approved by the Consultant and approval given to proceed with the casting in writing on pour card to be maintained by the Tenderer for this purpose and to be submitted along with





Page 25 of 139

the Tenderer’s bills.

11.3 Slabs, beams and similar members shall be poured in one operation. In special circumstances, with the approval of the Consultant, these can be poured in horizontal layers, but it must be ensured that the under layer is not already hardened. Bleeding of under layer, if any, shall be effectively removed. Moulding, throating, drip course, etc. shall be poured as shown on the drawings or as desired by the Consultant.

11.4 No concrete shall be placed in wet weather or on water covered surface.

Any concrete that has been washed by heavy rain shall be entirely removed, if there is any sign of cement and sand having been washed away from the concrete mixture.

11.5 For members involving vertical placing of concrete (eg. Columns, walls, etc.),

each lift shall be deposited in horizontal layer extending the full width between shutterings and of such depth that each layer can be easily and effectively vibrated and incorporated with the layer before by means of compaction.

11.6 During hot weather (atmospheric temperature above 40 degree centigrade)

the concreting shall be done as per the procedures and precautions set out in lS‐7861 (Parts I and II)

11.7 Under all ordinary conditions all foundations shall be completely de‐watered

and concrete placed on the dry surface. However, when concrete placement under water is necessary, all work shall be executed in accordance with clause 14.2 of IS ‐456

12.0 COMPACTION

12.1 After the concrete has been placed, it shall be spaded and thoroughly

compacted by approved mechanical vibrators to a maximum subsidence without segregation and thoroughly worked around reinforcement or other embedded fixtures into the correct form and shape. Hand tamping in some cases may be allowed subject to the approval of the Consultant. Care must be taken to ensure that the inserts, fixtures, reinforcement and formwork are not displaced or disturbed during placing of concrete.

13.0 PROTECTION AND CURING OF CONCRETE

13.1 Newly placed concrete shall be protected by approved means from rain, sun

and wind. Concrete placed below ground level, shall be protected from falling earth, during and after placing. Concrete placed in ground containing





Page 26 of 139

any deleterious substances, shall be kept free from contact with such ground or with water draining from such ground, during placing of concrete and for a period of at least three days or as otherwise instructed by the Consultant.

13.2 The ground water around newly poured concrete shall be kept down to an

approved level by pumping or other approved means of drainage. Adequate steps shall be taken to prevent floatation or flooding. Steps, as approved by the Consultant, shall be taken to protect immature concrete from damage by debris, excessive loading, vibration, abrasion, mixing with earth or other deleterious materials, etc. that may impair the strength and durability of the concrete.

13.3 As soon as the concrete has hardened sufficiently, it shall be kept in a damp

or wet condition by ponding or by covering with a layer of sacking, canvas, hessian or similar materials and kept continuously wet for at least seven days after final setting. This period may be extended, at the discretion of the Consultant, upto fourteen days. Curing of horizontal surfaces exposed to drying winds shall begin immediately after the concrete has hardened. Concrete slabs and floors shall be cured for the periods mentioned above by flooding with water of minimum 25 mm depth.

14.0 JOINTS IN CONCRETE 14.1 Joints including joint filler materials, water bars, resilient pads type

vibration, damping material in and around the sides of concrete works, etc. shall be provided as shown in the drawings or as directed by the Consultant. Where necessary or/and specified, joints shall be made watertight by use of water stops.

14.2 Construction Joints: Location and treatment of construction joints shall be as approved by Consultant

14.3 Contraction Joints provided to eliminate tensile stresses due to shrinkage where temperature variations are small and where there is no likelihood of expansion, such as spaces below water and earth levels and not exposed to atmosphere. At contraction joints, the reinforcement is discontinued and bond is not allowed to develop between the joint faces, thereby introducing a structural discontinuity. A contraction joint also serves as a construction joint so far as break in the pouring of concrete is concerned.

14.4 Expansion Joints provided either to completely eliminate or to significantly reduce compressive stresses in concrete that would otherwise result by thermal expansion which might crush, buckle or crack, part of the structure.





Page 27 of 139

Expansion joints serve the purpose of contraction and also construction joints. Bitumen impregnated fiber board shall be used as joint filler which shall fill space between the concrete surfaces at the joints. The minimum thickness of board shall be 12mm and the material shall conform to IS: 1838. Expanded polystyrene slab when used shall be of fire retarding grade (type‐2) conforming to IS: 4671. Density of material shall not be less than 25kg/cum.

14.5 Water stops shall be provided at the joints as a continuous diaphragm to

contain the filler material and/or to exclude passage of water or any other material into or out of the structure. The Water stops shall be nonmetallic like P.V.C. The material is to be procured from reputed manufacturers having proven records of satisfactory supply of Water Stops of similar make and shape for other jobs.

14.6 The bitumen sealing compound shall be from approved manufacturer and

shall conform to the requirements of lS:1834. For joints in concrete lining on canals/reservoirs, sealing compound conforming to lS‐5256 shall be used.

14.7 Polysulphide sealant shall be from approved manufacturer, conforming to lS:12118. Materials shall consist of polysulphide polymer and a curing agent. Gun grade material shall be used unless otherwise specified. The application of the sealant shall be strictly followed as per manufacturer’s guidelines.

14.8 Metal cover strips shall be made of aluminium as shown on drawings. The

minimum thickness of aluminium strips shall be 3 mm. Aluminium alloy strip shall be corrosion resistant grade 31000 as per IS:737.

15.0 CEMENT ADDITIVES/ADMIXTURES IN CONCRETE 15.1 The admixtures shall conform to IS:9103 and shall be of proven make and

from a reputed manufacturer. In addition, for plasticizer‐cum‐water proofing compound, materials shall meet the permeability requirements as per lS‐2645. Similarly for plasticizer‐cum retarder admixture material shall satisfy the setting time requirements of retarder and other properties of plasticizer as per IS:9103

15.2 Admixtures in concrete for promoting workability, improving strength,

entraining air or for similar purposes may be used only after the written permission from the Consultant, is obtained. Addition of admixtures shall not reduce the specified strength or durability of concrete in any case.





Page 28 of 139

16.0 GROUTING

16.1 Ready mixed non‐shrink cementitious grout for Grouting under base plates and foundation pockets shall be done as indicated in the drawings, or as directed by Consultant. The contact area between the grout and base plate shall not be less than 80%

16.2 Grouting of pockets/holes in concrete: shall be done using cement‐sand grout or cement, sand and aggregate grout depending upon the size of the pockets/holes in the concrete. This mix shall generally be used for grout thickness above 40 mm for dry pack application. Normally the grade of such concrete/mortar shall not be less than the grade of parent concrete. In filling the holes of foundation bolts and expanding admixture of approved type shall be used as per manufacturer’s specification..

16.3 Surface to be grouted shall be thoroughly roughened and cleaned of all

foreign matter and laitance. The block outs, bolt holes etc. which have to be grouted, shall be cleaned thoroughly by use of compressed air just prior to taking up the grouting operation.

17.0 PRECAST CONCRETE ELEMENTS 17.1 Precast concrete elements such as fencing posts, copings, sills, shelves,

trench/ pit cover slabs, louvers, etc., shall be at least of mix M‐20. Concrete for Precast concrete shall comply with IS:456.

17.2 Precast concrete elements shall be cast in forms or moulds. The forms /

mould shall be of fiberglass or of steel sections for better finish. Provision shall be made in the forms and moulds to accommodate fixing devices such as nibs, clips, hooks, bolts and forming of notches and holes.

17.3 Elements shall be cast on suitable bed or platform with firm foundation.

Precast elements shall have a dense surface finish showing no coarse aggregate and shall have no cracks, crevices or other defects that would interfere with the proper placing of the units. All angles of the precast units with the exception of the angles resulting from the splayed or chamfered faces shall be true right angles.

17.4 All precast work shall be cured for at least 7 days after casting and during

that period each units shall be kept constantly watered or preferably by completely immersed in water if the size of unit so permits.

17.5 No precast unit shall be lifted until the concrete reaches a strength of at

least twice the stress to which the concrete may be subjected at the time of





Page 29 of 139

lifting. The precast articles shall be stored for 28 days before erection or being built in so that the concrete shall have sufficient strength to prevent damage to units when first handled

18.0 SAMPLING, TESTING AND QUALITY ASSURANCE

18.1 Samples from fresh concrete shall be taken in accordance with IS:1199 and

tested as per IS:516. Normally only compressive test shall be performed, but the Consultant may require other tests to be performed in accordance with lS‐516. For Trial Mixes & mix design, at least four trial mixes shall be made with minimum 6 test cubes for each mix. For works tests the minimum frequency of sampling of concrete of each grade shall be according to clause 15.2.2 of lS:456. However, after getting continuous satisfactory results, the Consultant may at his discretion reduce the frequency of sampling. All sampling and testing shall be done in the presence of the Consultant.

18.2 To control the consistency of concrete from every mixing, slump tests and compaction factor tests in accordance with lS‐1199 shall be carried out by the Tenderer as directed by the Consultant. Slumps corresponding to the test specimens shall be recorded for reference.

18.3 If the strength of the laboratory controlled cubes, for any portion of the concrete work, falls below the compressive strength specified, the Consultant shall have the right to order a change in the proportions or the water content for the remaining portion of the structure.

18.4 If the strength of the works cured test cubes falls below the specified

strength, the Consultant shall have the right to require provisions for temperature and moisture control during the period of curing as necessary to secure the required strength, and may require retests in accordance with the standard method of securing, preparing and testing specimens from hardened concrete for compressive and flexural strengths, or load tests to be made on the portion of the building so affected. All such tests shall be made at the Tenderer’s expense.

18.5 Unacceptable concrete work shall be dismantled by the Tenderer and

replaced by fresh work, meeting the specification requirements. In the course of dismantling, if any damage is done to the embedded items or adjacent structures, the same shall be made good, by the Tenderer, to the satisfaction of the Consultant, at no extra cost.

18.6 Only as a very special case and that too in non‐critical areas, the Consultant

may accept concrete work which is marginally unacceptable as per the criteria laid down in lS‐456. For such accepted work, payment shall be made





Page 30 of 139

at a reduced rate prorata to the concrete cube strength obtained, against that stipulated.

18.7 If directed by Consultant, Ultrasonic tests and core tests on structures to

ascertain the quality and grade of concreting shall be carried out. Tenderer shall arrange for the specialised agency for conducting the test at his own cost. The Tenderer shall provide all the necessary facilities and arrangement for conducting the test at site in terms of access, scaffolding etc. In case of any defects, the Tenderer shall rectify the same as directed by the Consultant. Rebound hammer test shall be carried out for ascertaining the quality of concrete work, as directed by the Consultant.

18.8 Consultant , if he so desires, may order for tests to the carried out on

cement, sand, coarse aggregate, water etc., in accordance with the relevant Indian Standards.

19.0 APPLICATION OF LIVE LOAD 19.1 The designated live load shall be allowed on any structure only after 28 days,

after proper curing is carried out on the last concrete poured in structure.

C‐ 06: MASONRY AND ALLIED WORKS 1.0 SCOPE

This section of the specification covers providing, constructing of masonry and allied works including DPC and plinth protection.

2.0 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 2.1 All workmanship shall be in accordance with the latest standards and best

possible practice. Masonry work shall be true to line & level as shown on drawings. All such masonry shall be tightly built against structural members and bonded with dowels, anchors, inserts, etc. as shown on the drawings.

2.2 The Tenderer shall carryout all works for setting out the building lines,

locating the co‐ordinates and establishing the reduced levels (RL’s) on the basis of reference grid lines and bench mark, which shall be furnished by the Owner, at one or more locations.

2.3 Any approval, instructions permission, checking, review, etc. whatsoever by

the Consultant shall not relieve the Tenderer of his responsibility and obligation regarding adequacy, correctness, completeness, safety, strength, quality, workmanship, etc.





Page 31 of 139

3.0 CODES AND STANDARDS 3.1 All applicable standards, acts and codes of practice referred to shall be the

latest editions including all applicable official amendments and revisions. A complete set of all these documents shall generally be available at site, with the Tenderer.

3.2 In case of conflict between this specification and those (IS Standards, Codes

etc.) referred to in clause 3.3 the former shall prevail. 3.3 Some of the applicable Indian standards, Codes, etc. are referred to here

below:

IS: 177 1992 Specification for Common burnt clay bricks IS ‐ 2116 1980 Specification for sand for masonry mortars IS:2212 1991 Code of practice for brick work IS:2250 1981 Code of practice for preparation and use of

masonry mortar IS: 2386 (Part 1) 1963 Methods of test for aggregate for concrete –

Particle size & shape IS: 2386 (Part 2) 1963 Methods of test for aggregate for concrete –

Estimation of deleterious materials and organic impurities

IS: 2691 1988 Specification for burnt clay facing work IS: 3495 (Part 1) 1992 Method of tests for burnt clay building bricks –

Determination of compressive strength IS: 3495 (Part 2) 1992 Method of tests for burnt clay building bricks –

Determination of water absorption IS: 3495 (Part 3) 1992 Method of tests for burnt clay building bricks –

Determination of efflorescence IS: 3495 (Part 4) 1992 Method of tests for burnt clay building bricks –

Determination of warpage IS: 4031 (Part 5) 1998 Methods of physical tests for hydraulic cements ‐

Determination of initial and final setting time

IS: 4031 (Part 7) 1998 Methods of physical tests for hydraulic cements ‐ Determination of compressive strength of masonry cement

IS:4130 1991 Safety code during demolition of buildings IS:4326 1993 Code of practice for earth quake resistant design

and construction of buildings SP‐ 20 1991 Hand book on masonry design & construction SP‐ 25 1984 Handbook on causes and prevention of cracks in

buildings





Page 32 of 139

4.0 STONE MASONRY 4.1 Random rubble masonry: The rubble shall be of the best quality trap /

granite / ballast stones obtained from the approved quarry. The sample of the stone, to be used shall be got approved from the Consultant. All stones shall, generally be freshly quarried and shall be sound, dense, hard, free from segregation, cracks, weathered portions and other structural defects or imperfections, tending to off set soundness and strength. The percentage of water absorption shall generally not exceed 5% by weight. All stones shall be wetted before use. Stones shall be neatly worked to requisite sections and forms and shall have fully dressed beds and joints. At least 50% of the stones shall be 0.015 cum. in content when reckoned individually. The length of stones for stone masonry shall not exceed three times the height and the breadth or base shall not be greater than three fourth the thickness of wall, or not less than 15 cm. The height of stone may be upto 30 cm. Stones shall be laid on the natural beds and shall run sufficiently inside the wall thickness. No hollow space shall be left out and inter spaces of stones being filled with mortar and stone chips, driven hard and not with mortar only.

4.2 All mortar to be used shall be of proportion (1:5). Cement, sand and water to be used shall conform to their relevant specifications as described under cement concrete. The masonry shall be laid to plumb, lines levels, curves, shapes as shown in drawings. All required holes for passage of water or pipes are to be embedded during construction as specified.

4.3 All stones shall be wetted before laying in masonry. Concrete surfaces of columns, beams, lintels, chajjas etc. coming in contact with masonry shall be properly chipped, washed and wetted before start of masonry work. The concrete surface coming in contact of masonry shall be given a thick coat of cement slurry as the masonry work progress in height. Clean chips and sprawls carefully selected to fit in the space shall be wedged into the mortar joints and beds wherever necessary to avoid thick beds or joints or mortar. However, proper shaping and dressing of stones shall be done prior to their laying in masonry and hammering shall not be resorted to often after the stones are laid in position. The bond stones shall be used in every square meter area of masonry wall and shall extend from front to back to thin walls having width of 600 mm. and shall overlap by at least 150 mm. in walls having thickness more than 600 mm. when laid from both sides. When the work has to be started on the old or the one completed a long while ago or in the previous working seasons. Care shall be taken to roughen and clean old surface satisfactorily without disturbing the masonry before laying the new masonry. It shall be wetted before laying the bedding mortar.





Page 33 of 139

4.3 When practicable, the whole masonry in any structure shall be carried out upto a uniform level throughout. But when breaks are unavoidable in carrying the work continuously in uniform level, sufficiently long steps shall be left. All junction of walls shall be formed at the time when walls are being built. Cross walls should be carefully bonded into the main walls. All masonry built in cement mortar shall be kept continuously wet for 14 days from the date of laying. Should the mortar perish i.e. becomes dry, white or powder through neglect of watering and if the masonry shows hollow joints or non adherence of mortar to the stones or if the work does not conform to drawings and specifications, the work shall be pulled down and rebuilt by the Tenderer at his own cost and risk. All masonry shall be thoroughly cleaned and washed down on completion and all stains, adhering mortar removed from the surface and raking of joints carried out as the scaffolding is being lowered and removed. Holes left in masonry for supporting scaffolding shall be filled and made good before pointing / plastering.

4.4 Coursed rubble masonry : The face of the stones shall be square / rectangular in shape and shall be so dressed all‐round that those can be set on proper bases and shall render uniform joints. The stones may have bushing on the face but shall not project more than 40 mm. the external faces shall be laid in courses of about 200 mm. height or as specified and the internal face shall be finished with rubble backing.

5.0 PRECAST CEMENT CONCRETE SOLID BLOCK MASONRY :

5.1 Precast cement concrete solid blocks shall be of best quality locally available / manufactured at site and should be approved by the Consultant before incorporation in the work. The ingredient and cement concrete used shall confirm to relevant I.S. as stipulated in specification for cement concrete works herein before.

5.1.1 Minimum crushing strength of the solid blocks shall be 50 kg / Sqcm. at 28

days. The size of the blocks shall be 300 x 200 x 150mm and the proportion used in making the blocks shall be (1:5:8). The blocks shall be cured well at least for 14 days. The cement mortar for concrete blocks masonry shall be (1:4) and joints shall not be more than 10 mm. thick. The type of the bond to be adopted will be decided by the Consultant but vertical joints shall be staggered.





Page 34 of 139

6.0 DAMP PROOF COURSE (DPC) 6.1 Damp proof course shall be 50 mm thick (unless specified otherwise)

consisting of cement concrete in the proportion (1: 1½: 3) (1 cement, 1 ½ sand, 3 stone chips 10 mm down) with admixture of a water proofing compound as approved by the Consultant. The percentage of admixture shall be as per manufacturer’s specification.

6.2 The surface of the brick work/ stone masonry work shall be leveled and

prepared before laying the cement concrete. Edges of DPC shall be straight and even. The side shuttering shall consist of wooden forms and shall be strongly and properly fixed so that it does not get disturbed during compaction and mortar does not leak through.

6.3 The concrete mix shall be of workable consistency and dense. When the side

shuttering is removed the surface should come smooth without any honey combing. The top surface shall be double chequerred and cured by ponding for at least 7 days. Cement concrete shall be allowed to dry for 24 hours after curing and hot bitumen of grade 85/25 Conforming to IS: 702 at the rate of 1.7 kg/sqm shall be applied over the dried surface of cement concrete properly cleaned with brush and finally with a cloth soaked in kerosene oil. The bitumen shall be applied uniformly so that no blank spaces are left anywhere.

7.0 PLINTH PROTECTION 7.1 Plinths of all buildings shall be protected with 1000 mm wide plinth

protection consisting of 50 mm thick PCC M20 grade with 12 mm maximum size aggregate over 200 mm thick stone soling using 40 mm nominal size, rammed consolidated & grouted with fine sand. Plinth protection shall be laid with a minimum outward slope of 1:50.

7.2 For the purpose of stone filling, the ground shall be dressed consolidated by

ramming or by light rolling & 12 mm thick cushion of sand be laid. Over this, 75 mm thick layer of stone aggregate, with stone size not more than 40 mm, shall be spread uniformly. This shall be then compacted by light roller (by 1/2 ton roller & 4 to 5 passes) or any other means as approved by Consultant. After compacting, sand shall be uniformly spread & water shall be sprayed over it to ensure that the voids are filled with sand. Water shall be spread in such a manner that bulking in sand does not take place.

7.3 This process shall be repeated till the filling reaches the desired level. When

it reaches the finished level, surface shall be flooded with water for 24 hours, allowed to dry & then rammed & consolidated to avoid any settlement at a later stage.





Page 35 of 139

8.0 SAMPLING TESTING AND QUALITY CONTROL 8.1 The Tenderer shall carry out all sampling and testing in accordance with the

relevant Indian Standards and/or International Standards and shall conduct such tests as are called for by the Consultant. Where no specific testing procedure is mentioned, the tests shall be carried out as per the prevalent accepted Engineering practice to the directions of the Consultant. Tests shall be done in the field and at a laboratory, approved by the Consultant and the Tenderer shall submit to the Consultant, the test results in triplicate within three days after completion of a test. The Consultant may, at his discretion, waive some of the stipulations given below, for small and minor operations.

8.2 Material/work found unsuitable for acceptance, shall be removed and replaced by the Tenderer. The works shall be redone as per specification requirements and to the satisfaction of the Consultant.

8.3 All masonry shall be built true and plumb within the tolerances prescribed as

below. Care shall be taken to keep the perpends properly aligned.

a) Deviation in verticality in total height of any wall of a building more than one storey in height shall not exceed +/‐ 12.5 mm.

b) Deviation from vertical within a story shall not exceed +/‐ 6 mm per 3 m

height. b) Deviation from the position shown on the plan of any brickwork more

than one storey in height shall not exceed 12.5 mm. d) Relative displacement between load bearing walls in adjacent storeys

intended to be in vertical alignment shall not exceed 6 mm. e) Deviation of bed joint from horizontal in any length upto 12 m shall not

exceed 6mm, and in any length over 12m it shall not exceed 12.5 mm total.

f) Deviation from the specified thickness of bed‐joints, cross‐joints or

perpends shall not exceed ± 3 mm.





Page 36 of 139

C‐ 07: PLASTERING & POINTING 1.0 SCOPE 1 .1 This specification covers the plastering work on brick or concrete faces of

specified thickness with architectural features wherever necessary. For application of Cement and Cement lime ‐ plaster finishing. IS:1661‐1972 “Code of practice for application of cement and lime plaster finishes” shall be applicable.

2.0 MIX 2.1 Mortar for plastering in the proportion as specified on drawings/

specification, shall be mixed in a dry state and then wetted and mixed thoroughly to obtain the required consistency. The mortar shall be mixed in an approved manner including machine mixing if desired by the Consultant and in batches so that the mortar is consumed within half an hour of mixing. Any mortar for plaster which is partially set shall be rejected and removed from site.

2.2 The mix for plastering shall be as follows:

200 thk. Solid CC block walls Outside Plaster First layer (base coat) of 12 mm thick

(1:6), (1 Cement, 6 Fine sand and second layer (finish coat) of 6 mm thick (1 : 4) (1 Cement, 4 Fine sand)

Inside Plaster 12 mm thick (1 : 6), (1 Cement, 6 Fine sand)

100 thk. Solid CC block walls (To be used only for inside walls)

12 mm thick (1: 4), (1Cement, 4 Fine sand)

Concrete Ceiling Plaster 6 mm thick – (1 : 4), (1Cement, 4 Fine sand)

3.0 APPLICATION 3.1 Before application of plaster, surface is to be prepared conforming to

IS:1661 latest revision. 3.2 In all plaster work, mortar shall be applied with somewhat more than that

the required thickness and well pressed into the joint and in the surface and rubbed and levelled with a flat wooden rule to give required thickness.





Page 37 of 139

3.3 Plaster, when more than 12 mm thick, shall be applied in two coats, base coat followed by the finishing coat. Thickness of base coat shall be just sufficient to fill up all unevenness in the surface; no single coat, however, shall exceed 12 mm in thickness. The undercoat shall be thicker than the upper coat. The overall thickness of the plaster shall not be less than the minimum thickness shown in the drawings or as specified. The undercoat shall be allowed to dry and shrink before applying the second coat of plaster.

3.4 Cement mortar for plastering work shall be used within 30 minutes after

adding water to cement and should be kept agitated at intervals of 10 minutes.

3.5 The undercoat shall be scratched or roughened before it is fully hardened to

form a mechanical key. The method of application shall be ‘thrown on’ rather than ‘applied by trowel’. The finished surface shall be true to line and plumb and the Tenderer shall without any extra cost to Owner make up any irregularity in the masonry/ concrete work with plaster. The mortar shall adhere to the surface intimately when set and there should be no hollow sound when struck. All vertical edges of pillars, door jambs etc. shall be chamfered or rounded off as directed by the Consultant. All corner must be finished to their true angles or rounded. Any plastering that is damaged shall be repaired and left in good condition at the completion of the job without any extra cost to Owner.

3.6 All external plaster shall be done with approved water proofing compound.

The external plaster shall be at least 20mm thick. 3.7 Cement Pointing shall be done on exposed masonry. Exposed faces shall be

cement rule pointed with (1:3) CM. The mortar shall be raked out of the joints to a depth of 12 mm. The dust shall be brushed out of the joints and the wall well wetted. The pointing shall be kept wet for 7 days. During this period it shall be suitably protected from all damages.

3.8 Lime punning:

For plastered surface, where an even smooth surface is specified, lime punning with 5 parts of shell lime properly slaked, sieved and aged, mixed with 1 part clean, washed, sieved, fine sand by volume shall be done. The thickness of lime punning shall not be less than 2 mm and not more than 3 mm. The plastered surface shall be saturated with water before application of the lime punning. The lime punning shall be applied by skilled workmen and given a smooth and even finish.





Page 38 of 139

C‐ 08 : FLOORING & ALLIED WORKS 1.0 SCOPE 1.1 This specification covers furnishing, installation, finishing, curing, testing,

protection, maintenance till handing over various types of floor finishes and allied items of work as listed below:

a) Integral finish to concrete base b) In situ Terrazzo finish d) Metallic hardener like ‘Ironite’ finishes e) IPS Flooring f) Terrazzo Tiled finish g) Glazed tile finish h) Vitrified ceramic tiles finish i) Acid resistant tile finish i) PVC tile finish k) False flooring

2.0 GENERAL 2.1 BASE: The base to receive the finish either formed concrete sub‐base or

floor slab covered under other relevant specifications. 2.2 Only workers specially experienced in particular items of finishing work shall

be engaged; where such workers are not readily available, with the Consultant’s permission, experienced supervisors recommended by the manufacturer shall be engaged. In particular case where the Consultant so desire, the Tenderer shall get the finishing items installed by the manufacturer.

2.3 The surface to be treated shall be thoroughly examined by the Tenderer. Any

rectification necessary shall be brought to the notice of the Consultant and his approval shall be obtained regarding method and extent of such rectification work. For all types of flooring, skirting, dado and similar works, the base to receive the finish shall be adequately roughened by chipping, raking out joints and cleaning thoroughly all dirt, grease etc., with water and hard brush and detergent if required, unless otherwise directed by the manufacturer of any special finishing treatment, the base shall be thoroughly soaked with water and all excess water mopped up. The surface shall be done dry where adhesive are used for fixing the finishes. Prior to commencement of actual finishing the approval of the Consultant shall be taken as to the acceptability of the surface.





Page 39 of 139




etc.) referred to in clause 3.3.0 the former shall prevail. 3.3 Some of the applicable Indian standards, Codes, etc. are referred to here

below:

IS ‐1237 1980 Specification for Cement concrete flooring tiles IS ‐ 1443 1972 Code of practice for laying and finishing of

cement concrete flooring tiles. IS ‐ 2114 1984 Code of practice for laying in situ terrazzo floor IS ‐ 2571 1970 Code of practice for laying‐in‐situ concrete

flooring IS ‐ 5318 1969 Laying of flexible sheet and tile flooring IS: 4441 1980 Code of practice for use of silica type chemical

resistant mortar IS ‐ 4457 1982 Specification for Ceramic unglazed vitreous acid

resistant tiles. IS ‐ 13753 1993 Specification for dust pressed ceramic tiles with

water absorption of E> 10% Group (B III) IS ‐ 13753 1993 Specification for dust pressed ceramic tiles with

water absorption of 6% <E< 10% Group (B II b) IS ‐ 13753 1993 Specification for dust pressed ceramic tiles with

water absorption of 3% <E< 6% Group (B II a) IS ‐ 13753 1993 Specification for dust pressed ceramic tiles with

low water absorption of E< 3% Group (B I)





Page 40 of 139

4.0 MATERIALS 4.1 Materials required for individual finishing items are specified under

respective items. In general, all such materials shall be as per relevant IS Codes where available. In all cases these materials shall be of the best quality available indigenously unless specified otherwise.

4.2 The materials for finishing items must be procured from well‐reputed

specified manufacturers and on the basis of samples approved by the Consultant. The materials shall be ordered, procured and stored well in advance to avoid compulsion to use substandard items to maintain the construction schedule.

5.0 INTEGRAL FINISHING TO CONCRETE BASE 5.1 While the surface of the concrete laid as per specification for “cast‐in situ

concrete and allied works” has been fully compacted and levelled but the concrete is still ‘green’, thick slurry made with neat cement shall be applied evenly and worked in with iron floats. When the slurry starts to set, it shall be pressed with iron floats, to have a firm compact smooth surface without any trowel mark or undulations. This finish shall be as thin as possible by using 2.2 Kg of cement per sqm. of area. The surface shall be kept in shade for 24 hours and then cured for at least 7 days continuously by flooding with water. The surface shall not be subjected to any load or abrasion till 21 days after laying. As desired by the Consultant, the surface, while still ‘green’ shall be indented by pressing strings. The markings shall be of even depth, in straight lines and the panels shall be of uniform and symmetrical patterns.

6.0 IN‐SITU TERRAZZO FINISH 6.1 It shall consist of an underbed and a topping laid over an already laid and

mature concrete base. 6.2 Unless otherwise specified the total thickness of the finish shall be minimum

40mm for horizontal and 20 mm for vertical surface of which the topping shall be not less than 12 mm and 10mm respectively. While the topping shall be of uniform thickness the thickness of underbed may vary, to provide necessary slopes. The vertical surface shall project out 6 mm from the adjacent plaster or other finishes. Necessary cutting into the surface receiving the finish shall be done to accommodate the specified thickness.

6.2.1 All junctions of vertical with horizontal shall be rounded neatly to uniform

radius of 25 mm.





Page 41 of 139

6.3 MIX 6.3.1 UNDERBED : the underbed for floors and similar horizontal surface shall

consist of a mix of 1 part cement, 2 part sand and 4 parts stone chips by volume. For vertical surfaces the mix shall consist of 1 part cement to 3 parts of coarse sand by volume. The stone chips shall be 12.5mm down well graded. Just sufficient water shall be added to give a workable consistency.

6.3.2 TOPPING : The mix for the topping shall be composed of cement, colour

pigment, marble powder and marble chips. Proportions of the ingredients shall be such as to produce the terrazzo of colour, texture and pattern approved by the Consultant. The cement shall be grey, to which pigment shall be added to achieve the desired colour. 3 parts of this mixture to 1 part marble powder by weight shall be added and thoroughly mixed dry. To 1 part of this mix, 1.5 parts of marble chips by volume shall be added and thoroughly mixed dry again. The pigment added shall conform to the relevant Indian Standard specification and must be stable and non fading. It must be very finely ground. The marble powder shall be from white marble and shall be finer than I S Seive No. 30. the size of marble chips may be between 3 mm to 20 mm. Sufficient quantity to cover each visible area shall be prepared in one lot to ensure uniform colour. Sufficient water to make it just workable shall be added, to a quantity of mix that can be used up immediately before it starts to set.

6.4 LAYING 6.4.1 The underbed shall be laid in panels. The panels shall not be more than 5

sq.m. in area of which no side shall be more than 2.5 m long. For exposed locations the maximum area of a panel shall be 2.0 sq.m. The panels shall be laid in alternate bays or chequered board pattern. No panels shall be in contact with another already laid until the latter has contracted to the full extent.

6.4.2 Dividing strips made of aluminium/glass shall be used for forming the

panels. The strips shall exactly match the total depth of underbed plus topping.

6.4.3 After laying, the underbed shall be levelled compacted and brought to

proper grade with a screed or float. The topping shall be laid after about 24 hours while the underbed is still somewhat ‘green’ but firm enough to receive the topping. A slurry of the mixture of cement and pigment already made shall be spread evenly and brushed in just before laying the topping. The topping shall be rolled for horizontal areas and thrown and pressed for





Page 42 of 139

vertical areas to extract all superfluous cement water and to achieve a compact dense mass fully bonded with the underbed. The surface of the topping shall be trowelled over, pressed and brought to a smooth dense surface showing a minimum 75% area covered by marble chips in an even pattern of distribution.

6.5 Curing: The surface after laying shall be left for about 12 to 18 hours and

then cured by allowing water to stand on the surface or by covering with wet sack for four days.

6.6 GRINDING AND POLISHING 6.6.1 When the surface has sufficiently hardened it shall be watered, and ground

evenly with rapid cutting coarse grade (No. 60) grit blocks, till the marble chips are exposed and the surface is smooth. Then the surface shall be thoroughly washed and cleaned. A grout, with already prepared mixture of cement and pigment shall be applied to fill up all pinholes.

6.6.2 This surface shall be cured for 7 days by keeping it moist and then ground

with fine grit block (No. 120). It shall again be cleaned with water, the slurry applied again to fill up pinhole that might have appeared and allowed to be cured again for 5 days. Finally the surface is ground third time with very fine grit blocks (No. 320) to get smooth surface without any pinhole. The grinding shall be done by a suitable machine. Where grinding machine cannot be used hand grinding may be allowed when the first rubbing shall be with carborundum stone of coarse grade (No. 60), second rubbing with medium grade (No. 80) and final rubbing and polished with fine grade (No. 120). The surface shall be cleaned with water, dried and 4 covered with oil free clean sawdust. The final polishing shall be postponed until just before handing over, if desired by the Consultant.

6.6.3 Just before handing over, the surface shall be dusted with Oxalic acid at the

rate of 0.33 gm per sq. m., water sprinkled on it and finished by buffing with felt or hessain bobs. The floor be cleaned with soft moist rag and dried.

7.0 METALLIC HARDENER FINISH 7.1 It shall consist of an underbed and a topping (incorporating iron particles)

laid over an already laid and matured concrete base. 7.2 THICKNESS: 7.2.1 Unless otherwise specified the total thickness of the finish shall be minimum

25mm for horizontal surface of which topping shall not be less than 12 mm.





Page 43 of 139

While topping shall be of uniform thickness, the underbed may vary in thickness to provide necessary slope. The vertical surface shall project 6 mm from adjacent plaster or other finishes. Necessary cutting into the surface receiving the finish shall be done to accommodate the specified thickness.

7.3 MATERIAL: 7.3.1 The hardening compound shall be uniformly graded iron particles, free from

non‐ferrous metal impurities, oil, grease, sand, soluble alkaline compounds or other injurious materials. When desired by the Consultant, actual samples shall be tested.

7.4 MIX 7.4.1 The underbed for floor and similar horizontal surfaces and for vertical

surface shall be as per clause 6.3.1 of this section. 7.4.2 Proportion of metallic hardener shall be as specified or as indicated by the

manufacturer. However, in absence of any such direction 1 part metallic hardener shall be mixed dry with 4 parts cement, by weight. To this mixture 6 mm nominal size stone chips shall be added in proportion of 1 part cement mixed with hardener to 2 parts of stone chips by volume and uniformly mixed. Minimum quantity of water shall be added to make it workable.

7.5 LAYING 7.5.1 The concrete floor shall be laid in panels of 1m x 1m or as directed by the

Consultant. Alternate panels shall be laid on one day followed by the other group of alternate panels the next day. The edges of the panels shall be supported either by wooden strips or flat angle iron pieces fixed in position properly. The concrete floor shall be laid upto the required grade. The forms if any shall remain sufficiently projecting to take the finish. The surface shall be roughened by wire brush as soon as possible.

7.5.2 The junction of floor and walls, floors and dado or skirting shall be rounded

off as directed. 7.5.3 Wooden strips or flat iron pieces shall be removed from their places before

the succeeding alternate layers are laid. The finish shall be laid while the concrete underbed is still very ‘green’ within about 3 hours of laying of the later. The finish shall be of uniform thickness and even dense surface without trowel marks, pinhole etc. The top layer shall be pressed firmly and worked vigorously and quickly to secure full bond with the concrete base. Just when the initial set starts the surface shall be finished and smoothened





Page 44 of 139

with steel trowel. The finish floor shall be cured for 7 days by keeping it wet. 8.0 IPS FLOORING (Concrete Floor finish with floating Coat of Neat Cement) 8.1 It shall consist of an underbed and topping laid on an already laid and

mature concrete base. 8.2 THICKNESS 8.2.1 It shall have thickness of 40 mm for horizontal and 20 mm for vertical

surfaces unless otherwise specified. All junctions between vertical and horizontal work shall be rounded neatly to a uniform radius of 25 mm.

8.3 UNDERBED MIX 8.3.1 The underbed for floor and similar horizontal surfaces consists of a mix of 1

part cement, 2 parts sand and 4 parts stone chips by volume. For vertical surfaces the mix shall consist of 1 part cement to 3 parts sand by volume. The sand shall be coarse. The stone chips shall be 12.5 mm down well graded. Only sufficient water to be added to give a workable consistency.

8.4 TOPPING MIX 8.4.1 The topping shall be floating coat of neat cement using not less than 2.2 kg

of cement per sq. m. area. 8.5 LAYING 8.5.1 The IPS flooring including the underbed shall be laid in alternate bays or in

chequered board pattern. No panel shall be cast in contact with another already laid till the contraction of the latter has already taken place. The maximum area of each panel shall be 5 m x 5m. A cement grout shall be applied and worked in to the surface to receive the finish, the underbed then laid, compacted and levelled to proper grade with a screed or float. The requisite slope as shown in the drawings or directed by the Consultant shall also be provided in under bed only maintaining a minimum thickness of 25 mm at the edges. The topping shall be applied evenly on the underbed while it is not fully set but firm enough and rolled and pressed to get full bond. The topping shall be trowelled to a dense finish to the satisfaction of the Consultant. After the surface is sufficiently set, the finished floor shall be kept moist for 7 days for curing.





Page 45 of 139

9.0 TERRAZZO TILE FINISH

9.1 These shall include terrazzo tiles finish over already laid and mature base of concrete or masonry by means of underbed cement : sand (1:4) mortar.

9.2 THICKNESS 9.2.1 The total thickness including the underbed shall be minimum 40 mm for

floors and 32 mm for walls unless otherwise specified. The skirting, dado and similar vertical surfaces shall project out 6 mm uniformly from the adjacent plaster or other wall finishes. The necessary cuttings into the surface receiving tiled finish, to accommodate the specified thickness shall be done.

9.3 TERRAZZO TILES 9.3.1 The tiles shall, unless specifically permitted in special cases, be machine

made, under quality control in a shop. The tiles shall be pressed hydraulically to a minimum of 140 kg. per sq. cm. Each tile shall bear on its back permanent and legible trade mark of the manufacturer. All angles of the tiles shall be right angles, all edges sharp and true, colour and texture of the wearing face uniform throughout. Tolerance on length, breadth and thickness of tiles shall be as specified in lS‐1237 latest edition. Wearing faces of the tile shall be plane, free from pinholes and other blemishes.

9.3.2 The tiles shall be composed of a backing and topping. The topping measured

as per IS:1237 (latest edition) shall be of uniform thickness not less than 8 mm. The total thickness including the topping shall be as specified but not less than 20 mm in any case. The backing shall be composed of 1 part ordinary grey cement 2 parts of sand and 3 parts of stone chips by weight mixed with water.

9.3.3 The shade and texture of topping shall be as approved by consultant. The

tiles shall be cured at the shop for at least 14 days before delivery to the site. First grinding shall be given to the tiles at the shop before delivery. Tiles shall be packed properly to prevent damage during transit and storage. The tiles must be stored carefully to prevent staining by damp, rust, oil and grease, or other chemicals. Tiles made in each batch shall be kept and used separately so that colour of each area of the floor may remain uniform. The manufacturer shall supply alongwith the tiles the grout mix containing cement and pigment in exact proportions as used in topping of tiles. The container for the grout mix shall be suitably marked to relate it to the particular type and batch of tiles





Page 46 of 139

9.4 MIX: UNDERBED 9.4.1 The underbed for floor and similar horizontal surfaces shall be 1 part cement

2 parts coarse sand 4 parts stone chips by volume (12.5 mm nominal size), mixed with sufficient water. For skirting and dado and all vertical surface it shall be 12 mm thick and composed of 1 part cement and 3 parts coarse sand by volume.

9.5 LAYING 9.5.1 The underbed mortar shall be evenly spread and brought to proper grade

and consolidated to a smooth surface. The surface shall be roughened for better bond. Before the underbed had time to set and while it is still fairly moist but firm, cement shall be hand dusted over it or a cement slurry applied and the tiles shall immediately be placed upon and firmly pressed by wooden mallet on to the underbed until it achieves the desired level. The tiles shall be kept soaked for about 10 minutes just before laying. The joints between tiles shall be as close as possible and not more than 1.5 mm wide. Special care shall be taken to check the level of the surface and the lines of the joints frequently so that they are perfect. When tiles are required to be cut to match the dimensions, these shall be sawn and edges rubbed smooth. The location of cut tiles shall be planned in advance and approval of the Consultant shall be taken.

9.5.2 At the junction of horizontal surface with vertical surface, the tiles on the

former shall enter at least 12 mm under the latter. After fixing, the floor shall be kept moist and allowed to mature undisturbed for 7 days. Heavy traffic shall not be allowed. If desired dividing strips as specified under Clause 6.4 may be used for dividing the work into suitable panels.

9.6 GRINDING AND POLISHING 9.6.1 Procedure shall be same as Clause 6.6.2 Only grinding shall not commence

earlier than 14 days after laying of tiles.

10.0 GLAZED TILE FINISH 10.1 This finish shall be composed of glazed earthware tiles of approved make

and quality, with an underbed laid over a concrete or masonry base. 10.2 THICKNESS 10.2.1 The total thickness shall be minimum 20 mm including the underbed.





Page 47 of 139

10.2.2 The tile finish on vertical surface shall project out 6 mm uniformly from the adjacent plaster or other wall finishes. The necessary cutting into surface receiving the finish, to accommodate the specified thickness shall be done.

10.3 TILES ‐ GLAZED 10.3.1 The tiles shall be of earthware, covered with glaze, white or coloured, plain

or with designs, of 150 mm x 150 mm nominal sizes and 5 mm thick unless otherwise specified.. The tolerance shall be + 1.5 mm for length and breadth and + 0.5 mm for thickness. Specials like internal and external angle beads, covers, cornices, corner pieces etc. shall match. The top surface of the tiles shall be glazed with a gloss or matt unfading stable finish as desired by the Consultant. The tiles shall be true in shape and size. The colour shall be uniform and fractured section shall be fine grained in textures, dense and homogenous. The tiles shall be strong. and free from flaws like cracks, chips craze, spacks, crawlings etc. and other imperfections. The edges and the underside of the tiles shall be completely free from glaze and the underside shall have ribs or indentations for better anchorage with the fixing mortar. The coloured tiles, when supplied shall preferably come from one batch to avoid difference in colour.

10.4 MIX ‐ UNDERBED 10.4.1 The mix for the under bed shall consist of 1 part cement and 3 parts coarse

sand by weight mixed with sufficient water or any other mix if specified. 10.5 LAYING: Laying shall be as per Clause 9.5 10.6 FINISHING 10.6.1 The joints shall be cleaned and flush pointed with white cement and cured

for 7 days by keeping it wet. The surface shall be cleaned with soap or suitable detergent, washed fully and wiped with soft cloth to prevent scratching before handing over.

11.0 PVC TILE FINISH (Rubberised) 11.1 This shall include various types of tiles manufactured from rubber, set with

an adhesive on a concrete or masonry base. An underbed may be required to obtain a satisfactory surface and grade.

11.2 THICKNESS 11.2.1 The thickness of the tiles shall be 3mm unless otherwise specified. The





Page 48 of 139

thickness including underbed shall be 40 mm for floors and 25 mm for walls, unless otherwise specified.

11.3 TILES 11.3.1 Unless otherwise required the tiles shall be square and of approved

dimensions. The tolerance in dimensions shall be +/‐1.5 mm. 11.3.2 The face of the tiles shall be free from porosity, blisters, cracks, embedded

foreign matter or other physical defects which affect appearance or serviceability. All edges shall be cut true and square. The colour shall be non‐fading and uniform in appearance, insoluble in water and resistant to alkalis, cleaning agents and all usual floor polishes.

11.4 FINISHING 11.4.1 If any adhesive marks are present on the surface a soft cloth soaked in

solvent shall be used to wipe them off. The surface shall be cleaned with soft soap, dried and polished or sealed with an approved type of polish or sealant just before handling over.

12.0 VITRIFIED CERAMIC TILE FINISH

The vitrified ceramic tiles shall be polished & of approved shade and of size 300 x 300 mm, 400 x 400 mm, 600 x 600 mm with minimum thickness 7.0 mm and shall be compact and homogenous throughout its cross‐section. These shall be made of finest white clay, quartz, feldspars and calcined metal oxides pressed to minimum 450 kg/cm2 and shall be fully sintered at a temperature of around 1200º . Technical specifications shall be as per international standards ISO‐13006/EN176 and following properties shall be maintained:

Sl. No. Property International Standard

ISO‐136 / EN176 Method of Testing

1 Deviation in length + 0.6% EN98 2 Deviation in thickness + 5.0% EN98 3 Straightness of sides + 0.5% EN98 4 Rectangularity + 0.6% EN98 5 Surface Flatness + 0.5% EN98 6 Water absorption <0.5% EN99 7 MOHS Hardness >6 EN101 8 Flexural strength >27N/mm2 EN100





Page 49 of 139

9 Abrasion resistance <204 mm3 EN12 10 Skid resistance >0.4 ASTM C‐1028 11 Breaking strength 1113 N ASTM C‐648 12 Density >2 DIN S‐1082

13.0 ACID RESISTANT TILE FINISH 13.1 This finish shall be composed of ceramic unglazed vitreous tiles of approved

make and quality, with an underbed laid over a concrete or masonry base. The tiles are laid with chemical resistant mortars.

13.2 THICKNESS 13.2.1 The total thickness shall be minimum 25 mm including the underbed. 13.2.2 The tile finish on vertical surface shall project out 12 mm uniformly from the

adjacent plaster or other wall finishes. The necessary cutting into surface receiving the finish, to accommodate the specified thickness shall be done.

13.3 Tiles – Ceramic unglazed vitreous acid resistant shall generally conform to

IS:4457. 13.3.1 The tiles shall be of vitreous ware and shall be free from deleterious

substances. The acid resistant shall be determined in accordance with appendix –F of IS:4457. The size of tile shall be 150 mm x 150 mm or 200 mm x 200 mm nominal sizes and 12 mm thick unless otherwise specified.. The tolerance shall be +/‐ 2.5 % for length, breadth and thickness. Specials like internal and external angle beads, covers, cornices, corner pieces etc. shall match. The tiles shall be true in shape and size. The colour shall be uniform and fractured section shall be fine grained in textures, dense and homogenous. The tiles shall be strong. and free from flaws like cracks, chips craze, spacks, crawlings etc. and other imperfections. The edges and the underside of the tiles shall be completely free from glaze and the underside shall have ribs or indentations for better anchorage with the fixing mortar. The coloured tiles, when supplied shall preferably come from one batch to avoid difference in colour.

13.4 MIX – UNDERBED & MORTAR 13.4.1 The mix for the under bed and joint filling mortar shall be also of chemical

resistant type conforming to IS: 4441.

Laying: The laying shall be done by approved specialist agency as per recommendation of manufacturer.





Page 50 of 139

14.0 MODULAR ACCESS FLOORING (FALSE FLOORING) 14.1.1 Access flooring wherever required to be provided shall be in modular grid

pattern with grid spacing of approximately 600mm. The flooring shall be supported on ordinary cement concrete floor/slab with integral smooth finish as specified elsewhere.

14.1.2 The flooring shall be of heavy duty type suitable to take up live load of at

least 500 kg/sqm or as may be required for the equipment being supplied. The panel shall have antistatic finish of approved shade. The flooring system shall be supplied and erected by approved agency.

15.0 ACCEPTANCE CRITERIA

The finish shall be checked specially for

♦ Level, slope, plumb as the case may be ♦ Pattern, and symmetry ♦ Alignment of joints, dividing strips etc. ♦ Colour, texture ♦ Surface finish ♦ Thickness of joints ♦ Details of edges, junction etc ♦ Performance

C‐09: STEEL DOORS, WINDOWS, VENTILATORS & LOUVERS 1.0 SCOPE

The work in general shall consist of supplying, erecting and installing of all metal doors, windows, ventilators, louvers, glazed partitions etc. as stipulated here or elsewhere in these specifications with all materials complete including labour and equipment.

2.0 GENERAL 2.1 The Tenderer shall submit 3 copies of shop drawing covering all types of

work under this specification before manufacture. The drawing shall show all dimensions, details of construction, installation, relating to adjoining and related work etc





Page 51 of 139





below: IS ‐ 1038 1983 Specifications for Steel doors, windows and

ventilators IS ‐ 1081 1960 Code of practice for fixing and glazing of metal

(steel and aluminium) doors, windows & ventilators

IS ‐ 1361 1978 Specifications for Steel windows for industrial building

IS: 1477 (Part 1) 2000 Code of practice for painting ferrous metals in buildings ‐ Pretreatment

IS: 1477 (Part 2) 2000 Code of practice for painting ferrous metals in buildings ‐ Painting

IS: 2074 1992 Specifications for ready mixed paint, air drying, red oxide zinc chrome, priming

IS: 3564 1996 Specifications for hydraulically regulated door closers

IS ‐ 4351 2003 Specifications for Steel door frames IS ‐ 7452 1990 Specifications for Hot rolled steel sections for

doors, windows and ventilators 4.0 MATERIALS 4.1 Steel sections used for fabrication of doors, windows, etc. shall be standard

rolled steel section specified in IS:1038, lS‐1361 and IS:4351 or as specified in drawing. The Mild Steel sheets for frames, shutters, louvre blades etc. shall be of approved quality and of gauge mentioned in this specification. Hardware and fixtures of the best quality from approved manufacturers shall only be used. The Tenderer shall specifically state the particular manufacturer’s materials he proposes to use. All hardware and fixtures shall be able to withstand repeated use. Door closers shall conform to IS:3564 and shall be suitable for doors weighing 61‐80 kg unless otherwise stated.





Page 52 of 139

Each closer shall be guaranteed against manufaturing defect for one year and any defect found within this period shall be rectified or the closer replaced free of charge. Concealed door closes shall be either floor mounted or transom mounted, suitable for installation with metal doors. It shall conform to the performance requirements and endurance test stated in IS:3564 ‐ Appendix A.

4.2 The Tenderer shall submit samples of each type of hardware to the Consultant. The approved samples shall be retained by the Consultant for comparison with bulk supply. The mastic for caulking shall be of best quality from a manufacturer approved by the Consultant.

5.0 FABRICATION

5.1 DOOR FRAMES

5.1.1 Frames shall be reinforced for door closers. They shall be mortised, reinforced, drilled and tapped for hinges, lock and bolt strikes. Flush butt welding to form a solid fused joint, so that all frames are square and flat shall be used with sections cut to required length and mitred. Rubber door silencers shall be furnished for the striking jamb. Loose “T” masonry anchors shall be provided. Frames shall finish flush with floor and adjustable floor anchors shall be supplied. Frames shall be brought to site with floor ties/weather bars installed in place.

5.2 DOUBLE PLATE FLUSH DOOR SHUTTERS 5.2.1 Door shutters shall be 45 mm thick, completely flush design and shall

comprise of two sheets of 18G steel sheets, rigidly connected and reinforced inside with continuous vertical 20G stiffeners, spot welded in position at not more than 150 mm on centres. Both edges of doors shall be joined and reinforced to full height by steel channels placed immediately inside and welded to the door faces. Top and bottom of doors shall be reinforced horizontally by steel channels running full width of door. Doors shall not have more than 2.5 mm clearance at jambs and head, shall have proper level on lock stiles and rails to operate without binding, and shall be reinforced at corners to prevent sagging or twisting. Pairs or double doors shall have meeting stile edges beveled or rebated.

5.2.2 Doors shall be mortised, reinforced, drilled and tapped in shop for hinges, locks and bolts. They shall also be reinforced for closer, push‐plates and other surface hardware where necessary. Any drilling and tapping required for surface hardware shall be done at site. Wherever required, provision shall be made for fixing glazing, vision panels, louvers etc. Glazing mouldings





Page 53 of 139

shall be of 18G mild steel or extruded aluminum sections with profiles shown in drawings and suitable for fixing 6 mm glass. Louver blades shall be V or Z shaped and made out of 16G sheets.

5.3 SLIDING DOORS

5.3.1 Sliding doors shall be either single or double plate construction as required and made out of 18 Gauge steel sheets with adequate stiffeners. The Tenderer shall specify the weight of the door in his shop drawing and submit the manufacturer’s catalogue of the sliding gear he proposes to use. Where shown on the drawings the Tenderer shall make provisions for openings in the door for monorail beams. Door shall close positively to exclude rain water from seeping in. Sliding doors shall withstand specified wind loads without buckling or jamming. The door shall slide freely under all ambient conditions.

5.4 Steel Windows, Sashes, Ventilators etc. 5.4.1 These shall conform in all respects to IS:1038, lS‐7452 and lS‐1361 and are as

shown on drawings. The details as called for in the above codes shall be applicable for coupling mullions, transom, weather bars, pivot arrangements for ventilators etc.

5.4.1.1 WINDOWS:

Window shutters shall be hung on projecting hinges. One leaf of the hinges shall be welded into a slot in the outer frame and the other leaf of the hinges riveted to the opening shutters. Hinges may be of the friction type in which case the window shall not be fitted with peg stay. In case of non‐friction projecting hinges, a brass or bronze three holes peg stays 300mm. Long with pegs and brackets, welded or riveted to the frame shall also be provided. Handles shall be of brass or bronze, and shall be mounted on a mild steel handle plate welded to the shutter in such a way that it should be fixed after the shutter is glazed. The handles shall have a two point nose which shall engage with brass, bronze or aluminium alloy as specified, striking plate, on the fixed frame so that it can hold the shutters in a slightly openable as well in a fast position.

5.4.2 Top hung ventilators: These shall be fixed with plain hinges, riveted to the

fixed frames or welded to it after cutting a slot in it. A peg stay 300mm long of brass or bronze with three holes, as in case of windows shall be provided. The locking bracket shall either be fitted to the fixed frame or to the ventilators.





Page 54 of 139

5.4.4 Centre Hung Ventilators: These shall be hung on two pairs of brass of lead / tin/ bronze cup pivots, riveted to the inner and outer frame of the ventilator to permit these to swing through an angle of approximately 85 deg. The opening portion of the ventilators shall be so balanced that it remains open at any desired angle under normal weather condition.

5.4.5 A bronze or brass spring catch shall be provided at the top centre of the

ventilator. A brass cord pulley wheel in a mild steel or malleable iron brackets, shall be fitted with screws or welded at the sill and a cord eye shall be fixed to inner frame of ventilators to facilitate opening of ventilators.

5.5 All welds shall be flush butt welded to form a solid fused joint so that all

frames are square and flat. 5.6 Where composite unit openings are shown on drawings, the individual

window units shall be jointed together with requisite transoms and mullions. All windows shall be inside glazed, fixed with metal glazing beads. All windows, ventilators, sashes shall be fixed with handles, peg stays etc. of approved make and best quality.

5.7 PRESSED STEEL LOUVERS 5.7.1 The louver blade shall be ‘Z’ shaped and made out of 18G sheets in EZ7 steel

frames. The frames shall be of ISMC 100. 5.8 Fabrication drawings shall be submitted by the Tenderer which shall also

include weights of the materials used and got approved from the Consultant.

6.0 SHOP COAT OF PAINT

6.1 Unless otherwise specified in Sub‐section, the shop paint for steel doors,

windows, ventilators, louvers etc. shall be best quality Zinc Chromate primer paint from approved manufacturer conforming to lS‐274. All surface shall be thoroughly cleaned of rust, grease, loose mill scales and foreign matter as per lS‐1477 Part‐I, and given one coat of shop paint. Portions like mullions, transom etc. which will be inaccessible after assembly of units shall be given an extra coat of paint before assembly.

6.2 All steel doors, windows, etc. shall have one shop coat and one site coat of

Zinc chromate paint (Primer) conforming to IS:2074 with a pigment to be specified by the Consultant and two coats of synthetic enamel paint of approved quality and conforming to relevant l.S. Code, unless specified otherwise in these specifications. Wherever required, all steel doors,





Page 55 of 139

windows, etc. shall be hot dip galvanized to give a coating weight of 460 gms to 610 gms per sq.m. One coat zinc chromate primer coat shall then be applied as shop paint.

7.0 HANDLING AND STORAGE All metal doors, windows, etc. shall be packed and crated properly before despatch, to ensure that there will be no damage to the fabricated materials. Loading into wagons and trucks shall be done with all care to ensure safe arrival of materials at site in undamaged condition. All metal doors, windows etc. shall be stored under cover in a way to prevent damage or distortion.

8.0 ASSEMBLY AND ERECTION 8.1.0 In general, the fixing of metal doors, windows ventilators, louvers, etc. shall

conform to IS:1081. The Tenderer shall assemble and install all steel doors, windows, sashes, fixed metal louvers, etc. including transoms and mullions for composite units in respective places keeping proper lines and levels, and in approved workmanlike manner, to give trouble free and leak‐proof installation. If required by the Consultant, the installation shall have to be carried out under the supervision of the manufacturer’s staff. The Tenderer shall take every precaution against damage of the components during installation. Necessary holes chases etc. required for fixing shall be made by the Tenderer and made good again as per original, after installation.

8.2 After installation of metal doors, windows, etc. all abrasions to shop‐coat of

paint shall be retouched and made good with the same quality of paint used in shop‐coat.

8.3 All coupling mullions, transoms, frames. etc. in contact with unpainted steel and other members, shall be well embedded in mastic. The Tenderer shall bring to the site the mastic cement in original sealed containers of manufacturer and shall apply it as per the instructions.

8.4 Door shutters, partitions, hardware fixtures etc. shall be fixed only after

major equipments have been installed in rooms. Wherever required, nylon cords of approved quality shall be supplied along with pivoted sashes and shall be of adequate length to terminate one meter from the floor. Loose ends of cords shall end in metal or plastic pull as approved by the Consultant.





Page 56 of 139


9.1 FOR FABRICATED ITEMS

a) Overall dimension shall be within + 1.5 mm of the size

b) Mullions, transoms etc. shall be in one length and permissible deviations from straightness shall be limited to 1.5 mm from the axis of the member.

c) Door and window shutters shall operate without jamming. The clearance at head and jamb for door shutters shall not exceed 1.5 mm. For double leaf doors, the gap at the meeting of stiles shall not be more than 1.5mm

d) Door leaves shall be undercut wherever required.

e) Doors, windows, frames etc. shall be on a true plane, free from warp or buckle.

f) All welds shall be dressed flush on exposed and contact surfaces.

g) Correctness of location and smoothness of operations of all shop installed hardware and fixtures.

h) Provision for hardware and fixtures to be installed at site.

i) Glazing clips, fixing devices etc. shall be supplied in adequate numbers

j) Shop coats shall be properly applied.

k) Glazing beads shall be cut with mitered corners.

9.2 FOR INSTALLED ITEMS a) Installations shall be at correct location, elevation and in general,

on a true vertical plane.

b) Fixing details shall be strictly as shown on drawings.

c) Assembly of composite units shall be strictly as per the drawings with mastic caulking at transoms and mullions, gaskets, weather strips etc. complete.

d) All frames on external walls shall be mastic caulked to prevent leakage through joint between frames and masonry.

e) All openable sections shall operate smoothly without jamming.





Page 57 of 139

f) Locks, fasteners etc. shall engage positively. Key shall be non‐interchangeable.

g) Cutting to concrete or masonry shall be made good and all abrasions to shop paint shall be touched up with paint of same quality as shop paint.

C‐10: WOODEN WORK, CARPENTRY & JOINERY

1.0 SCOPE This shall include supply, fitting and fixing of timber frames to doors and windows with M.S. Holdfasts, panelled or flush doors, windows, shutters, etc. as shown in drawings, including a prime coat of approved paint/varnish or fixing of plastic laminate where called for. This shall also include the supply and fixing of all hardware and fixtures.

2.0 CODES 2.1 All applicable standards, acts and codes of practice referred to shall be the



etc.) referred to in clause 2.3. the former shall prevail. 2.3 Some of the applicable Indian standards, Codes, etc. are referred to here

below:

IS: 204 (Part 1) 1991 Specification for Tower bolts‐ ferrous metals ; IS: 204 (Part 2) 1992 Specification for Tower bolts‐ Non ferrous

metals IS: 205 1992 Specification for Non‐ferreus metal butt hinges IS: 206 1992 Specification for Tee and strap binges IS: 207 1964 Specification for Gate and shutter hooks and

eyes IS: 208 1996 Specification for Door handles IS: 281 1991 Specification for Mild steel sliding door bolts for

use with padlocks. IS: 287 1993 Recommendation for maximum permissible

moisture contents of timber used for different





Page 58 of 139

purposes. IS:‐ 303 1989 Specification for Plywood for general purpose IS:362 1991 Specification for Parliament hinges IS: 363 1993 Specification for Hasps and staples IS: 364 1993 Fanlight catch IS: 401 2001 Code of practice for preservation of timber IS: 451 1999 Technical supply condition for wood screws IS: 452 1973 Specification for Door springs, vatl‐tail type IS: 453 1993 Specification for Double acting spring hinges IS: 723 1972 Specification for Steel counter sunk head wire

nails IS: 729 1979 Specification for Drawer locks, cup board locks,

and box locks IS: 848 1974 Specification for Synthetic resin adhesives for

plywood (Phenolic & Aminoplastic) IS: 851 1978 Specification for Synthetic resin adhesive for

construction work (non structural ) in wood IS: 852 1994 Specifications for animal glue for general wood

working purposes. IS: 1019 1974 Specification for Rim latches IS: 1141 1993 Code of practice for seasoning of timber IS:1200(Pt. XIV) 1984 Method of measurement of Building and Civil

Engineering works ‐ Glazing IS:1200(Pt. XXI) 1973 Method of measurement of Building and Civil

Engineering works‐ Wood work and joinery IS: 1328 1996 Specification for Veneered decorative plywood IS: 1341 1992 Specification for Steel Butt hinges

IS: 1378 1987 Specification for Oxidized copper finishes IS: 1658 1977 Specification for Fiber hard board IS: 1659 1990 Specification for Block boards IS: 1823 1980 Specification for Floor door stoppers IS: 1868 1996 Specification for Anodic coating on Aluminium IS: 1911 1967 Schedule of unit weights of building materials IS:2191 (Part‐ 1) 1983 Specification for wooden flush door shutters

(cellular & hollow core type) – plywood face panels

IS‐2191(Part‐ 2) 1983 Specification for wooden flush door shutters (cellular & hollow core type) ‐ Particle board face panels and hard board

IS: 2202 (Part 1) 1999 Specification for wooden flush door shuters (solid core type) – plywood face panels

IS: 2202 (Part ‐2 1983 Specification for wooden flush door shuters





Page 59 of 139

(solid core type) – Particle board face panels and hard board

IS: 2209 1976 Specification for Mortise locks (vertical type) IS:2380 (Parts 1 to 21)

1977 Method of test for wood particle board and boards from lignocellulosic materials

IS:2380 (Part 22) 1981 Method of test for wood particle board and boards from lignocellulosic materials – Determination of surface gulability

IS: 2380 (Part 23) 1981 Method of test for wood particle board and boards from lignocellulosic materials – Vibration test for particle boards

IS: 2681 1993 Non ferrous metal sliding door bolts (aldrops) for use with pad locks

IS: 2835 1987 Flat transparent sheet glass (3rd Revision). IS: 3087 1985 Specification for wood particle board (medium

density) for general engineering purpose IS: 3097 1980 Specification for Veneered particle boards (1st

Revision) IS: 3400‐(Pt.II) 1980 Method of test for vulcanized rubbers ‐Hardness IS:3400‐(Pt.IV) 1987 Method of test for vulcanized rubbers ‐

Accelerated aging IS:3400‐(Pt.IX) 1978 Method of test for vulcanized rubbers ‐Relative

density and density IS: 3564 1986 Specification for Door closers (Hydraulically

regulated) IS: 3618 1966 Phosphate treatment of iron and steel for

protection against corrosion IS: 3813 1967 Specification for ‘C’ hooks for use with swivels IS: 3818 1992 Specification for Continuous (Piano) hinges IS: 3847 1992 Specification for Mortise night latches IS: 4020 (Part 1 to 16) 1998 Methods of tests for wooden flush Doors (Type

tests) IS: 4021 1995 Specification for Timber door, window and

ventilator frames IS: 4827 1983 Electroplated coating of nickel and chromium on

copper and copper alloys IS: 4948 2002 Specification for Welded steel wire fabric for

general use. IS: 4992 1975 Specification for Door Handles for mortise locks

(vertical type) IS: 5187 1972 Specification for Flush bolts IS: 5523 1983 Method of testing anodic coating on aluminium

& its alloys.





Page 60 of 139

IS: 5930 1970 Specification for Mortise latch (vertical types) IS: 6318 1971 Specification for Plastic window stays &

fasteners IS: 6607 1972 Specification for Rebated mortise locks (vertical

type) IS: 6760 1972 Specification for Slotted countersunk head wood

screws IS: 7196 1974 Specification for Hold fasts IS: 7197 1974 Specification for Double action floor springs

(without oil check) for heavy doors IS: 7534 1985 Specification for Mild steel bolts with holes for

padlocks 3.0 MATERIALS

3.1 TIMBER 3.1.1 Unless otherwise specified, all timber shall be best quality well seasoned

Grade I teakwood free from large or loose knots, cracks or other defects. Where specified, timber shall be treated with approved wood preservative before use. Before starting the carpenter’s work, the Tenderer shall have the rough timber approved by the Consultant. Size of doors and windows frame shall be 100 x 60mm.

3.2 LAMINATED PLASTIC SHEETS 3.2.1 All laminated plastic sheets shall be minimum 1.50 mm thick and shall be

Formica, Decolam or approved equivalent make. The colour, pattern, finish and texture shall be approved by the Consultant and the bulk supply procured in sheet sizes which will ensure the least number of joints in one surface.

3.3 FLUSH DOORS 3.3.1 Flush door shall be solid core doors with commercial or decorative faces and

hardwood edges. It shall have 3 layer flat pressed teak wood particle board (Commercial veneer) bonded with BWP type phenol formaldehyde conforming to lS‐848 and total thickness shall be 35 mm. The board core shall conform to lS‐3087 Type‐1. The door shall be given 35 x 12 mm teak wood beading all around as per drawings and as directed by the Consultant.





Page 61 of 139

3.4 FITTINGS AND FIXTURES 3.4.1 Fixtures and fittings for doors, windows, furniture etc. shall be as shown on

drawing and as directed by the Consultant. These shall be of heavy type, best quality and from approved manufacturer.

4.0 JOINERY 4.1 GENERAL 4.1.1 The work shall be done by skilled carpenters as per details shown on

drawings or as instructed by the Consultant. Framing timber and other work shall be closed fitting with proper wood joinery, accurately set to required lines or levels and rigidly secured in place.

4.1.2 The surface of frames etc. which will come in contact with masonry after

fixing, shall be given two coats of approved paint before fixing. Mastic caulking shall be done after fixing external door and window frames. Special care shall be taken to match the grain of timber of plywood which will be subsequently polished. Screwing or nailing will not be permitted to the edge of plywood or chipboard sheets.

4.1.3 Fixing of frames and partitions shall generally be with 40 mm x 5 mm x 225

mm long M.S. Hold fasts at bifurcated end and grouted with (1:2:4) cement concrete, The gap between masonry and external door and window frame shall be caulked with mastic. M.S. grills or guard bars shall be provided to windows where called for in the specification.

4.2 FINISH 4.2.1 All carpentry work after finishing shall be sand papered smooth, A primer

coat of paint shall be given after inspection by the Consultant to all surfaces other than those which shall be subsequently polished or covered with laminated plastic sheet.

4.3 SURFACE TREATMENT 4.3.1 When shown on drawings, decorative ply or laminated plastic sheets shall be

bonded under pressure to the surface to be finished. The adhesive used shall be of a approved brand and brought to site in sealed containers. The rate of application and the length of time for which the pressure is to be applied shall be as per the manufacturer’s instructions. The edge of sheets shall be protected by teak lipping or beveled as shown on drawings.





Page 62 of 139

4.4 PRESERVATIVE 4.4.1 Where required as per the drawings or by the Consultant, timber shall be

treated with specified preservative strictly in accordance with the manufactuer’s instructions and to the satisfaction of the Consultant.

5.0. FITTINGS AND FIXTURES: 5.1 The work covered under these specifications consist of supplying different

types of fittings and fixtures required for teak wood door shutters etc., complete in strict accordance with these specifications and drawings/samples approved.

5.2 All fittings and fixtures shall be of heavy quality brass, anodised aluminium, iron oxidised (M.S) or as specified. These shall be well made, reasonably smooth and free from sharp edges, corners, flaws and other defects. Screws holes shall be counter sunk to suit the heads of the specified screws. All hinges pins shall be of steel for brass hinges and aluminium alloy NR‐6 or steel pins for aluminium hinges with nylon washers or as specified. All riveted heads pertaining to hinge pins shall be well‐formed. Screws supplied for fittings shall be of the same metal and finish as the fittings. However brass cadmium plated / chromium plated screws shall be supplied with aluminum fittings. Samples of each fixture / fitting shall be furnished by the Tenderer for the approval of the Consultant and got approved from him before placing bulk order for purchase. The fittings and fixtures to be incorporated in the work shall be strictly according to the approved sample. Fittings shall be fixed in proper position as shown in the drawing and as directed by the Consultant. These shall be truly vertical or horizontal as the case may be. Screws shall be driven home with a screw driver and not hammered in. Recess shall be cut to the exact size and depth of fittings and fixtures shall be done in a workman like manner and any damages (one either to fittings and fixtures or the shutter frames etc.) Should be rectified by the Tenderer at his own cost.

5.3 BUTT HINGES : 5.3.1 Brass and aluminum hinges shall be manufactured from the extruded

sections and shall be free from cracks and other defects. M.S. butt hinges shall be cranked and manufactured from M.S. Sheets. All butt hinges conform to latest I.S. specifications. The size of butt hinges shall be taken as the length of the hinge. Width of the hinge shall be measured from the centre line of hinge pin to end of flange.





Page 63 of 139

5.4 PARLIAMENTARY HINGES : 5.4.1 These shall be manufactured from cast brass or aluminum or M.S. and shall

be free from cracks and other defects. The size of the parliamentary hinges shall be taken as the width between open flanges, while the depth shall be as specified.

5.5 PIANO HINGES : 5.5.1 These shall conform to I.S. specifications and shall be either brass oxidised,

aluminum anodised, iron oxidised (M.S.) or as specified. Piano hinges shall be fixed in the entire length of the cupboard shutters in a single piece. No joints are allowed.

5.6 TOWER BOLTS: 5.6.1 The tower bolts shall be of the following types :

a) M.S. semi barrel tower bolt with MS sheet pressed barrel and G.I. bolt or with M.S. barrel and M.S. sheet bolt.

b) Oxidised brass barrel tower bolt with brass sheet barrel and rolled or

drawn brass bolt. c) Anodised aluminum tower bolt with barrel and bolt of extruded sections

of aluminum alloy. 5.6.2 In case of M.S. tower bolt plates and straps after assembly shall be firmly

riveted or spot welded properly. 5.6.3 The knobs of brass tower bolts shall be cast and the bolt fixed into the knob

firmly as per I.S. specifications. The tower bolt shall be finished to correct shape and pattern so as to have a smooth action. Wherever specified, aluminum barrel tower bolts shall be manufactured from extruded sections of barrel and bolts.

5.6.4 Knobs shall be properly screwed to the bolt and riveted at the back. The size

of the tower bolt shall be taken as the length of barrel without top socket. 5.7 FLUSH BOLTS : 5.7.1 These shall be cast brass and shall be finished chromium plated / oxidised,

as specified. The size of the flush bolt shall be taken as the length of the flush plate without top socket.





Page 64 of 139

5.8 ALDROPS : 5.8.1 These shall be oxidised brass or anodised aluminum, iron oxidised or as

specified and shall be capable of smooth sliding action and shall be as per IS:2681‐1964. Brass sliding door bolt (aldrop) shall be made from rolled brass. The hasp shall be of cast brass and screwed to the bolt in a workman like manner. Alternatively the hasp and the bolt may be in one piece. Bolts shall be finished to shape and threaded with worth standard and provided with round brass washers and nuts of square or hexagonal shape. All components shall be smooth and polished. The leading dimensions of aldrop shall be as per the length of the bolt and specified diameter.

5.9 DOOR HANDLES – BOW / PLATE HANDLES :

5.9.1 These shall be of cast brass of specified size, shape and pattern as approved by the Consultant. Brass handles shall be finished bright, chromium plated or oxidised as specified. Aluminum or iron oxidised (M.S) handles shall be of specified size, shape and pattern. The size of the handle is taken as the inside grip of the handle. In case of iron oxidised handles, the same shall be manufactured from M.S. sheet pressed into oval section as per I.S.

5.10 MORTISE LOCK :

5.10.1 Mortise lock with latches and a pair of level handles shall be 6 levers, with zinc alloy pressure die cast / brass or as specified body of approved quality, and shall be right or left handed as specified. The pair of handles shall be either brass chromium plated or anodixed aluminium of approved shape and pattern or as specified. It shall be of the best Indian make of approved quality. The size of the lock shall be determined by its length. The lock for single leaf door shall have plain face and that for double leaf door a rebated face. Level handles with springs shall be mounted on plates and shall be of approved quality, anodised aluminium or as specified.

5.11 HYDRAULIC DOOR CLOSER : 5.11.1 Hydraulic door closer shall be of approved quality and make. The operation

of the Hydraulic door closer shall be very smooth. 5.11.2 This should be of H.D.‐66 for external / main doors and elegant – 63 for all

internal doors. The overall height should not be more than 170 mm. for H.D.‐66 and 160 mm. for elegant‐63. Base shall be 110 x 60 mm. for H.D.‐66 and 100 x 55 mm. for elegant – 63. weighing not less than 4.5 kg. For H.D. – 66 and 4 kg. for elegant – 63. Speed of the Hydraulic door closer shall be





Page 65 of 139

adjustable and latch closing also shall be adjustable type. Suspension and lubrication of door closer shall be in perfect line and level.

5.12 The Tenderer shall provide for all the incidentals required for fixing these

fixtures and fittings such as cadmium plated screws etc. Fittings and fixtures shall be fixed securely in a workman like manner all as directed by the Consultant. Any of the fixture damaged during the fixing shall be removed and new one fixed in their place and the surface of joinery made good where affected, at his own expense. Mortise plates shall be used over holes where the bolts enter in the wood work. Metal sockets shall be provided to all bolts where the shoot enter brick, stone, concrete etc. The incidental fixtures like mortise plates, metal sockets, screws etc. shall not be paid for separately

6.0 ACCEPTANCE CRITERIA 6.1 DOOR AND WINDOW FRAMES 6.1.1 All frames shall be square and flat at the time of delivery and shall be

checked for dimensions and corner angles. After fixing they shall be in a true vertical plane. All external door and window frames shall be caulked with mastic.

6.2 DOOR AND WINDOW SHUTTERS 6.2.1 These shall be of proper size, shape and design and free of warps. When

fixed to frames these shall operate smoothly without jamming and all latching or locking devices shall engage properly without under pressure.

6.3 DOOR AND WINDOW FITTINGS 6.3.1 One set of all approved door and window fittings shall be submitted to the

Consultant for reference and comparison with the fittings being provided.

C‐11: ROLLING SHUTTERS & GRILLS

1.0 SCOPE 1.1.0 This specification covers the design, supply of materials, fabrication, delivery

and erection of Rolling Shutters/Grills with motor drives and/or manual operation including all accessories as hereinafter specified. All electrical work shall be in accordance with the latest Indian Electricity Rules.





Page 66 of 139





below:

IS ‐ 6248 1979 Specification for Rolling Shutters and Grills

IS – 10451 1983 Steel sliding shutters 3.0 FABRICATION

3.1 COMPONENTS

a) Slats for rolling shutters shall be made from tested bright cold rolled, annealed M.S. strips, not less than 0.9 mm thick for shutters upto 3.5 M wide and not less than 1.24 mm thick for shutters 3.5 M wide and above, machine rolled at 75 mm rolling centres, interlocking with each other. The profile will be such as to prevent excessive deflection under specified wind load.

b) Rolling grill shall be constructed out of 6 mm dia rods at 35 mm on

centres running horizontally flexibly connected with vertical links spaced not more than 200 mm centres. Alternatively, rolling grills shall be made from perforated slats of approved design reinforced with 6 mm dia. rods.

c) End locks shall be heavy type M.C.I./C.I. and shall be provided at each

end of alternate slats. d) Bottom bars shall be finished with two angles not less than 6 mm thick

for external shutters. When shown on drawings a flexible weather strip shall be applied to make tight contact with the floor.

e) Guides shall be of such depth as to retain the shutter under a wind

pressure of 200 kg/sq.m. The minimum thickness of guide to be 12 G.





Page 67 of 139

f) Shafts shall be of steel pipe of sufficient size to carry the torsional load

with a maximum deflection of 1/360th of span. Grease packed ball bearings or bushings shall be provided for smooth trouble free operation.

g) Hoods shall be formed of not less than 20 gauge steel, suitably

reinforced to prevent sag.

h) Locks shall be slide bolt and hasp, or cylinder lock operable from one or both sides. Provision for securing hand chain with padlock, provisions for removable handle for hand cranks etc. shall be made as desired by the Consultant.

i) Power unit shall be suitable for 3 phase, 50 cycle, 400 volts A.C. Power

supply and shall be either floor or wall mounted unit. The motor shall be of sufficient capacity to move the unit. The motor shutter shall move in either direction at speed of 0.3 metres per second. In addition to the gear motor each standard power unit shall include a magnetic brake, a reversing starter with built‐in overload protection, a geared limit switch and one push button station located inside the building unless otherwise stated. It is desirable that the bottom bar of motor operated doors shall be provided with a sensitive edge, electrically connected to stop the travel of the door on meeting an obstruction.

k) Operating chains shall be of tested quality, heavily galvanized and with

all ends rounded to assure smooth operation and hand protection. l) Reduction gears shall be of high strength grey cast iron, machine

mounted from machine cut patterns. 3.2 MANUALLY OPERATED SHUTTERS/GRILLS

3.2.1 Manually operated shutters shall be easily operable by one person. The

speed of operation shall be about 0.3 metres per second. In general, manually operated shutters shall be push pull type of opening upto 9 sq. metre in area. Larger shutters shall be either chain and gear operated or crank and gear operated. The crank handle shall be removable. All shutters shall be lockable from one or both sides as desired by the Consultant.

3.3 POWER OPERATED SHUTTER/GRILL 3.3.1 These shall be operable from a push button station conveniently located

besides the door or as shown on drawings. One emergency hand





Page 68 of 139

chain/crank operation shall also be provided for use in case of failure of the electric system.

4.0 FIXING 4.1 Brackets shall be fixed on the lintel/beam or under the lintel/beam as

specified in item with rawlplugs and screws, bolts, washers etc. The shaft along with the spring shall then be fixed on the brackets. The guide channels shall be fixed to the wall through the plates welded to the guides. These plates and brackets shall be fixed by means of steel screws, bolts and rawlplugs drilled into the wall. The plates and screws, bolts shall be concealed in plaster to make their locations invisible. Fixing shall be done accurately in a workman like manner that the operation of the shutter is easy and smooth. All grout holes and damages on the wall while fixing of shutters shall be made good by the Tenderer at no extra cost to the Owner. The Tenderer shall ensure smooth and easy working of shutters.

5.0 PAINTING 5.1 All the members of the rolling shutter shall be thoroughly cleaned off dust,

scales, rust etc. and shall be given approved priming coat of red oxide paint before fixing the shutter in position and then shall be painted with two coats of flat/synthetic enamel paint of approved quality and shade.


6.1 FIELD INSPECTION

After installing the shutters, the Tenderer shall test the performance of the shutter in the presence of the Consultant. The doors shall be smoothly operable under all ambient conditions. All control and locking devices shall give fault‐free performance.

6.2 GUARANTEE

The Tenderer shall give one year’s guarantee for the successful operation of the shutters.





Page 69 of 139

C‐12: ALUMINIUM WORKS

1.0 SCOPE

1.1 The work in general shall consist of fabrication, supplying, erecting and

installing of all aluminium doors, windows, ventilators, louvers, glazed partitions etc. as stipulated here or elsewhere in these specifications with all materials complete including labour and equipment.

2.0 GENERAL: 2.1 The Tenderer shall submit 3 copies of shop drawing covering all types of

work under this specification before manufacture. The drawing shall show all dimensions, member designations, details of construction, installation, relating to adjoining and related work etc The work shall be carried out as per approved shop drawings, relevant detailed approved shop drawings.

2.2 The Tenderer shall submit 3 copies of shops drawings covering all

type/details of work and generally shown in architectural drawings and envisaged under these specifications before manufacture. The drawings shall show all dimensions, details of constructions, installation of fixtures and relation to adjoining and related works. No fabrication work shall be undertaken prior to obtaining approval of the shop drawings from the Consultant. The Tenderer shall intimate at the time of tendering the type of sections he proposes to use on the works.





below:

IS – 733 1983 Specifications for wrought aluminium and aluminium alloy bars, rods, sections (for general engineering purposes)

IS – 181 1960 Code of practice for fixing and glazing of metal





Page 70 of 139

(steel and aluminium) doors, windows & ventilators

IS – 1868 1996 Specifications for anidic coatings on aluminium and its alloys

4.0 MATERIALS 4.1 Aluminium alloy for extruded sections for the above work shall correspond

to I.S‐733 (extruded sections shall conform to IS Designation HE 9 – WP. Hollow sections shall conform to IS Designation HV9‐WP) and shall be anodised before incorporating in the work. The Door, Window, Ventilator, glazing framework, beadings, hinges, pegstays, stiles, mullions, beadings, transoms and handles etc., shall be of aluminium anodised section as shown in detailed approved drawings. All aluminum sections shall be from approved reputed manufacturer.

4.2 The Tenderers can also propose nearest alternative sections they

manufacture/posses without changing the elevation, structural stability and functional requirement. Consultant reserves the right to accept the alternative section or otherwise. The sections shall be structurally suitable to withstand all the loads, the members have to sustain.

4.3 Counter sunk screws, nuts, bolts, washers, rivets and other miscellaneous

fastenings devices shall be of approved brass cadmium plated or stainless steel as specified in the approved drawing. Each door leaf shall be prepared to receive glazed panel of required thickness.

4.4 Glazing shall be done with neoprene dry set glazing gasket (of best quality

and approved make) with snap – in – beveled white anodised matt finish aluminium metal glazing stops inside and outside,

5.0 FABRICATION: 5.1 DOORS 5.1.1 The frames shall be manufactured square and flat, the corners of the frame

being fabricated to true right angle. All the fixed, sliding and opening frames shall be constructed of sections which have been to length, mitred, welded and mechanically fixed at the corners.

5.1.2 Where hollow sections are used with welded joints, argon‐arc welding or

flash butt welding shall be employed (Gas welding or brazing not to be done). In case welded joints are used, anodising shall be done after fabrication as a whole. All welding shall be on unexposed sides in order to





Page 71 of 139

prevent pitting / discoloration of other surface imperfections after fixing etc. 5.1.3 Necessary allowance shall be made while manufacturing the aluminium

door entrances, wall spans and glazing for receiving plaster. Field fabrication of frames shall be done only if permitted by Consultant.

5.1.4 A thick layer of clear transparent lacquer based on methacrylates or

cellulose butyrate shall be applied on the finished sections of the aluminium work by the Tenderer to protect the surfaces from wet cement, lime, dirts, dust etc during the construction activities. The size for door, window or ventilator frames shall not vary by more than (+/‐) 1.5 mm.

5.1.5 All aluminium surfaces in contact with masonry or concrete shall be given a

thick coat of bitmastic paint. After fabrication, aluminium sections shall be protected from construction hazards that may damage their appearance or finish. All exposed surfaces of aluminum door entrance shall be protected by masking tape during transshipment and erection

5.2. WINDOWS, VENTILATORS AND GLAZINGS 5.2.1 The frames shall be manufactured square and flat. The corners of the

frames shall be fabricated to true right angles. All the fixed, sliding, openable frames shall be constructed from sections which have been cut to length, mitred and mechanically jointed or welded at the corners.

5.2.2 Where hollow sections are used with welded joints, argon arc welding or

flash butt welding shall be employed (Gas welding or brazing not to be done). Sub‐dividing bars of units shall be tennoned and rivetted into the frames. In case welded joints are used, all welding shall be on unexposed sides in order to prevent pitting, discoloration and other surface imperfections after finishing.

5.2.3 The dimensions shown in the drawing are overall heights and widths to the

outside of frames of aluminium windows. The side‐hung shutters shall have projected friction type hinges of aluminium alloy. Concealed projected hinges having structural stability and of good quality will also be considered only after the inspection of the sample submitted by the Tenderer

5.2.4 The necessary pegstays, handles, window fasteners etc shall be of

aluminium. The handle shall be mounted on a handle plate rivetted to the opening frame. The pegstays shall be 300 mm. long or as required, complete with peg and locking bracket and shall have holes for keeping the shutter open in three different positions. Field fabrication of frames shall be done only if permitted by Consultant.





Page 72 of 139

5.2.5 The complete fabricated assembly shall be anodised in approved satin finish with minimum film thickness of 0.015 mm for the entire surface. A thick layer of clear transparent lacquer based on methacrylate or cellulose butyrate shall be applied on the finished sections of the aluminium windows etc. by the supplier to protect the surfaces from wet cement, lime, dirt, dust etc during the installation. The lacqure coating shall be removed after installation is complete, if approved by the Consultant and all sections of the windows shall be protected by PVC film covering

6.0 HARDWARE: 6.1 All sections and hardware shall have anodic film and cover a minimum

thickness of 0.015 mm 6.2 All doors shall have off‐set pivots, double action (180 minimum swing) floor

springs with oil check boxes of approved manufacture. All doors shall have 4 lever concealed brass body mortise lock without handles as per manufactures design, with concealed flush C.P. brass tower bolts provided at suitable locations. All doors shall have push plates of design shown in the approved drawing as described in the schedule of quantities. All entrances shall be without thresholds.

6.3 All cutouts, recess, mortising or milling and operations required for fixing

the hardware shall be accurately made reinforced with pacing plate as required to ensure adequate strength of the connection.

6.4 All the hardware accessories shall be of best approved type and of anodised

finish same as of rate frames and other sections. Each lock shall be supplied with two stainless steel keys and each key shall be with number stamped thereon according to the number on doors so installed.

6.5 All hardware shall be free from defects which may affect the appearance

and serviceability. All hardware shall be fixed after obtaining the prior approval of the Consultant.

6.6 Approved samples of hardware shall be kept in the custody of the

Consultant. Working and moving parts of lock sets shall be accurately fitted to smooth, close bearings and shall be free from rattle.

6.7 The floor springs shall be of heavy duty type and should allow door

operation smoothly. 6.8 The tenderer shall furnish a guarantee for all finishing and quality of

hardware items covered under this section and which shall remain free from





Page 73 of 139

defects of any kind, either materials and / or workmanship for a period of one year (unless otherwise specified) from the date of completion / handling over of work.

6.9 The Tenderer shall repair or replace any and all defective work and damage

caused, at any time or times during that period within 3 days from the written notice. This shall be done without any extra cost to the Owner.

7.0 FIXING

7.1 The frames shall be accurately fixed in the flooring/brick masonry or R.C.C

works. The fixing of the frame shall be done with cadmium plated brass counter sunk screws driven on to the teak wood, rough ground, or fixed to the wall with holdfasts as directed by the Consultant, and as shown in approved drawings.

7.2 All aluminum works shall be fixed in position as per relevant Indian Standard

Specifications and code of practice for fixing and glazing of aluminum work. Joints between metal and masonry shall be neatly painted with matching cement and excess materials shall be removed.

7.3 Fixing of aluminum door entrances, hardware etc shall be done in best

workmanship like manner true to line, level, plane, plumb etc and all as directed by the Consultant. Breaking of floor for providing floor springs and restoration of the floor finishes to the original specification and finishes and minor additions and alternations to the openings shall be deemed to have been included in the quoted rates.

7.4 All aluminum windows shall be fixed in position as per IS : 1081. All joints

between metal and masonry / rough ground wooden frame shall be fully caulked with mastic or ploysulphidc compound in order to ensure water tight joints. Joints shall be neatly painted with matching cement and excess materials shall be removed. Hardware shall be fixed in workman like manner all as directed by the Consultant.

8.0 HANDLING AND STORAGE All aluminum doors, windows, etc. shall be packed and crated properly before despatch, to ensure that there will be no damage to the fabricated materials. Loading into wagons and trucks shall be done with all care to ensure safe arrival of materials at site in undamaged condition. All Doors, Windows etc. shall be stored under cover in a way to prevent damage or distortion.





Page 74 of 139


9.1 For Fabricated Items a) Overall dimension shall be within + 1.5 mm of the size b) Mullions, transoms etc. shall be in one length and permissible deviations

from straightness shall be limited to 1.5 mm from the axis of the member.

c) Door and window shutters shall operate without jamming. The

clearance at head and jamb for Door shutters shall not exceed 1.5mm. For double leaf Doors, the gap at the meeting of stiles shall not be more than 1.5mm.

d) Door leaves shall be undercut wherever required. e) Doors, Windows, frames etc. shall be on a true plane, free from warp or

buckle. f) All welds shall be dressed flush on exposed and contact surfaces. g) Correctness of location and smoothness of operations of all shop

installed hardware and fixtures. h) Provision to be made for hardware and fixtures to be installed at site. i) Glazing clips, fixing devices etc. shall be supplied in adequate numbers j) Shop coats shall be properly applied. k) Glazing beads shall be cut with mitered corners.

9.2 For Installed Items a) Installations shall be at correct location, elevation in general, on a true

vertical plane. b) Fixing details shall be strictly as shown on drawings. c) Assembly of composite units shall be strictly as per the drawings with

mastic caulking at transoms and mullions, gaskets, weather strips etc. complete.





Page 75 of 139

d) All frames on external walls shall be mastic caulked to prevent leakage through joints between frames and masonry.

e) All openable sections shall operate smoothly without jamming. f) Locks, fasteners etc. shall engage positively. Key shall be non‐

interchangeable. g) Cutting to concrete or masonry shall be made good and all

abrasions to shop paint shall be touched up with paint of same quality as shop paint.

C‐ 13: GLASS & GLAZING

1.0 SCOPE 1.1 The work in general shall consist of supplying and fixing all glass and glazing

including all clips, putty, mastic cement etc. wherever required as shown on drawings.


latest editions, including all applicable official amendments and revisions. A complete set of all these documents shall generally be available at site, with the Tenderer.



below:

IS ‐ 419 1967 Putty for use on window frames IS ‐ 1081 1960 Code of practice for fixing and glazing metal (steel

& aluminum) Doors, Windows and Ventilators IS ‐ 2835 1987 Flat transparent sheet glass IS ‐ 3548 1988 Code of practice for glazing in building IS ‐ 5437 1994 Figured rolled and wired glass IS ‐ 14900 2000 Specification for transparent float glass





Page 76 of 139

3.0 MATERIALS 3.1 The Tenderer shall supply and install all glass and glazing as required for

various Doors, Windows, Sashes, Ventilators, and fixed louvers, miscellaneous glazing and partitions, unless otherwise stated, from approved manufacture having uniform refractive index and free from flaws, specks and bubbles. The glass shall be brought to site in the original packing from the manufacturer and cut to size at site. The cut edges shall be straight and free from chips, spall or any other damages.

3.2 The glass shall be plain float glass from approved manufacture, as specified

and it shall be free from bubbles, flaws specs, waves, air holes, distortion, scratches or other defects. The glasses in bulk quantities shall be brought to site in Makers original packings and Makers guarantee shall be produced if called for by the Consultant. The glass shall be of required thickness as mentioned in the items of schedule of quantities and / or drawing or as directed by the Consultant. The Tenderer shall submit the sample of the glass which he proposes to use on the work and only such approved quality of glass shall be used in the works. The glass brought to site shall be protected against damages. Wherever frosted (obscure) glass is mentioned in the item of schedule of quantities and / or shown in drawings, the glass shall be of sand blown pattern and shall also be got approved by the Consultant.

3.3 After the inspection is over and permitted by the Consultant, glass panes

shall be cleaned off any labels paints smears and spots and shall be washed from both the sides and all glazing left clear, perfect and free from rattling. The Tenderer shall provide all the scaffolding tools and plants for fixing the glass panes at his own cost.

3.4 Glare reducing (tinted) or heat absorbing glass shall be “Calores” of

Hindustan Pilkington or approved equivalent and special care shall be taken to grind smooth and round off the edges before fixing.

3.5 Clear glass shall be flat drawn and shall be at least 4 mm thick, Conforming

to lS‐2835. Sheet glass for doors shall be minimum 6.3 mm thick. 3.6 Wired glass shall be 6 mm thick rolled glass with centrally embedded 24 G

wire mesh of Georgian type. This may be of clear or coloured glass, as required by Consultant and shall conform to lS‐5437.

3.7 Obscure glass shall have a cast surface on one side. 3.8 Coloured and figured glass shall be as per approved sample.





Page 77 of 139

3.9 In general, the putty shall conform to lS‐419 and be of best quality from

approved manufacturer. it shall be brought to site in the manufacturer’s original packing. Quick setting putty shall be used for windows and sashes except when glare reducing glass is used where it shall be of non‐setting type.

3.10 Neoprene gaskets with snap‐fit glazing shall be fixed as per manufacturer’s

instruction and shall fit firmly against the glass to give a leak proof Installation.

4.0 FIXING 4.1 The glass shall be cut to the required sizes of panels where it is to be fitted

and it shall be so cut that it fits properly in the frames without rattling. Pre‐measurement of each panel prior to the cutting of glass is essential.

4.2 The beading shall then be fixed to glass panes and screwed at close intervals not more than 10 cm. from each corner and the intermediate not more than 20 cm. apart. When glass panes are fixed with wooden beadings having mitred joints or aluminium beading, thin layer of glazier putty shall be applied covering the area in contact between the glass and sashbars and beadings. In case of louvers, all the exposed edges of the glass shall be ground properly

4.3 All glazing clips, bolts, nuts, putty, mastic cement, etc. as required shall be

supplied by the Tenderer. 4.4 ll glass shall be thoroughly cleaned before placing in positions. Each glass

pane shall be held in place by special glazing clips of approved type. As specified in relevant l.S. Codes, four glazing clips shall be provided per glass pane, except for large panes where six or more clips shall be used as per Consultant’s instructions. All holes that may be necessary for holding the clips, glazing beads and all other attachments shall be drilled by the Tenderer.

4.5 Glass pane shall be set without springing, and shall be bedded in putty and

back putted, except where mouldings or gaskets are specified. Putty, mastic cement etc. shall be smoothly finished to a true even line. Obscure and figured glass shall be set with smooth. side out.

4.6 After completion of glazing work, the Tenderer shall emove all dirt, stains,

putty etc. clean the glass panes and leave the work in perfectly acceptable





Page 78 of 139

condition. All broken, racked or damaged glass shall be replaced by new ones

4.7 The beading shall be of teak wood of superior quality timber in case of teak

wood doors and windows of required sizes mentioned in the items of schedule of quantities as shown in drawing. In case of steel doors and windows the beading shall be anodised aluminium beading of channel section as per size mentioned in the item and / or shown in the drawing. The junction of the beadings shall be mitre jointed.


a) All installations shall be free from cracked, broken or damaged glass. Edges of large panes of thicker glass and heat absorbing glass shall be inspected carefully for chipped, cracked or unground edges.

c) Glazing shall be carefully done to avoid direct contact with metal

frames. d) All glass shall be embedded in mastic or fixed by neoprene gaskets to

give a leak‐proof installation.

e) At completion, the panes shall be free from dirt, stains, excess putty etc. and to complete satisfaction of the Consultant.

C‐14: PAINTING, WHITE WASHING, DISTEMPERING AND OTHER FINISHING WORKS 1.0 SCOPE 1.1 This Specification covers painting, white washing. polishing, distempering

etc. of both interior and exterior surfaces of masonry, concrete, plaster, plaster of Paris, structural and other miscellaneous steel items, rain water down comer, floor and roof drains, waste and service water pipes, and other ferrous and non‐ferrous metal items as indicated elsewhere in these specifications or as directed by the Consultant.

1.2 If surface to be finished cannot be put in suitable condition for painting by

customary preparatory methods, the Tenderer shall notify the Consultant in writing or assume responsibility for the same and rectify unsatisfactory finishing. Before commencing painting, the Tenderer shall obtain the approval of the Consultant in writing regarding the scheduling of work to minimise damage, disfiguration or staining by other trades. He shall also





Page 79 of 139

undertake normal precautions to prevent damage, disfiguration or staining to work of other trades or other installations.





below:

75‐1973 Linseed oil, raw and refined 77‐1976 Linseed oil, boiled, for paints 102‐1962 Ready mixed paint, brushing, red, lead, nonsetting,

priming 103‐1962 Ready mixed paint, brushing, white lead, for priming and

general purposes 104‐1979 Specification for ready mixed paint, brushing, zinc

chrome, priming 133‐1993 Enamel, interior (a) under coating (b) finishing colour as

required 137‐1965 Ready mixed paint, brushing, matt or egg‐shell flat,

finsihing, interior, to Indian Standard Colour, as required 158‐1981 Ready mixed paint, brushing, bituminous, black lead free

acid alkali, water and heat resisting for general purposes. 168‐1993 Ready mixed paint, air drying for general purpose. 217‐1988 Cut back bitumen 218‐1983 Creosote and anthrakene oil for use as wood

preservatives 290‐1961 Coal tar black paint 337‐1975 Varnish, finishing interior 338‐1952 Varnish, under coating exterior, natural resin 339‐1952 Varnish, under coating, exterior, synthetic resin 340‐1978 Varnish, mixing 341‐1973 Black Japan, type A, E, & C 345‐1952 Wood filler, Transparent, liquid 347‐1975 Varnish, shellac for general purpose 348‐1968 French polish





Page 80 of 139

419‐1967 Putty for use of window frames 427‐1965 Distemper, dry, colour as required 428‐1969 Distemper, oil emulsion colour as required 524‐1983 Varnish, finishing, exterior, synthetic 525‐1968 Varnish, finishing, exterior and general purposes 533‐1973 Gum spirit of turpentine (oil of turpentine) 712‐1984 Specification for building limes IS‐1477(I and II)

Code of Practice for painting of ferrous metals in building

2095‐1982 Gypsum plaster boards. 2096‐1992 Asbestos cement flat sheets. 2339‐1963 Aluminium paint for general purposes, in dual container IS ‐ 2395 (I and II)

Code of Practice for painting concrete, masonry and plaster surface

2547‐1976 Gypsum building plaster 2932‐1994 Enamel synthetic, exterior (a) Under coating (b)

Finishing. 2933‐1975 Enamel, Exterior (a) Under coating (b) Finishing 5410‐1992 Cement paint, colour as required 5411‐(Pt.‐I)‐1974

Plastic emulsion paint for interior use

6278‐1971 Code of practice for white washing & colour washing IS ‐ 13467 Specification for chlorinated rubber for paints BS ‐ 5493 Code of practice for protective coating of Iron & Steel

structure against corrosion 3.0 MATERIALS 3.1 Materials shall be of highest grade products of well‐known approved

manufacturer and shall be delivered to the site in original sealed containers, bearing brand name, manufacture’s name and colour shade, with label intact and seals unbroken. All materials shall be subject to inspection & approval by the Consultant. It is desired that materials of one manufacturer only shall be used as far as possible and paint of one shade be obtained from the same manufacturing batch.

3.2 All paint shall be subjected to analysis from random samples taken at site

from painters bucket, if so desired by the Consultant. 3.3 All prime coats shall be compatible to the material of the surface to be

finished as well as to the finishing coats to be applied. All unspecified materials such as shellac, turpentine or linseed oil shall be of the highest





Page 81 of 139

quality available and shall conform to the reputed recognised manufacturer’s and shall be approved by the Consultant.

3.4 All colour shall be as per painting schedule and tinting and matching shall be

done to the satisfaction of the Consultant. In such cases, where samples are required, they shall be executed in advance with the specified materials for the approval of the Consultant.

4.0 WHITE WASHING 4.1 Shall be done from pure shell lime or fat lime, or a mixture of both as

instructed by the Consultant, and shall conform to IS:712. Samples of lime shall be submitted to the Consultant for approval, and lime as per approved sample shall be brought to site in unslaked condition. After slaking, it shall be allowed to remain in a tank of water for two days, and then stirred up with a pole, until it attains the consistency of thin cream. 100 grams of gum to 6 litres of white wash water and a little quantity of indigo or synthetic ultramarine blue shall be added to the lime.

5.0 WATERPROOF CEMENT PAINT 5.1 Shall be made from best quality white cement and lime resistant colours

with accelerators, waterproofing agents and fungicides. The paint shall conform to IS:5410.

6.0 ACRYLIC EMULSION PAINT 6.1 Shall be water based acrylic copolymer emulsion with rutile titanium dioxide

and other selected pigments and fungicide. It shall exhibit excellent adhesion to plaster and surface and shall resist deterioration by alkali salts. The paint film shall allow the moisture in wall to escape without peeling or blistering. The paint, after it is dried, shall be able to withstand washing with mild soap and water without any deterioration in colour, or without flaking, blistering or peeling.

7.0 SYNTHETIC ENAMEL PAINT 7.1 Shall be made from synthetic resin and drying oil with rutile titanium dioxide

and other selected pigments to give a smooth, hard, durable and glossy finish to all exterior and interior surfaces. White and pastel shades shall resist yellowing and darkening with aging. The paint shall conform to IS:2932 and IS:2933.





Page 82 of 139

8.0 DRY DISTEMPER 8.1 Dry distemper of required colour conforming to IS:427 and of approved

brand and manufacturer shall be used. The primer where used shall be cement primer or distemper primer. The shade shall be got approved from the Consultant. Dry distemper as required shall be stirred slowly and in clean water using 0.6 litre of water per kg of distemper or as specified by the manufacturer. Distemper shall not be mixed in larger quantity than is actually required for one day work. Warm water shall preferably be used. The treatment shall consists of a priming coat of whiting followed by the application of two or more coats of distemper till the surface shows an even colour.

9.0 OIL BOUND DISTEMPER 9.1 Oil bound distemper (IS:428‐1969) of approved brand and manufacturer

shall be used. Any unevenness in surface shall be made good by applying putty. The patched surface shall be allowed to dry thoroughly before the coat of distemper is applied. One coat of distemper properly diluted with thinner as specified by the manufacturer applied with brushes in horizontal strokes followed immediately by vertical ones together will constitute one coat. Two or more coats of distemper as found necessary shall be applied to obtain even shade.

10.0 COLOUR WASH 10.1 It shall be done with mineral colours, not affected by lime added to white

wash. No colour wash shall be done until a sample of the colour wash to the required tint or shade has been approved by the Consultant. The colour shall be of even tint or shade over the whole surface. If it is blotchy or otherwise badly applied, it shall be redone by the Tenderer at no extra cost to Owner.

11.0 CHLORINATED RUBBER BASED PAINT 11.1 Chlorinated rubber is the product obtained from the reaction of chlorine

with rubber. The product contains average chlorine content of about 65%. 11.2 Chlorinated rubber shall be formulated with resins (for adhesion and gloss),

plasticizers (for flexibility and toughness), pigments (for colour), stabilizers and solvents (for fluidity). This shall meet the general requirements of IS:13467 & BS:5493.

12.0 STORAGE 12.1 The Tenderer shall arrange for safe and proper storage of all materials and





Page 83 of 139

tools. Paints shall be kept covered at all times and mixing shall be done in suitable containers. All necessary precautions shall be taken by the Tenderer to prevent fire.

13.0 PREPARATION OF SURFACE 13.1 Before starting the work the Tenderer shall obtain the approval of the

Consultant regarding the soundness and readiness of the surface to be painted on.

13.2 Masonry, Concrete and Plastered Surfaces shall be free from all oil, grease,

efflorescence, mildew, loose paint or other foreign and loose materials. Masonry cracks shall be cleaned out and patch filled with mortar similar to the original surface and uniformly textured. Where this type of resurfacing may lead to the finishing paint being different in shade from the original surfaces, the resurfaced area shall be treated with minimum one coat of cement primer which should be continued to the surrounding area for a distance of minimum 100 mm.

13.3 Surface with mildew, efflorescence shall be treated as ‐below.

a) MILDEW: All mildewed surfaces shall be treated with an approved fungicide such as ammoniacal wash consisting of 7 gm of copper carbonate dissolved in 80 ml.liquid ammonia and diluted to 1 litre with water or 2.5 per cent magnesium silico‐fluoride solution and allowed to dry thoroughly before paint is applied.

b) EFFLORESCENCE: All efflorescence shall be removed by scrubbing the

affected surfaces with a solution of muriatic acid in water (1 : 6 to 1 : 8) and washed fully with clear water and allowed to dry thoroughly.

13.4 METAL SURFACES 13.5 All metal surfaces shall be absolutely clean, dry and free from wax, grease or

dried soap films. All steel and iron surfaces in addition shall be free from rust. All galvanized iron surfaces shall be pre‐treated with a compatible primer according to the manufacturer’s direction. Any abrasion in shop coat shall be touched up with the same quality of paint as the original coat.

14.0 APPLICATION 14.1 The method of application shall be as recommended by the manufacturer in

case of selection of special shades and colour (not available in standard shades) the Tenderer shall mix different shades and prepare test panels of





Page 84 of 139

minimum size 1 metre square as per instruction of the Consultant and obtain his approval prior to application of finishing paints.

14.2 Proper tools and implements shall be used. Scaffoldings if used shall be

independent of the surface to be painted to avoid shade differences of the freshly repaired anchor holes. Painting shall be done by skilled labourers in a workman like manner. All materials shall be evenly applied, so as to be free of sags, runs, crawls or other defects. All coats shall be of proper consistency. In case of application by brush, no brush marks shall be visible. The brushes shall be clean and in good condition before application of paint.

14.3 All priming undercoats for painting shall be applied by brush only and

rollers, spray equipments etc. shall not be used. 14.4 No work shall be done under conditions that are unsuitable for production

of good results. No painting shall be done when plastering is in progress or is drying. Application of paint which seals of surface to moisture shall be done after the moisture on and under the surface has dried out.

14.5 All coats shall be thoroughly dry before being sand papered or before the

succeeding coat is applied. Coats of painting as specified are intended to cover surfaces perfectly.

14.6 In case the surface is not covered properly by applying the specified

number of coats, further coats shall be applied by the Tenderer when so directed by the Consultant, without any extra cost to Owner. All primers and undercoats shall be tinted to approximate the colour of the finishing coats. Finished coats shall be of exact colour and shade as per approved samples and finish shall be uniform in colour and texture. All parts of mouldings and ornaments shall be left clean and true to finish.

14.7 White Washing: The surface where white washing is to be applied shall be

cleaned of all loose materials and dirt. All holes and irregularities of the surface shall be filled up with lime putty and shall be allowed to dry up before application of the lime solution. One coat of white wash shall consists of one stroke from top downwards, another from bottom upwards over the first stroke and another from left to right before the previous one dries up. Second coat shall be applied after the first dries up completely and similarly the third coat shall be applied and in case the Consultant feels that one or more coats is required the Tenderer shall do so without any extra cost to the Owner. No brush marks shall show on the finished surface. The inner plastered surfaces of walls shall be given three or more coats of white washings.





Page 85 of 139

14.8. Waterproof Cement Paint: Surface to be coated with cement paint shall be washed and brushed down. As soon as the moisture has disappeared, the surface shall be given one coat of paint. Care shall be taken so that the paint does not dry out too rapidly. After 4 to 6 hours, the water shall be sprinkled over the surface to assist curing and prevent cracking. After the first coat has dried (24 to 48 hours) the second coat shall be applied. In a similar manner the finished surface shall be kept moist by occasional sprinkling with water for seven days after painting.

14.9 Acrylic Enamel Paint: Lime gauged cement plastered surfaces shall not be

painted for at least one month after plastering. A sample patch shall be painted to check alkali reaction if so desired by the Consultant. Painting shall be strictly as per manufacturer’s specification. Minimum two coats shall be applied.

14.10 Synthetic Enamel Paint: Shall be applied on properly primed surface.

Subsequent coats shall not be applied till the previous coat is dry. The previous coat shall be lightly sand papered for better adhesion of subsequent coats. Minimum two coats shall be applied.

14.11 Dry Distemper: The treatment shall consists of a priming coat of whiting

followed by the application of two or more coats of distemper till the surface shows an even colour as per manufacturer’s instruction. The entire surface shall be coated with the mixture uniformly, with proper distemper, in horizontal strokes followed immediately by vertical ones, which together shall constitute one coat. Subsequent coats shall be applied only if the previous coat has dried.

14.12 Oil Bound Distemper: Any unevenness in the surface shall be made good by

applying putty. The patched surface shall be allowed to dry thoroughly before coat of distemper is applied. One coat of distemper properly diluted with thinner as specified by the manufacturer shall be applied with brushes in horizontal strokes followed immediately by vertical ones, which together will constitute one coat. Two or more coats of distemper, as found necessary shall be applied to obtain even shades.

14.13 Colour Washing: For new work, the priming coat shall be of white wash with

lime or with whiting. Two or more coat shall than be applied on the entire surface till it represents a smooth and uniform finish. The finished dry surface shall not be powdery and shall not readily come off on hand when rubbed. Indigo (neel) shall however, not to be added.





Page 86 of 139

15.0 PAINTING OF IRON & STEEL WORKS 15.1 Paint to be used for various items of work shall be of best quality and shall

be obtained ready mixed in sealed containers from approved manufacturer. The Tenderer shall obtain the Consultant’s approval for the make and colour of the paint he proposes to use.

15.2 All surfaces shall be thoroughly cleaned of all dirt, loose particles and rust,

and approved prior to application of paint. Workmanship shall conform to lS‐1477 (Part ‐ I & III).

15.3 Specific number of coats shall be applied and at least 24 hours shall elapse

between the applications of successive coats. No painting shall be carried out on exterior work in wet weather or on surfaces which are not entirely dry.

16.0 CHEMICAL RESISTANT PAINT 16.1 For chemical resistant paint stipulation of BS: 5493 shall also be followed. 17.0 PROTECTION 17.1 Furniture and other movable objects, equipments, fittings and accessories

shall be moved, protected and replaced upon completion of the painting work. All stationary items of equipments shall be well covered so that no paint can fall on them. All protection shall be as per instruction of the Consultant.

18.0 CLEANING UP 18.1 The Tenderer shall, upon completion of painting etc. remove all marks and

make good the surface, where paint has been spilled, splashed or splattered, including all equipments, fixtures, glass, furniture, fittings etc. to the satisfaction of the Consultant.


a) All painted surfaces shall be uniform and pleasing in appearance. b) The colour, texture etc. shall match exactly with approved samples. c) All stains, splashes and splatters of paints shall be removed from

surrounding surfaces.





Page 87 of 139

C‐15: DRAINAGE, SANITATION AND WATER SUPPLY

1.0 SCOPE

This section covers the design, layout and construction of drains for the entire plant area for foul water, surface water and sewage together with all fittings and fixtures and inclusive of ancillary works, such as connections, manholes and inspection chambers used within the building and from the building to the connection to Owner’s main sewer line manholes stipulated here or elsewhere in these specifications. The scope is also inclusive of design, supply, erection of all the tanks, pipes, fittings etc. required for the water supply to be taken from the terminal point to the respective buildings.

2.0 INSTALLATION

2.1 SURFACE DRAINAGE

The Tenderer shall construct the entire drainage scheme as per the drawings. Necessary slopes shall be provided in longitudinal drain.

2.2 GENERAL

All pipelines, locations of fittings and fixture etc. shall be as per approved drawings or as directed by the Consultant. Correctness of lines, plumb, orientation, symmetry and levels shall be strictly ensured. All items shall be fully secured against movement in any direction and so located as to allow maintenance where desired by the Consultant. All pipelines and fittings fixtures shall be installed leak proof. When the works under scope of this specification connect with others the connections shall be such as to prevent any splashing or emission of foul odour and gases.

a) POLYETHYLENE WATER TANK

Tanks shall meet the requirements of IS:12701. Virgin HDPE granules of approved grade, suitable for drinking water shall be used for making the tank. Carbon black shall be added with the granules. Tanks shall be single piece, seamless construction, moulded by rotational moulding. Shape of tank shall be cylindrical ‐ vertical type with corrugation along the length and bottom of the tank. Tank shall have closed top provided with lid. However, for storage inside, the rectangular loft tank of approved colour shall be provided. Tank shall be provided with all fittings for inlet, overflow, outlet pipes and ball valves including mosquito proof coupling. Tank shall be leak





Page 88 of 139

proof. Tank shall be installed with proper support and anchorage for installation and it shall be carried out according to the recommendation of clause No. 13 of IS:12701‐1989.

2.3 RAINWATER DOWN COMERS

Rainwater down comers shall be of PVC pipes of 6 kg/sqcm pressure class. Rainwater down comers shall run along and be secured to wall, column etc. Where desired by the Consultant these may have to be installed in chases cut in the structure. All pipes shall be well secured and supported by adequately strong circumferential clamps.. The clamps shall be moulded plastics, split ring type or perforated strap iron type as approved by the Consultant. Suitable spacer shall be provided against the vertical surfaces to which the pipe is fixed. All bends and junctions shall be supplied with water tight cleanouts. All horizontal pipes shall have a minimum fall of 1 in 100.

2.4 SOIL AND DRAINAGE PIPES 2.4.1 GRADIENTS The minimum gradients of soil and drainage pipe line shall be as follows 100 mm nominal dia 1 in 35 150 mm nominal dia 1 in 65 230 mm nominal dia 1 in 120 300 mm nominal dia 1 in 200 2.4.2 RELATION WITH WATER SUPPLY PIPELINE Under no circumstances, unless specifically cleared by the Consultant in

special cases, drainage and soil pipes shall be allowed to come close to water supply pipelines.

2.4.3 LAYING

Each separate pipe shall be individually set for line, level, plumb etc. Where lengths of sewer or drain pipes are laid in trench, properly painted sight‐rails shall be fixed across the trench at a height, equal to length of the boning rod to be used, above the required invert level of the drain or sewer at the point, where the sight is fixed. More sight rails shall be required at manholes, changes of gradient and intermediate positions if the distance of sighting is too far, which shall not be more than 15.0 m apart. The excavation shall be boned in at least once in every 1.8 m. The foot of the boning rod shall be set on a block of wood of the exact thickness of the wall of the pipe. Each pipe shall be separately and accurately boned between





Page 89 of 139

sight rails. 2.4.4 For water pipelines, meticulous care shall be taken to avoid chances of

airlock and water hammer. The layout of pipe work shall be such that there is no possibility of backflow towards the source of supply from any cistern appliances whether by siphonage or otherwise. Where desired by the Consultant, pipes shall be concealed in masonry or concrete of the structure. Chases, openings, conduits as necessary shall be cut or left in the masonry or concrete. Clamps and fittings shall be as per the standard practice and approved by the Consultant.

2.4.5 SUPPORT AND PROTECTION TO PIPELINES

All drainage and sewer pipes shall be laid with spigot leading uphill. Preferably the pipes shall rest on solid and even foundations for the full length of the barrel. However, the pipe manufacturer’s instructions as approved by the Consultant shall be followed in the matter of support and jointing. Cast Iron pipes and concrete pipes may be supported on suitable concrete or brick support, where specified. The supports shall be unyielding and strong enough. At least one support shall be located close to each joint. Spacing of intermediate supports shall be as desired by Consultant. Pipes shall be secured to the supports by approved means.

Anchoring of pipes where necessary shall be achieved by suitable concrete encasing designed for the expected thrust.

2.4.6 ENTRY INTO STRUCTURES

For entry of the pipelines into any building or structures, suitable conduits under the structures, or sleeves shall be used. The conduits and sleeves shall be such as to allow easy repair and replacement of the pipes. When openings or chases are required to be made in the structure for entry of pipelines, locations and sizes shall be marked and checked by the Consultant. After laying of the pipeline the openings and chases shall be mended.

2.4.7 DUCTS

Where solid, waste and ventilating pipes are accommodated in ducts, access to cleaning eyes shall be provided. Connection to drain shall be through a gully trap with sealed cover to guard against ingress of sewer gas, vermin or backflow.





Page 90 of 139

2.4.8 TRAPS AND VENTILATING PIPES

Pipes for carrying of the waste from water closets and waste water and overflow water from baths, wash basins, sinks to drains shall be trapped immediately beneath such fixtures. Traps shall have minimum water seal of 50 mm and shall be ventilated whenever such ventilation is necessary to maintain water seal of the trap. Ventilating pipes shall be carried up vertically from the drain to a height of at least 600 mm above the outer covering of the roof of the building or as shown on drawings. All vertical ventilating, anti‐syphonage and similar pipe shall be covered on top with a cowl. The cowl shall be made of C.I.

2.4.9 MANHOLES AND INSPECTION CHAMBERS

The maximum distance between manholes shall be 30 metres unless specially permitted otherwise. In addition, at every change of alignment, gradient or diameter there shall be a manhole or inspection chamber. The distance between manhole or inspection chamber and gully chamber shall not exceed 6 metres unless desired otherwise. Manhole shall be constructed so as to be watertight under test. The benching at the sides shall be carried out in such a manner as to prevent lodgment for any splashing in case of accidental flashing of the chamber. The channel or drain at the bottom of chamber shall be plastered with (1:2) cement sand mortar and finished smooth to the grade. The channels and drains shall be shaped and laid to provide smooth flow.

Connection to existing sewer lines shall be through a manhole. Manholes shall be provided with C.I. standard covers. The covers shall be close fitting so as to prevent gases from coming out.

2.4.10 JOINTING

Jointing of laid pipes shall be so planned as to avoid completely any movement or strain to the joints already made. If any joint is suspected to be damaged it shall be opened out and redone.

All joints between pipes, pipe fittings and manholes shall be gastight when above ground and watertight when underground. Method of jointing shall be as per instruction of the pipe and fittings manufacturer and as approved by the Consultant. However in the absence of any instruction available from the manufacturer, methods as detailed hereunder shall be used.





Page 91 of 139

a) CAST IRON PIPES

Socket and spigot pipes shall be joined by cast lead joints. The spigot shall be centered in the socket of the next pipe by tightly caulking in sufficient turns of tarred gasket or hemp yarn to have unfilled half the depth of socket. When the gasket or hemp yarn has been caulked tightly, a jointing ring shall be placed round the barrel and tightened against the face of the socket to prevent airlock. Molten lead shall then be poured in to fill the remainder of the socket and caulked with suitable tools right round the joint to make up for shrinkage of the molten metal on cooling and shall be finished 3 mm behind the socket face.

In special cases if flanged joints are accepted by the Consultant, the joints shall be made leak proof by inserting approved type of rubber or other gasket not less than 1.5 mm thick. The bolts shall be secured in stages to avoid uneven strain. Damaged gasket shall be replaced.

b) G.I. PIPES

Threads shall be cut with sharp tools, and before jointing, all scales shall be removed from pipes by suitable means. The screw threads of the pipe shall be cleaned out and the joints made by screwing the fittings after treating the threads with approved pipe jointing compound. Once a joint has been screwed up it shall not be backed off unless the threads are re‐cleaned and new compound applied.

c) GLAZED STONEWARE PIPES

Tarred gasket or hemp yarn soaked in thick cement slurry shall first be placed round the spigot of each pipe and the spigot

2.5 INSTALLATION

All plumbing fittings and fixtures shall be installed in most workman like manner by skilled workers. Those shall be prefect in level, plumb, plane, locations and symmetry. All items shall be securely anchored to wall and floors. All cuttings in walls and floors shall be made good by the Tenderer.

3.0 TESTING AND ACCEPTANCE 3.1 All pipes, fittings and fixtures shall be inspected, before delivery at the site

to see whether they conform to accepted standards. The frequency of





Page 92 of 139

testing and sampling as given Table ‐ I of this Section. The pipes shall again be inspected on site before laying by sounding to disclose cracks. All defective items shall be clearly marked and forthwith removed from the site.

3.2 TESTING OF PIPELINES FOR DRAINAGE & SANITATION

Comprehensive test of all pipe lines shall be made by simulating conditions of use. The method of actual tests shall be decided by the Consultant. All test date shall be recorded and submitted to the Consultant for review and Instruction. The Consultant’s discretion regarding tolerance shall be final.

General guidance for the test are given below :‐

a) SMOKE TEST

All soil pipes, waste pipes, vent pipes & all other pipes when above ground shall be approved gas tight by a smoke test conducted under a pressure of 25 mm of water and maintained for 15 minutes after all trap seals have been filled with water. The smoke is produced by burning oily waste or tar paper of similar material in the combustion chamber of a smoke machine. Chemical smoke is not allowed.

b) FOR STRAIGHTNESS

i) It shall be checked by inserting at the high end of the sewer

or drain a smooth ball of a diameter 1.3 mm less than the pipe bore. In the absence of obstruction, such as yarn or mortar projecting through the joints, the ball will roll down the invert of the pipe and emerge at the lower end; and

ii) By means of mirror at one end of the line and lamp at the

other end. If the pipeline is straight, the full circle of light may be observed. The mirror will also indicate obstruction in the barrel if the pipeline is not straight.

3.3 TESTING OF WATER MAINS AFTER LAYING

After laying and jointing, the main shall be slowly and carefully charged with water, so that all air is expelled from the main, by providing 25 mm inlet with a stop‐cock, allowed to stand full of water for a few days if time permits, and then tested under pressure. The test pressure shall be 5 Kg/sqcm. or double the maximum working pressure, whichever is greater. The pressure shall be applied by means of a manually operated test pump, or in the case of long mains or mains of a large diameter by a power driven test pump provided that the pump is not left unattended. In either case due





Page 93 of 139

precaution shall be taken to ensure that the required test pressure is not exceeded. Pressure gauges shall be accurate and shall preferably have been recalibrated before the test. The pump having been stopped, the test pressure shall maintain itself without measurable loss for at least five minutes. The end of the mains shall be closed by fitting a watertight expanding plug and plug shall be secured by struts to resist end thrust of the water pressure in the mains.

3.4 TESTING OF SERVICE PIPES AND FITTINGS

The service pipes shall be slowly and carefully charged with water allowing all air to escape avoiding all shock or water hammer.

3.5 FIXTURE ETC.

All fixtures and fittings shall be connected by Water tight joints. No dripping shall be accepted.

4.0 IS CODES

Some of the applicable Indian Standards, Codes are referred to here below:

Latest editions shall always be referred to.

IS ‐ 1172 Basic requirements for water supply, drainage and sanitation.

IS ‐1239 (Part I & II) Mild Steel Tubes and Mild Steel Tubulars

and other wrought Steel Pipe fittings. IS ‐3486 Cast Iron Spigot and Socket drain pipes

IS ‐ 3589 Electrically welded steel pipe for water, gas and sewage

(200mm to 2000 mm nominal diameter).

IS ‐ 1537 Vertically cast iron pressure pipe for water, gas and sewage. IS ‐ 1742 Code of practice for building drainage.

IS ‐ 5329 Code of practice for sanitary pipe work above ground for

building

IS ‐ 1538 Cast iron fittings for pressure pipes for water, gas and sewage.





Page 94 of 139

IS ‐ 1230 Cast iron rainwater pipes and fittings.

IS ‐ 1729 Sand cast iron spigot and socket soil, waste and ventilating

pipes, fittings and accessories.

IS ‐ 1626 Asbestos cement building pipes, gutters.

IS ‐ 2065 Code of practice for water supply in building.

IS ‐ 1726 Cast iron manhole covers and frames intended for use in drainage works.

IS ‐ 5961 Cast iron gratings for drainage purposes. IS : 5219 (Part ‐ I)

‘P’ and ‘S” traps, cast copper alloy traps

IS ‐ 771 Glazed fire dry sanitary appliances

IS ‐ 772 General requirements of enameled cast iron sanitary appliances

IS ‐ 774 Flushing cistern for water closets and urinals (Valve less

Siphonic type)

IS ‐ 775 Cast iron brackets and supports for wash basin and sinks.

IS ‐ 2548 Plastic water closet seats and covers.

IS ‐ 2527 Code of practice for fixing ‐ rainwater gutters and downpipes for roof drainage.

IS –1068 Chromium plating

IS ‐ 1073 Ball valves including floats for water supply purpose.





Page 95 of 139

C‐16: ROAD AND PAVEMENTS 1.0 SCOPE OF WORK 1.1 The work contemplated under these specifications refers to earth work in

excavation, forming embankments, soling, WBM, Bituminous Macadam, Wearing course/sealing coat etc. for Road and pavement works.

2.0 EARTH WORK IN EXCAVATION: 2.1 The specifications for “Excavation work & Back filling” under section ‐ III,

specified in C‐02 shall be generally followed. 2.2 FORMING EMBANKMENT: 2.2.1 The work shall include preliminaries of clearing site, setting out and

preparing the ground and there after forming embankment for the roads, paths etc. With approved material available form excavations under this contract (excavation paid separately under respective items) or elsewhere, spreading in layers, watering and compacting to the required density and lines, curves, grades, chambered cross section and dimensions shown in the plan or as directed by the Consultant. When the embankment is to be laid on hill sides or slopes, the existing slopes are to be ploughed deeply. If the cross slopes are steeper than 1 in 3, steps with reverse slope shall be cut into the slopes to give proper hold and seating to the bank as directed by the Consultant. The top 15cm of soil shall be scarified and watered if directed and compacted to the same density as specified for the embankment before any material is laid for the embankment work.

2.2.2 Only the approved excavated earth shall be placed in the embankments in

successive horizontal layers not exceeding 200mm, extending to the full width of the embankment including the slopes at the level of the particular layer and 30 cm, more on both sides to allow compaction of the full specified section. The extra loose stuff at the edges shall be trimmed later after completion of the bank work without extra cost leaving the correct section fully compacted.

2.2.3 Keeping the width of the bank initially less and widening it later by dumping

loose earth on the slopes shall not be permitted as the additional width and slopes will remain loose and uncompacted. Similar procedure to extend the embankment by dumping the material longitudinally shall also not be allowed. Each layer of the embankment shall be watered, levelled and compacted as specified here‐in‐after, before the succeeding layers are placed. The surface of the embankment shall at all times during





Page 96 of 139

construction, be maintained in such a manner so as to prevent ponding. Water to be used shall be free from all harmful elements which may cause efflorescence etc. and approved by the Consultant.

2.2.4 If the material for embankment contains moisture less than the optimum

moisture, water shall be added in the 100mm, layers of the embankment to bring moisture uniformly upto requirement. If the excavated material contain more than required moisture, it shall be allowed to dry until the moisture is reduced to required extent. If due to the wetness, the moisture content of the soil cannot be reduced to the appropriate amount by exposure, embankment work shall be suspended till suitable conditions prevail at no extra claim/compensation.

2.2.5 When loose layer is levelled manually or mechanically and moistened or

dried to a uniform moisture content suitable for maximum compaction, it shall be compacted by 8 to 10 tonne power roller or sheep foot rollers or heavy hauling or dozing equipment to give the specified 95% of the proctor density, if on testing, the density is found to be less than 95% of the proctor density, the Tenderer shall do additional compaction necessary to get the specified density after adding water if required. If the density cannot be improved by such reasonable efforts, the work may be accepted as substandard work by the Consultant. If consultant thinks it is not harmful for the purpose and paid for at a reduce rate. Test shall be made to determine the maximum density of the material to be used by the proctor method before starting the work. Density test shall be carried out for the embankment work during the progress of the work. One set of three core samples for every 1000 sqm. (about 1000 sq.yd.) area of each layer of embankment work shall be taken and tested. The average density shall not be less than 95% of the proctor density, obtained in the laboratory.

2.2.6 Arrangement for obtaining the samples and transporting the same to

laboratory, shall be made by the Tenderer at his own cost. 2.2.7 Embankment not accessible to rollers, such as those adjoining bridges,

culverts and other works shall be carried out independently of the main embankments and shall have the layers placed in 150 mm to 200 mm height and each layer shall to moistened and thoroughly compacted with mechanical or manual tamper. Before placing the next layer, the surface of the under layer shall be moistened and scarified so as to provide a satisfactory bond with the next layer.

2.2.8 The embankment shall be finished and dressed smooth and even, in

conformity with the alignment, levels and cross section, and dimensions shown on the drawing. On curves, section shall be provided with super





Page 97 of 139

elevation and increased width, is shown on the plans as directed by the Consultant.

2.2.9 Joining of old and new embankment shall be done by stepping in an overall

slope of about 1 to 5. 2.2.10 The Tenderer shall be responsible for maintaining the embankment work in

satisfactory conditions at his own cost till finally accepted including making good any damage.

3.0.0 SUB GRADE : 3.1 Preparation of Sub‐grade : The surface of the formation for a width of sub‐

base which shall be as per drg. shall first be cut to a depth equal to the combine depth of sub‐base and surface courses below the proposed finished level (due allowance being made for consolidation). It shall then be cleaned of all foreign substances. Any ruts or soft yielding patches that appear due to improper drainage conditions, traffic hauling or from any other cause, shall be corrected and the sub‐grade dressed off parallel to finished profile.

3.2 Consolidation: The sub grade shall be consolidated with a power road roller

of 8 to 12 tonnes. The roller shall run over the sub grade till the soil is evenly and densely consolidated and behaves as an elastic mass (the roller shall pass a minimum of 5 runs on the sub grade). All undulations in the surface that develop due to rolling shall be made good with fresh material or quarry spoils as the case may be and the sub grade is rerolled.

3.3 Surface Regularity : The finished surface shall be uniform and conform to

the lines, grades and typical cross sections shown in the drawings. When tested with the template and straight edge, the variation shall be within the tolerances specified in the Table below :

Permissible tolerances of surface regularity

Longitudinal profile Cross profile Maximum permissible undulation when measured with a 3 metre straight edge 24 mm

Maximum permissible variation from specified profile when measured with a camber‐template 15 mm





Page 98 of 139

3.4 Where the surface irregularity of the sub‐grade falls outside the specified tolerances, the Tenderer shall be liable to rectify these with fresh material or quarry spoils as the case may be, and the sub grade rerolled to the satisfaction of the Consultant.

4.0 SUB‐BASES :

4.1. GRANULAR SUB–BASE 4.1.1 Scope

This work shall consist of laying and compacting well‐graded material on prepared subgrade in accordance with the requirements of these Specifications. The material shall be laid in one or more layers as sub‐base or lower sub‐base and upper sub‐base (termed as sub‐base hereinafter) as necessary according to lines, grades and cross‐sections shown on the drawings or as directed by the Engineer.

4.1.2. Materials The material to be used for the work shall be natural sand, moorum, gravel, crushed stone, or combination thereof depending upon the grading required. Materials like crushed slag, crushed concrete, brick metal and kankar may be allowed only with the specific approval of the Engineer. The material shall be free from organic or other deleterious constituents and conform to one of the three gradings given in Table 400‐1. While the gradings in Table 400‐1 are in respect of close‐graded granular sub‐base materials, one each for maximum particle size of 75 mm, 53 mm and 26.5 mm, the corresponding gradings for the coarse‐graded materials for each of the three maximum particle sizes are given at Table 400‐2. The grading to be adopted for a project shall be as specified in the Contract.

4.1.3 Physical requirements: The material shall have a 10 per cent fines value of

50 kN or more (for sample in soaked condition) when tested in compliance with BS :812 (Part III) . The water absorption value of the coarse aggregate shall be determined as per IS : 2386 (Part 3); if this value is greater than 2 per cent, the soundness test shall be carried out on the material delivered to site as per IS : 383. For Grading II and III materials, the CBR shall be determined at the density and moisture content likely to be developed in equilibrium conditions which be taken as being the density relating to a uniform air voids content of 5 percent.





Page 99 of 139

TABLE 400‐1. GRADING FOR CLOSE‐GRADED GRANULAR SUB‐BASE MATERIALS

IS Sieve Per cent by weight passing the IS sieve ______________________________________________________ 1.1.1.1.1 Designation Grading I Grading II Grading III 75.0 mm 100 ‐ ‐ 53.0 mm 80‐100 100 ‐ 26.5 mm 55‐90 70‐100 100 9.50 mm 35‐65 50‐80 65‐95 4.75 mm 25‐55 40‐65 50‐80 2.36 mm 20‐40 30‐50 40‐65 0.425 mm 10‐25 15‐25 20‐35 0.075 mm 3‐10 3‐10 3‐10 CBR Value (Minimum) 30 25 20 TABLE 400‐2. GRADING FOR COARSE GRADED GRANULAR SUB‐BASE MATERIALS

IS Sieve Per cent by weight passing the IS Sieve ______________________________________________________ 1.1.1.1.2 Designation Grading I Grading II Grading III 75.0 mm 100 ‐ ‐ 53.0 mm 100 26.5 mm 55‐75 50‐80 100 9.50 mm 4.75 mm 10‐30 15‐35 25‐45 2.36 mm 0.425 mm 0.075 mm <10 <10 <10





Page 100 of 139

CBR Value (Minimum) 30 25 20

Note : The material passing 425 micron (0.425 mm) sieve for all the three gradings when tested according to IS : 2720 (Part 5) shall have liquid limit and plasticity index not more than 25 and 6 percent respectively.

4.1.3. Strength of sub‐base

It shall be ensured prior to actual execution that the material to be used in the sub–base satisfies the requirements of CBR and other physical requirements when compacted and finished. When directed by the Engineer, this shall be verified by performing CBR tests in the laboratory as required on specimens remoulded at field dry density and moisture content and any other tests for the “quality” of materials, as may be necessary.

4.1.4. Construction Operations 4.1.4.1. Preparation of subgrade: Immediately prior to the laying of sub‐base, the

subgrade already finished to Clause 301 or 305 as applicable shall be prepared by removing all vegetation and other extraneous matter, lightly sprinkled with water if necessary and rolled with two passes of 80‐100 kN smooth wheeled roller.

4.1.4.2. Spreading and compacting: The sub‐base material of grading specified in the

Contract shall be spread on the prepared subgrade with the help of a motor grader of adequate capacity, its blade having hydraulic controls suitable for initial adjustment and for maintaining the required slope and grade during the operation or other means as approved by the Engineer.

When the sub‐base material consists of combination of materials mentioned in Clause 4.1.2.1. mixing shall be done mechanically by the mix‐in‐place method. Manual mixing shall be permitted only where the width of laying is not adequate for mechanical operations, as in small‐sized jobs. The equipment used for mix‐in‐place construction shall be a rotavator or similar approved equipment capable of mixing the material to the desired degree. If so desired by the Engineer, trial runs with the equipment shall be carried out to establish its suitability for the work. Moisture content of the loose material shall be checked in accordance with IS : 2720 (Part 2) and suitably by sprinkling additional water from a truck mounted





Page 101 of 139

or trailer mounted water tank and suitable for applying water uniformly and at controlled quantities to variable widths of surface or other means approved by the Engineer so that, at the time of compaction, it is from 1 percent above to 2 percent below the optimum moisture content corresponding to IS : 2720 (Part 8). While adding water, due allowance shall be made for evaporation losses. After water has been added, the material shall be processed by mechanical or other approved means like disc harrows, rotavators until the layer is uniformly wet. Immediately thereafter, rolling shall start. If the thickness of the compacted layer does not exceed 100 mm, a smooth wheeled roller of 80 to 100 kN weight may be used.

For a compacted single layer upto 225 mm the compaction shall be done with the help of a vibratory roller of minimum 80 to 100 kN static weight with plain drum or pad foot‐drum or heavy pneumatic tyred roller of minimum 200 to 300 kN weight having a minimum tyre pressure of 0.7 MN/m2 or equivalent capacity roller capable of achieving the required compaction. Rolling shall commence at the lower edge and proceed towards the upper edge longitudinally for portions having unidirectional crossfall and super elevation and shall commence at the edges and progress towards the centre for portions having crossfall on both sides. Each pass of the roller shall uniformly overlap not less than one third of the track made in the preceding pass. During rolling, the grade and crossfall (camber) shall be checked and any high spots or depressions, which become apparent, corrected by removing or adding fresh material. The speed of the roller shall not exceed 5 km per hour. Rolling shall be continued till the density achieved is at least 98 percent of the maximum dry density for the material determined as per IS : 2720 (Part 8). The surface of any layer of material on completion of compaction shall be well closed, free from movement under compaction equipment and from compaction planes, ridges, cracks or loose material. All loose, segregated or otherwise defective areas shall be made good to the full thickness of layer and re‐compacted.

4.1.5. Surface Finish and Quality Control of Work The surface finish of construction shall conform to the requirements of Clause 902. Control on the quality of materials and works shall be exercised by the Engineer in accordance with Section 900.





Page 102 of 139

4.1.6. Measurements for Payment

Granular sub‐base shall be measured as finished work in position in cubic metres. . The protection of edges of granular sub‐base extended over the full formation as shown in the drawing shall be considered incidental to the work of providing granular sub‐base and as such no extra payment shall be made for the same.

4.1.7. Rate The Contract unit rate for granular sub‐base shall be payment in full for carrying out the required operations including full compensation for: (i) making arrangements for traffic to Clause 112 except for initial treatment to

verges, shoulders and construction of diversions; (ii) furnishing all materials to be incorporated in the work including all royalties, fees, rents where necessary and all leads and lifts; (iii)all labour, tools, equipment and incidentals to complete the work to the

Specifications;: (iv)carrying out the work in part widths of road where directed; and (v) carrying out the required tests for quality control.

4.2 Water Bound Macadam Sub‐base with stone aggregate : Stone aggregate

of size 90 mm shall be used. This consists of clean crushed coarse aggregate mechanically interlocked by rolling using power road roller of 8 to 10 t and voids thereof filled with screening and blinding material with the assistance of water, laid on a prepared sub grade/ sub base.

4.2.1 Quantities of Materials ‐ Quantities of coarse aggregate, screening and

blinding material required to be stacked for 100mm approximate compacted thickness of WBM sub‐base course for 10 sqm shall be as per table given below:





Page 103 of 139

Coarse Aggregate Stone screenings Classification Size Loose Qty Grading/Classific

ation and size Loose Qty

Binding Material

Grading‐1 90mm to 45mm

NOTE : Net Quantity = Loose quantity measured in stack minus 7.5%

4.2.2 Preparation of foundation : In the case of an existing unsurfaced road,

where new materials is to be laid, the surface shall be scarified and reshaped to the required grade, chambered shape as necessary. Weak places shall be strengthened, corrugations removed and depressions and pot holes made good with suitable materials, before spreading the aggregate for WBM.

4.2.3 Spreading Aggregate : The coarse aggregate shall be spread uniformly and

evenly upon the prepared base in required quantities with a twisting motion to avoid segregation. In no case shall these be dumped in heaps directly on the area where these are to be laid nor shall their hauling over a partly completed base be permitted. The aggregates shall be spread uniformly to proper profile by using templates placed across the road, six metres part. Where specified, approved mechanical devices may be used to spread the aggregates uniformly. The levels along the longitudinal direction upon which the metal shall be laid, shall be first obtained at site to the satisfaction of Consultant and these shall be adhered to .

4.2.4 The surface of the aggregate spread shall be carefully trued up and all high

spots by removing or adding aggregate as may be required. 4.2.5 The WBM sub‐base shall be normally constructed in layers of 115 mm

compacted thickness. No segregation of large or fine particles shall be allowed and the coarse aggregate as spread shall be of uniform gradation with no pockets of fine material.

4.2.6 The coarse aggregate shall normally not be spread in lengths exceeding

three days average work ahead of the rolling and blending of the proceeding section.





Page 104 of 139

4.3 ROLLING: 4.3.1 Immediately following the spreading of the coarse aggregate, it shall be

compacted to the full width by rolling with either a three‐wheel power roller of 8 to 10t capacity or an equivalent vibratory roller. Initially, light rolling is to be done which shall be discontinued when the aggregate is partially compacted with sufficient void space in them to permit application of screenings.

4.3.2 The rolling shall begin from the edges with the roller running forward and

backward and adding the screenings simultaneously until the edges have been firmly compacted. The roller shall then progress gradually from the edges to the centre paralled to the centre line of the road and overlapping uniformly each preceding rear wheel track by one half width and shall continue until the entire area of the course has been rolled by the rear wheel. Rolling shall continue until the road metal is thoroughly keyed with no creeping of metal ahead of the roller. Only slight sprinkling of water may be done during rolling, if required. On super cleaved curves, the rolling shall proceed from the lower edge and progress gradually continuing towards the upper edge of the pavement.

4.2.3 Rolling shall not be done when the sub‐grade is soft or yielding or when the

rolling causes a wave like motion in the sub‐base of sub‐grade. When rolling develops irregularities that exceed 12mm when tested with a three metre straight edge, the irregular surface shall be loosened and then aggregate added to or removed from it as required and the area rolled until it gives a uniform surface conforming to the desired cross‐section and grade. The surface shall also be checked transversely by template for chambered any irregularities corrected in the manner descried above. In no case shall the use of screenings to made up depressions be permitted.

4.4 APPLICATION OF SCREENING: 4.4.1 After the coarse aggregate has been lightly rolled to the required true

surface, screening shall be applied gradually over the surface to completely fill the interstices. Dry rolling shall be continued while the screening are being spread so that the jarring effect of the roller causes them to settle into the voids of the coarse aggregates. The screening shall not be dumped in piles on the coarse aggregate but shall be spread uniformly in successive thin layers either by the spreading motion of the hand shovels or a mechanical spreader.





Page 105 of 139

4.4.2 The screening shall be applied at a slow rate (in three or more applications) so as to ensure filling of all voids. Rolling and brooming shall continue with the spreading of the screenings. Either mechanical brooms or hand brooms or both may be used. In no case shall the screening be applied, so fast and thick as to form cakes, ridges on the surface making the filling of voids difficult, or to prevent the direct bearing of the roller on the coarse aggregates. The spreading, rolling and brooming of screening shall be performed on sections which can be completed within one day’s operation and shall continue until no more screening can be forced into the voids of the coarse aggregate. Damp and wet screening shall not be used under any circumstances.

4.5 SPRINKLING AND GROUTING : 4.5.1 After spreading the screening and rolling, the surface shall be copiously

sprinkled with water, swept and rolled. Hand brooms shall be used to sweep the wet screening into the voids and to distribute them evenly. The sprinkling, sweeping and rolling operations shall be continued and additional screenings applied where necessary until the coarse aggregates are well bonded and firmly set for the entire depth and until a grout has been formed of screenings and water that will fill all voids and form a wave of grout ahead of the wheels of the roller. The quantity of water to be used during the construction shall not be excessive so as to cause damage to the sub‐base or sub‐grade.

4.6 APPLICATION OF BLINDING MATERIAL : 4.6.1 After the application of screenings and rolling, a suitable blinding material

shall be applied at a uniform and slow rate in two or more successive thin layers. After each application of blinding material, the surface shall be copiously sprinkled with water and the resulting slurry swept‐in with hand brooms or mechanical brooms or both so as to fill the voids properly. The surface shall then be rolled by a 8‐10 t roller, water being applied to the wheels in order to wash down the blinding material that may get stuck to the wheels. The spreading of blinding material, sprinkling of water, sweeping with brooms and rolling shall continue until the slurry that is formed well, after filling the voids form a wave ahead of wheels of the moving roller.

4.7 SETTING AND DRYING : 4.7.1 After final compaction of the course, the road shall be allowed to cure

overnight. Next morning defective spots shall be filled with screenings or blinding material, lightly sprinkled with water, if necessary and rolled. No traffic shall be allowed till the macadam sets.





Page 106 of 139

4.8 SURFACE EVENNESS: 4.8.1 The surface evenness of completed WBM sub‐base in the longitudinal and

transverse directions shall be as specified in the table given below:

Size of coarse aggregates Longitudinal profile Cross profile

45‐90mm

Maximum permissible undulation when measured with a 3 metre straight edge 15 mm

Maximum permissible variation from specified profile when measured with a camber‐template 12 mm

The longitudinal profile shall be checked with a 3M long straight edge at the

middle of each traffic lane along a line parallel to the centre line of the road. The transverse profile shall be checked with a series of three chamber boards at intervals of 10M.

4.9 Rectification of Defective Construction : Where the surface irregularity of

the WBM sub‐base course exceeds the tolerances specified in the table given above or where the course is otherwise defective due to sub‐grade soil mixing with the aggregates, the layer to its full thickness shall be scarified over the affected area, reshaped with added material or removed and replaced with fresh material as applicable, and recompacted. The area treated in the aforesaid manner shall not be less than 10 sqm. In no case shall depressions be filled up with screenings and blinding material.

5.0 RUBBLE SOLING 5.1 Rubble soling for road work including foot paths, culverts, side drains etc.

shall be carried out as specified here‐in before under chapter‐04, para 3.3 for rubble stone soling, as far as they are applicable, with the following additions.

5.2 Subgrade for soling shall be prepared by cleaning of all foreign substances

including rank vegetation, if any. Any ruts or soft yielding places that appear due to improper drainage conditions, traffic, hauling or from any other cause shall be corrected by filling/cutting upto 150 mm and compacted and the Subgrade dressed off parallel to the finished profile and the same shall be approved by the Consultant, before laying of soling. Soling shall be laid in regular lines and staggered joints. The stones shall be laid as closely as possible and packed well. The stones shall be so laid as to have their bases





Page 107 of 139

and the target area resting on the Subgrade and in contact with each other. 5.3 Soling shall be laid to proper gradient and chamber, which shall be checked

frequently to ensure accuracy. Rolling shall then be carried out by a 8 to 10 t power roller and soling consolidated properly shall be lightly sprinkled during rolling, if ordered by the Consultant.

5.4 The surface thus prepared shall first be passed by the Consultant, after

which 40mm to 50mm thick layer of selected hard murrum available from excavation shall be spread over the soling as directed by the Consultant, and rolled again such that the hard murrum gets into the interstices, It shall, however, be ensured that a thin layer of murrum/grit shall remain on the finished surface of soling.

5.5 The area of soling actually done of specified consolidated thickness limiting

to the dimensions as per drg. Shall be measured in square metre upto two decimal places.

6.0 WATER BOUND MACADAM 6.1 Metal : Metal required for Water Bound Macadam surfacing shall be broken

from the first sort rubble. The rubble shall be broken to required size by the Tenderer at his own cost. However, the metal required for water bound macadam shall conform to IRC specification in all respects. It shall be hard, sound, trap stone metal free from decay and weathering and obtained from approved quarries, and shall be of 50 mm nominal size.

6.2 Collection of metal : Metal shall be of first sort black trap stone and shall be

collected in stacks on level ground and stacked on the sides of the roads as directed. The metal shall be free from all earth, rubbish and vegetable matter and graded before stacking and closely packed in stacks. The metal supplied by the Tenderer shall be arranged in stacks for measurement. No deductions will be made for voids. The size of stack shall be 1m wide at top, 2.2m wide at bottom and 60m high. The length shall be as directed by the Consultant. The Tenderer shall provide the templates required to ensure, compliance with size of stack stipulated.

6.3 Supply of Murrum : The Tenderer shall be permitted to excavate in the

selected areas in the place of work, as approved by the Consultant, for collection of murrum. The excavation shall be done by the Tenderer to correct line and level, transport and stack the same at site of work as directed by the Consultant. Alternately, the Tenderer will be permitted to bring from outside, approved graded hard murrum 10mm, down to dust





Page 108 of 139

(but not silt) as directed by the Consultant and shall also be collected in stacks on level ground along side of the road.

6.4 LAYING AND PREPARATION OF WATER BOUND MACADAM SURFACE 6.4.1 After preparation of the existing surface as specified above, 50mm, size

metal collected in stacks shall be spread to uniform thickness over the prepared surface and consolidated to 75mm thickness as specified here in after.

6.4.2 Templates properly made of full width and gauge or templates fitted with

central plumb to each of edge fixed with it must be used. The depth of the plank forming the gauge shall be the thickness of the metal layer in loose state so that when the metal has been properly spread, the gauges are buried just flush with the surface. The intermediate work shall be tested with cord stretched between the gauge. Three templates shall be provided and used with a distance of about 7.5m between each but not exceeding 15m. A spirit level shall invariably be used with the templates to ensure that the edges of metalling are truly levelled. The metal shall be spread and rolled with 8 to 10t power roller until well compacted and there is no appreciable movement (in the metal) when walked upon, or no appreciable wave in front of the advancing roller, Rolling shall be done by roller perfectly, by a 8 to 10 t power roller, till proper internal packing of adjacent pieces of stones has been achieved. Excessive dry rolling shall be avoided.

6.4.3 Rolling shall commence from the edge to the centre of the road. In case of

super elevated curve, rolling shall commence from the inside edge of the centre and progress towards the outside edge. Where the gradient is steeper than 1 in 60, the roller shall run up grade, i.e. rolling shall be started from lower level to upward direction for the 1St rolling.

6.4.4 While rolling the surface in two or more parts, a strip of about 230mm to

30mm along the predetermined cross section shall be left unrolled while consolidating the first half. This shall be properly jointed when the metal is being spread on the second half and consolidated with it. Care must be taken to avoid the occurrence of a continuous longitudinal furrow along cross section of the road. Full width of road will be rolled at a time.

6.4.5 The metalling shall be moderately kept saturated and rolling continued until consolidation is completed. Just enough watering shall be done so as to flush the metal slurry into the interstices. Care shall be taken to avoid excess water softening the subsoil. The full consolidation stage shall be tested by (a) putting a piece of metal about the size of wall not on the surface and roller passed over it. If it is crushed the surface shall be deemed as well consolidated (b) there shall be no creeping of stone ahead of the roller.





Page 109 of 139

6.4.6 Until the above conditions are satisfied, no blinding or surfacing materials

shall be put on the surface. No rolling shall be done where signs of metal crushing are noticed or rolling causes wave like motions in the base course of well compacted. Before starting rolling, the metal shall be dressed accurately to camber. No fresh metal shall be added once dry consolidation has commenced. The part of the road must be fully racked up so that the metal is thoroughly incorporated into the body of road.

6.4.7 Blinding Course: When the required consolidation has been completed, the

blinding material of approved graded murrum/stone grit and dust (unscreened) as specified shall be spread over the surface and brushed backwards and forwards to fill in the surface voids and rolling and watering continued to such an extent that the blinding materials are formed into a slurry and is grouted into the interstices. After the road has been fully consolidated, the surface shall be covered with 12mm layer of murrum/stone grit and dust (unscreened) and road opened to traffic after 4 days. The road shall be kept watered for 14 days or such other period as specified by the Consultant. Where tracks are likely to be formed by the traffic on the road, barriers such as tree branches etc. shall be put to divert the traffic. After 15 days, light watering and rolling shall be done. For joints across the road, the end of each layer shall be given a flat slope and well consolidated together and hump formation must be avoided.

6.4.8 Damages to the Owner’s Property : Any damage to the departmental property due to negligence of the Tenderer while executing the work shall be made good to the original conditions at his own cost.

7.0 BITUMINOUS MACADAM AND BITUMINOUS CONCRETE SURFACING FOR

ROAD (GENERAL) : 7.1 The work covered under these specifications provides for bituminous

treatment for roads consisting of providing 38 mm thick bituminous Macadam and 12mm thick seal coat or bituminous concrete of thickness as specified in item in the schedule of quantities.

7.2 The Tenderer shall make at his own cost, all the arrangements for

controlling the traffic during the execution of the work. All arrangements such as proper barricading of road, diversion of road if necessary, red and green flags during the day and red lights at nights shall be made by the Tenderer at his own cost to control and safeguard the traffic.

7.3 BITUMINOUS MACADAM OVER WATER BOUND MACADAM : 7.3.1 Preparation of existing Water Bound Macadam surface :





Page 110 of 139

a) The existing Water Bound Macadam surface shall be brushed,

cleaned properly with wire brushes and coir brooms, so as to free from all loose materials, murrum, earth, silt and caked mud etc. The surface shall then be dusted clean with gunny bags etc. if during the process of cleaning the sub grade (Water Bound Macadam), soft spots and packets, hollows etc. are found, such spots/pockets will be filled with approved precoated bituminous chips, consolidated and finished to proper level, rolled with power roller if necessary. The potholes shall be excavated properly in a rectangular or rhomboidal shape with vertical edges. The bottom and sides shall be cleaned as stated above. The sides and bottom shall then be thoroughly painted with heated 30/40 penetration bitumen. The pot holes shall thereafter be filled with premixed bituminous chips so that after thorough tamping and rolling, the surface is flush with surrounding road surface all as directed by the Consultant. It shall be the responsibility of the Tenderer to ensure that the Subgrade is even and is finished to camber and slope as shown on the drgs. or as directed by the Consultant.

b) The surface of the Subgrade shall be checked for its trenches by

means of the scratch template resting on side forms having scratch points placed at not less than 200mm. apart and set to the exact profile of the base course. The template shall be drawn along the forms at right angles to the road.

c) Unevenness of the surfaces as indicated by the scratch points shall

not exceed 10mm in 30m. The area of depression shall then be painted or sprayed with 30/40 penetration bitumen at the rate of 0.75 kg per sqm and the levelling course applied by hand or machine to grade and chamber and rolled. If the depressions are deeper than 50mm, the levelling course shall be applied in two or more layers and rolled as directed by the Consultant.

d) The prepared surface shall be closed to traffic and maintained fully clean

and no asphalting work shall be started unless this prepared surface is approved by the Consultant.

7.3.2 MATERIALS

Representative samples of materials proposed to be used shall be submitted to the Consultant and got approved. No material shall be used unless it is approved by the Consultant.





Page 111 of 139

7.3.3 HOT MIXED HOT LAID BITUMINOUS MACADAM:

a) COARSE AGGREGATE:

i) It shall consist of crushed hard trap stone metal, free from coatings of clay, silt and any objectionable material. Metal brought by Tenderer for different items of work shall strictly conform to I R C specifications in all respects. The aggregate shall be obtained by crushing approved stones of specified type in mechanical crusher and shall be hard, close grained, sound trap stone metal, free from decay and weathering and obtained from approved quarries.

ii) Metal shall be collected in stacks on level ground and neatly

stacked at site of mixing. The metal shall be free from all earth, rubbish, vegetation and other foreign matter and graded before stacking and closely packed in stacks.

iii) Tests considered necessary shall be carried out in an

approved laboratory when the Consultant considers the quality to be doubtful or there is dispute about the quality. The cost of testing shall be borne by the Tenderer.

iv) Aggregate grading : The requirements of base course shall

be as under:

B.S. Sieve Designation Equivalent I S Sieves Passing percentage 32 mm (about 1.25”) 40MM (1.5”) 100 20 mm (about ¾”) 20 mm 50 – 100 12 mm (about ½”) 12.5 mm 30 – 60 6 mm (about ¼”) 6.3 mm 18 – 30 No. 10 1.7 mm 10 – 20 No. 200 75 micron 0 – 5

v) The aggregate/chips shall be entirely dry at the time of mixing.

b) BITUMEN: Bitumen to be used shall conform to I.S:73.1992 for

paving bitumen, with 30/40 penetrations and shall be from approved manufacturers. The Tenderer on demand by the Consultant, obtain and furnish a laboratory test certificate to the effect that the material conforming to the requirement of the





Page 112 of 139

specified grade, to the satisfaction of the Consultant. Bitumen (30/40 penetration) content 3.7% to 4.7% by weight of the total mix, shall be used in the mixture.

c) TACK COAT : Bitumen of the same grade as that used for premix

shall be heated to a temperature of 1630 C to 1770C (3250 F to 350 F) in a bitumen boiler and the hot bitumen shall be applied evenly to the thoroughly cleaned and prepared road surface (as specified here‐in‐before)@ 7.5 kg per 10 sqm leaving no part of the surface unpainted. Application shall be done by a mechanical pressure sprayer or if permitted, by perforated pouring cans. The tack coat shall be applied just before the macadam is laid. Application of tack coat shall be only slightly in advance of laying premixed chips. In case of surface already asphalted, application of tack coat is not necessary.

d) PREMIXING CHIPS:

i) The bitumen shall be heated to 1630 C to 1770 C (3250 F to

350 F) in boiler The aggregate of the approved grading or as decided by the preliminary shall be dried and heated in an aggregate drier to a temperature of 1490 C to 1770 C (300 F to 350 F) and fed into a twin shaft peddle type mixer at a temperature not less than 1490 C (about 300 F). The bitumen, the approved aggregate and the filler shall be measured separately and accurately to the proportions in which they are to be mixed and mixed intimately till all the particles are completely coated with bitumen. Asphalt/bituminous mixing plant proposed to be used by the Tenderer for the preparation of Asphalt/bituminous mixing shall conform to all of the requirements of the job, which shall produce uniform mixtures of the required quality, an got approved by the Owner before mixing.

ii) The temperature of the premix bituminous macadam when

leaving the mixer shall not be less than 130 C (about 280 F) and it shall not be less than 1210 C (about 250F) at the time of laying.

iii) Bituminous macadam shall be transported to site of work in

suitable tipping vehicle properly insulated and covered with canvas or other suitable materials to protect the mixture from weather conditions and to retain the heat. The road surface shall be suitably marked to ensure correct and





Page 113 of 139

uniform application. Width of macadam to be laid shall be slightly more (not exceeding 50 mm on each side) than the required carriage way as per drawing. Excess on either side shall be neatly cut after full compaction to get final width of carriage way as per drawing. The premixed bituminous macadam shall be laid by a mechanical self powdered spreader and compactor and finished to correct line, level, & final consolidation done by means of power roller not less than 10 tonne. Any irregularities shall be corrected during rolling.

e) COMPACTION : The base bituminous macadam course shall be

compacted thoroughly and evenly with 10 to 12 tonne power roller immediately after it is laid. Compacted thickness shall be as specified in schedule of quantity.

7.3.4 The surface shall be checked for correct grade during and after rolling. Any

irregularities shall be corrected by adding precoated chips or removing the surplus. The disturbed surface shall be well compacted again. If necessary the roller wheel shall be coated with oil to prevent the coated chip from sticking to the wheels. Rolling shall be continued till no wheel marks are left on the surface. The speed of the roller shall be sufficiently slow to prevent any pushing under the wheels.

8.0 HOT MIXED HOT LAID BITUMINOUS CONCRETE WEARING COURSE (SEAL

COAT) 8.1 Bituminous concrete : Shall consist of mixture of mineral aggregate, sand

and filler, graded to fill the voids, mixed with bitumen binder to obtain the maximum stability. It shall be spread and compacted on a prepared bituminous macadam base in conformity with lines, grades and cross section shown in the drawings. The aggregate shall be preheated temperature specified for the bitumen and the mixture shall be prepared and laid hot.

8.2 COARSE AGGREGATE : 8.2.1 The coarse aggregate brought by Tenderer shall be I.R.C. hard black trap,

crushed in mechanical crushers and shall be clean, strong, tough, dense, close grained, angular but not flaky, and free from soft, decayed, weathered portion, coating of dust, dirt or other objectionable matter. Maximum size of the aggregate shall be suitable for the thickness of the seal coat (12mm/15mm or as specified).





Page 114 of 139

8.2.2 The aggregate grading composition and characteristics of surface (wearing course mix) shall conform to standard code of practice. The mix shall satisfy the following requirements:

8.3 Fine Aggregate: The fine aggregate shall be clean, natural, river bank or pit

sand or quarry sand produced in a crushing plant and satisfying the requirement of the grading of aggregate for the bituminous concrete as stated above or as determined by the preliminary tests.

8.4 FILLER: The filler shall be dry and clean lime stone powder hydrated lime

having calcium oxide content of not less than 60% both passing BS sieve No.8. It shall be free from lumps and loosely bonded aggregate. When tested by laboratory sieves, 100% shall pass through B S sieve No. 14, 80% shall pass through B S sieve No. 8 . Fillers shall be added to the aggregate to give the above grading determined by preliminary tests.

8.5 BITUMEN: Bitumen shall be of 30/40 penetration or such other grade

specified by the Consultant and shall conform to IS: 73‐1961. 8.6 PREPARATION OF BASE: Dirt, dust and other foreign materials if

accumulated shall be cleared off leaving the surface entirely clean. The prepared surface shall be closed to traffic and so maintained fully clean till the seal coat is applied.

8.7 MIXING AND LAYING WEARING COURSE: 8.7.1 Grade 30/40 bitumen shall be heated to a temperature of 1630 C to 1770 C

(3250 F to 350 F) in a boiler. The aggregate of the suitable approved grading or as decided by preliminary tests, shall be dried and heated in an aggregate drier to a temperature of 1490 C to 1770 C (300 F to 350 F) and fed into a twin shaft peddle type mixer at a temperature not less than 1490 C (3000 F). The bitumen, the aggregate and the filler shall be measured separately and accurately to the proportions in which they are to be mixed and mixed intimately till all the particles are completely coated with bitumen. The quantities of aggregate, bitumen and the filler shall be such as to obtain the percentage of each as specified above or decided after tests. Continuous batching and mixing plant shall be used. Asphalt/bituminous mixing plant proposed to be used by the Tenderer for the preparation of asphalt/bituminous mixes shall conform to all of the requirements of the job, which shall produce uniform mixtures of the required quality.

8.7.2 The temperature of bituminous concrete when leaving the mixer shall not

be less than 1380 C (280F) and it shall not be less than 1210 C (250 F) at the time of laying.





Page 115 of 139

8.7.3 The bituminous concrete shall be transported to the site of work in suitable

tipping vehicles properly insulated and covered with canvas or other suitable materials to protect the mixture from weather conditions and to retain the heat.

8.7.4 The mixture shall be spread with mechanical self powered spreader. The

bituminous concrete shall be laid to the specified line, curve, grade camber Any irregularities shall be corrected immediately before rolling is started. Before laying the mixture, the faces of the joints shall be painted with a uniform coating of hot bitumen. The bituminous concrete shall be laid to such loose depth as to give a compacted layer of specified thickness as per item in the schedule of quantities.

8.8 COMPACTION : The bituminous concrete layers shall then be allowed to

cool sufficiently such that it does not spread under wheel load of 10/12 tonne power roller. The compaction shall be done by the roller till no wheel mark are left on the surface and no further compaction is possible. The road shall be opened to traffic on cooling of the concrete to the atmospheric temperature or after a lapse of 24 to 40 hr after laying.

9.0 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR BITUMEN MACADAM & SEAL COAT 9.1 TESTING : The Tenderer shall have a well equipped testing laboratory with a

competent laboratory staff. Daily test (not less than two specimen per day) shall be made by them on the bituminous mixture produced to ensure compliance with these specification and copy of the test results duly signed by the competent authority shall be submitted to Consultant for record. Tests shall include water absorption, stability, filler content etc. The Tenderer shall give all facilities at all items to the Consultant or his representative to inspect the work or testing done by him

9.2 WEIGHING : Each lorry leaving the plant must be weighed on a weigh bridge

in the presence of the representative of the Owner and a challan must be issued along with the lorry in duplicate showing the weight of the material loaded in the lorry. As and when required, the said lorries shall also be weighed at the Owners weigh bridge or any other weigh bridge approved by the Consultant to check the tonnage of the material stated on the challans. In case of short fall, the same shall be made good by the Tenderer without extra cost.

9.3 TESTING SURFACE : The completed surface when ready for acceptance shall

be thoroughly compacted, smooth, true to line, grade, camber and free from irregularities when tested by means of a straight edge of 3m long, laid on





Page 116 of 139

the finished surface parallel with the centre line of the road, the surface shall in no place vary more than 6mm from the working edge.

9.4 The defects in the bituminous paving which the Tenderer may be called

upon to rectify are of the following type

a) Deformation of bituminous pavement resulting in Waves or ruts

b) Cracking of bituminous pavement resulting in admission of water to the sub‐grade and the deterioration of the bituminous pavement adjoining the cracks.

c) Disintegration/Revealing of bitumen pavement resulting in the

formation of pot holes.

d) Polishing of the bitumen pavement under traffic resulting in a surface on which the vehicles are liable to skid.

9.5 Defects in areas in bitumen pavement under guarantee shall, when they

exceed the limits specified below, be remedied immediately by the Tenderer. The limiting values of the defects shall be the following

a) Deformation: 25mm in 3 m

b) Cracks: 1500 mm in lengths and 3mm in width

c) Disintegrated revealed patches: 2.00 sqm and/ or 12mm in depth.

10.0 CEMENT CONCRETE ROADS/PAVEMENTS 10.1 GENERAL : The subgrade/sub‐base shall have no soft spots. It shall be uniformly

compacted using mechanical power rollers of 8 to 10 tones capacity (minimum). The subgrade shall be properly drained and the minimum modulus of sub‐grade reaction obtained with plate bearing test shall be 0.55 N/mm2.

The construction procedure for sub‐grade or sub‐base should follow

relevant IRC (India Road Congress) specifications and quality control should be exercised as laid down in IRC: SP.11. Equivalent British Standards may be followed in lieu of IRC standards.





Page 117 of 139

The sub‐base or hardcore shall be of hard quarry stones of size 80mm and down graded laid in compact manner to the required camber and rolled using 8 to 10 tonnes power roller (both wet and dry rolling). A sand layer shall be placed between the sub‐base and concrete. A layer of waterproof sheet shall be laid over the sand layer prior to concreting.

10.2 JOINTS 10.2.1 TRANSVERSE EXPANSION JOINTS These joints shall extend over the entire width of the pavement as shown in

relevant drawings. Dowel bars shall be as per dimensions, locations and spacing stipulated in the drawing. The pre moulded expansion joints filter, a compressible material used to fill the gap between adjacent slab at expansion joint shall conform to IS:1838. The height of the filler board shall be such that its top is 25mm below the surface of the pavement. The dowel bars shall be held accurately in position during the placement, compaction and finishing of concrete at and near the expansion joints. This and the protection of the joint grooves during construction may be achieved by means of sufficiently strong bulkheads with holes drilled along the centre line to accommodate the dowel bars and a mild steel section respectively. The later shall be oiled or greased before placing in position to avoid bonding with concrete. The top and bottom edges of the bulkheads and mild steel section shall be shaped to correspond to the camber of the pavement. Bulkheads shall be used in pairs to hold the projecting ends of the dowel bars and maintain their alignment. The bulkheads shall be securely staked in place at right angle to the centre line and surface of the pavement.

After the concrete has sufficiently hardened, the mild steel section shall be

removed carefully without disturbing the edges. Under no circumstance shall any concrete be left at the expansion joint filler

or across the joint at any point. 10.2.2 TRANSVERSE CONTRACTION JOINTS These shall be the weakened plane or ‘dummy’ groove type. They shall be

constructed by forming in the surface of the slab, a slot not less than 6mm wide and having a depth equal to one third the depth of the pavement at the thinnest part of its section. This slot shall be formed in a manner approved by the Engineer‐in‐charge, such as by pushing into the concrete a flat bar or web of a ‘T’ bar using a suitable vibratory device, removing the bar, and keeping the slot open. It shall be ensured that no spalling of





Page 118 of 139

concrete occurs while removing the bars. The edge of the joint shall be rounded with an edging tool before the concrete hardens.

10.2.3 TRANSVERSE CONSTRUCTION JOINTS These shall be placed whenever placing of concrete is suspended for more

than 30 minutes. Excepting in case of emergency, construction shall always be suspended at the regular site of expansion or construction joints. If the construction joint is located at the site of an expansion joint, regular expansion joint shall be provided.

10.2.3.1 LONGITUDINAL JOINTS These shall be of plain butt type and shall be formed by placing the concrete

against the face of the slab concreted earlier. The face of the slab concreted earlier shall be painted with bitumen or approved debonding material prior to placing of fresh concrete.

The dowel bars used in longitudinal joints shall be suitably supported as not

to be displaced during construction operation. 10.2.5 REINFORCEMENT Reinforcement steel shall be of grade fe ‐ 415 and shall be free of rust, dirt,

scale or other deleterious material. The width of fabric sheet or bar mats shall be such that when properly placed into the work, the extreme longitudinal bars or wire of the sheets of mats will be located not less than 50mm and not more than 100mm from the edges of the slab. Except for ‘dummy’ joints, the length of fabric sheets or bar mats shall be such that when properly placed into the work, the reinforcement will be clear of the transverse joints by not less than 50mm and not more than 10mm as measured from the centre of the joint to the ends of the longitudinal bars or wires of the sheet or mat.

While overlapping the sheets or bar mats in either direction, the overlap

shall be at least equal to the spacing between the bars or wires in respective direction or 40 times the diameter of the bar or wire, whichever is more. The overlap of reinforcement shall be 50mm below the slab top surface.

10.2.6 COMPACTION The pavement shall be compacted by means of power driven paver‐cum‐

finisher or by vibrating screen along with internal vibrators. Compaction





Page 119 of 139

with wooden hand tampers may be adopted only in constricted areas subject to the approval of the Engineer‐in‐charge.

10.2.7 FINISHING After the concrete has been compacted and as soon as practicable, its

surface shall be smoothened by means of longitudinal floats, operated from a foot bridge. The longitudinal float shall be worked with a sawing motion, while held in a floating position parallel to the carriage way’s centre line and passed gradually from one side of the pavement of the other. Movements ahead along the centre line of the carriage way shall be in successive advances of not more than one half the length of the float.

10.2.8 CURING OF CONCRETE INITIAL CURING: The surface of the pavement shall be covered with wetted

burlaps, cotton or jute mats, as soon as the concrete has set sufficiently to prevent marring of the surface, as per the directive of the Engineer‐in‐Charge. The covering shall be maintained in fully wetted condition for a period of not less than 48 hours.

FINAL CURING: Upon removal of the wet covering, the slab shall be thoroughly cured as follows: Exposed edges of the slab shall be banked with a berm of earth. Upon the slab shall then be laid a system of transverse and longitudinal bunds of clay about 50mm high immediately covered with a blanket of sandy soil, the rest of the slab shall then be kept covered with a blanket of sand or sandy soil, at least 30mm deep, and it shall be kept saturated with water for a minimum period of 14 days.

10.2.9 SEALING OF JOINTS : After the curing period is over, the temporary seal and all other intruded

materials in all expansion and construction joints, grooves shall be removed completely and then filled with approved joint sealing compound as per IRC‐57 ‘Recommended practice for Sealing of Joints in Concrete Pavement” or by any equivalent practice as per British Codes. Joints sealing compound shall be in accordance with IS:1834 (Spcn. For hot applied sealing compound) or equivalent.

The joint opening shall be thoroughly cleaned of all foreign material before

the primer is applied followed by placing of the sealing material. Typical composition of primer is as follows:





Page 120 of 139

Percentage by weight

1. Bitumen (200 penetration grade) ‐ 66 (blended hot)

2. Light creosote oil ‐ 14 (blended hot or cold) 3. Solvent Naptha ‐ 80 (blended cold)

NB : (a) The bitumen shall be melted and fluxed with the oil, and then cold

solvent Naptha shall be added. (b) Bituminous emulsion shall not be used as primers.

The sealing compound shall be poured into joint opening carefully in accordance with the manufacturer’s specification. Any excess filler on the surface of the concrete pavement shall be removed immediately and the pavement surface cleaned.

In order to prevent tackiness or pick‐up of the seal under traffic, the

exposed surface of the sealing compound shall be dusted with dry hydrated lime or by any other method approved by the Engineer ‐in‐charge.

The line of separation between adjacent concrete slabs shall be cleaned and

painted with 200 penetration grade bitumen. SPACING OF JOINTS. The location and spacing of joints shall be decided by the Engineer‐in‐

charge. However, the following recommendation regarding spacing of joints may be followed.

TYPE OF JOINTS MAXIMUM SPACING 1. Transverse expansion joints ‐ 50m 2. Transverse contraction joints ‐ 12m 3. Longitudinal joints ‐ 4m

OPENING TO TRAFFIC In general, traffic shall be excluded from the newly constructed pavement

for a minimum period of 28 days. Before the pavement is opened to traffic, it shall be cleaned and all joints shall be sealed.





Page 121 of 139

10.3 VACUUM COMPRESSED DE‐WATERED CONCRETE FLOORING 10.3.1 TECHNICAL ASSISTANCE/TRAINING OF LABOUR During the placement of concrete, the Tenderer shall have a minimum of

one person present at all times who has been adequately trained by a representative of the equipment manufacturer. This person shall be experience in the vacuum dewatering process, and in the operation of all related equipment and shall direct all concrete dewatering work performed.

The Tenderer shall provide the services of a representative from the

manufacturer of the vacuum dewatering equipment on site for a period of time of at least eight (8) hours. The manufacturer’s representative shall provide technical assistance for the vacuum dewatering process on the initial day of operation.

10.3.2 Equipment for Compacting, Placing, Vacuum Processing and Finishing of

Slab All process equipment to be used shall be of a design representative of the

state of the art, and shall be subjected to the approval of the engineer, Equipment shall be Tremix or approved equal. System shall have a demonstrated five years history of performing such work. The vacuum pumps shall be able to generate a minimum vacuum of 69mm (24 inches) of mercury (0.80 atmospheres) in actual operation using the maximum number and size of suction mats required for this work.

The Tenderer shall have at the job site sufficient equipment (vacuum pumps,

mats, filter pads and accessories) to ensure that the vacuum dewatering process continues uninterrupted to completion. Stand by equipment is sometimes required.

10.3.3 MIX DESIGN The Tenderer is responsible for the mix design of the class as called for in

the Contract Drawings and must submit the mix proposed for use in the works before any work is started.

The Tenderers shall utilize a knowledgeable and experienced concrete

technician for the design and production of mix (mixes) meeting all the requirements of the specifications.





Page 122 of 139

10.3.4 QUALITY CONTROL

The Tenderer has the responsibility for achieving the quality of concrete specified by controlling the concrete mixes, placing, vacuum process finishing and curing. The concrete technician in charge must be present at the site when work is in progress.

The Tenderer shall be responsible for mix adjustments, performing

necessary tests, correcting deficiencies and trouble shooting in general. The Tenderer shall be required to maintain control charts showing individual

test results for aggregate gradation, slump, air content, cement content and compressive strength.

10.3.5 PLANNING OF PLACING The Tenderer shall submit for review shop drawings for floor slabs, detailing

the location of all construction joints and the sequence of the slab placement and manufacturer’s literature describing the equipment to be used. In addition to the shop drawings, the Tenderer shall indicate the quantity of each piece of dewatering equipment that will be located at the construction site and shall include the dimensions of all suction mats.

Before concreting is started the work should be planned with a view to

determine areas to be placed daily, the required amount of equipment, size of vacuum mats, length of vacuum houses, arrangement of rails, if any, or screeds etc. Crew required for the vacuum process is 2 men to handle the mats and the pump. Note that placing, vibration, vacuum treatment and floating, follow immediately behind each other.

Check position of vacuum pump in relation to vacuum mat location to find

whether extra vacuum houses are required. 10.3.6 CONCRETE MATERIALS All materials such as cement, sand & aggregates etc. shall be as per relevant

specification mentioned for concrete work. 10.3.7 EQUIPMENT SPECIFICATION TREMIX SYSTEM 10.3.8 EXECUTION OF TREMIX SYSTEM 10.3.9 GENERAL





Page 123 of 139

The work shall be planned and executed so that there is no delay between the placement, screeding, dewatering and floating of the concrete. Concrete to be vacuum dewatered shall be handled and placed so as to prevent segregation. The concrete shall be internally vibrated prior to screeding.

10.3.9 LEVELING Immediately following placement, the concrete shall be levelled with a

vibrating screed running on a true surface, set at the proper elevation required to provide the specified finished elevation. The concrete surface shall be screeded high by 2% of the slab’s thickness to compensate for the compaction caused by the vacuum dewatering process. (Slabs to have an aggregate hardener shall have compensation made to maintain elevation). The vibrating screed shall be moved forward as rapidly as proper consolidation allows. The proper surcharge of concrete must be maintained in front of the leading edge of the screed.

10.3.10 VACUUM Immediately after levelling, the concrete shall be covered with filter pads

and suction mats in strict accordance with the recommendation of the manufacturer to have the slab fully dewatered. The suction mat shall extend 100mm beyond the edge of the filter pad on all sides. The pads shall extend to within 100mm of the edge of concrete slab, and the mats shall cover entire slab. Before connecting the hose on the suction mat to the vacuum pump, the edge of the mat shall be smoothed to enable an airtight seal to be created. A vacuum shall then be applied to the mat. After a minute the gauge on the vacuum pump should indicate a minimum vacuum of 0.70 atmospheres (24.0 in Hg) and if not, the mat must be checked for leakage. For concrete that dewaters readily the vacuum should then be maintained at 0.70‐0.80 atmospheres (24.0‐25.5 in. Hg). For concrete which dewaters less efficiently (e.g. air – entrained concrete) the vacuum shall then be reduced to 0.50‐0.60 atmospheres (15.0‐18.0 in. Hg.). After approximately 10 minutes the vacuum can then be increased to 0.80 atmospheres.

The vacuum shall be maintained for at least 3 minutes per 25mm of

concrete thickness at 0.80 atmospheres. (Where aggregate hardeners are specified, sufficient moisture shall be maintained to meet manufacturer’s requirements). The suction mats and filter pads shall then be removed and moved to the next section in leapfrog manner.

Stop the vacuum dewatering when light foot prints only are left in the

concrete when stepped upon. A suitable suction time can also be checked with a Proctor apparatus which should show 1.5‐2 kg/cm2.





Page 124 of 139

10.3.11 FLOATING & HARDENER TOPPING 10.3.12 FINISHING

The waiting time after the floating operation depends on concrete temperature and humidity and varies from 10 minutes to 2 hours.

The trowelling operation cannot take place before the concrete has

hardened enough to carry the machine, i.e the trowelling blades will not leave any marks on the concrete. Repeated trowelling, with intervals between the passes which are adapted to the setting of the concrete, greatly improves the surface characteristics. The surface will be more wear resistant and less dusty.

At least two passes are recommended for floors, which are not to be

covered. The top surface finish shall be in line and level or in gradient as per drawing. The undulation in the finished surface shall not exceed+3mm per strip.

10.3.13 CURING Vacuum dewatered concrete should be cured like any other quality concrete

in order to achieve a good final result 11.0 IS / IRC CODES

IRC‐37 Guidelines for design of flexible pavements IRC‐73 Geometric design of roads IS – 73 Paving Bitumen

IS – 702 Industrial Bitumen IS – 1201 Methods of testing tar and Bituminous materials

C‐17: SUPPLY & LAYING RCC PIPES

1.0 SCOPE

This specification covers the supply and laying of R.C.C. Hume pipes as may be required. The entire work shall be carried out as per latest edition of Indian Standards IS: 783 and IS: 458.





Page 125 of 139

2.0 SUPPLY OF PIPES

The Tenderer shall supply the R.C.C. Hume pipes of various diameters along with complete fittings required for carrying out the work. R.C.C. Hume Pipes should conform to class NP3 of IS: 458 as may by required and should be in good condition. The Tenderer must furnish, on being demanded by the Consultant, manufacturer’s certificates and/or test certificates from recognized authorities.

3.0 ALIGNMENT, LEVELS AND GRADE

The work shall be carried out in conformance to the alignment, levels and grades specified in the drawings. The layout and levels shall be made by him at his own cost from one reference grid and bench mark given by the Consultant. Contracts shall give all help in supplying instruments, materials and men to the Consultant for checking the detailed layout and levels as and when required. Making of reference layout and level pillars along the pipeline route and maintaining them upto completion of the work shall be the responsibility of the Tenderer, at his own cost.

4.0 LAYING OF PIPES 4.1 GENERAL The laying of R.C.C. Pipes shall conform to IS:783‐1985. 4.2 CONDITIONS FOR LAYING

The conditions for laying of pipes to suit the conditions at site and/or as per drawings and instruction of the Consultant shall be as classified below:

4.2.1 CULVERT CONDITION

In this condition the pipe is laid under embankment and may project wholly or partly above the original ground surface.

4.2.2 TRENCH CONDITION

In this condition the pipe is laid in a trench excavated for the purpose. The trench shall be refilled with thoroughly tamped earth after laying and jointing of pipes in approved manner.





Page 126 of 139

4.2.3 OPEN CONDITION

In this condition the pipe is laid such that it projects wholly or partly above original ground surface, there being no super imposed overburden on the pipe.

4.3. BEDDING AND SUPPORTS 4.3.1 CULVERT CONDITION

In this condition the pipes shall be laid generally as per sector B9 to B16 of Appendix‐B, of IS:783‐1985.

4.3.2 TRENCH CONDITION

In this condition the pipes shall be laid generally as per Section B1 to B8 of Appendix ‐ B of IS:783‐1985.

4.3.3 CONCRETE CRADLE BEDDING

If specified in the drawing or as instructed by the Consultant, the pipes shall be laid on Concrete cradles, conforming to section B1 of Appendix‐B of IS:783‐1985 in case of trench condition and conforming to section B5 of Appendix ‐ B of IS:783‐1985 in case of culvert condition.

4.3.4 OPEN CONDITION

In Open conditions the pipe laid shall be supported over rigid pedestals constructed at intervals not greater than the length of one individual piece of pipe, as per drawings and instruction of the Consultant. In no case shall the joint between to pieces of pipe shall lie at the centre of span between the supports. The pedestals shall be of reinforced concrete with a properly shaped out top to receive one third perimeter of the pipe.

4.4 JOINTING OF PIPES

Joints shall be flexible type as per IS:783‐1985. Rubber ring, with material conforming to type ‐ 1A of IS:5382‐1967 shall be placed on the spigot with special shape and the spigot is forced into the socket previously laid. This compresses the rubber ring as it rolls into the annular space formed between the two surfaces of the spigot and socket.

4.5 HYDROSTATIC TESTING OF PIPES





Page 127 of 139

The pipeline as laid shall be subjected to hydrostatic test as per clause 15.5 of IS:783‐1985

C‐18: WATER PROOFING TREATMENT 1.0 SCOPE 1.1 This work covered under this specification consists of providing and

laying ‘cement based water proofing treatment’ to horizontal and vertical surfaces of various components like under ground trenches, tunnel, lift well, roof terraces, chajjas, water tank etc.

1.2 This specification also covers the guarantee to be given by the executing

agency for leakproofness of the treatment for a period of ten years. 2.0 APPLICABLE CODES & SPECIFICATIONS: 2.1 The relevant IS. specifications, standards and codes given below are made a

part of this specification. All standards, specifications, code of practices referred to herein shall be the latest edition including all applicable amendments, revisions and additional publications.

2.2 List of Indian Standards

No. I..S. No. I.S. Particulars 1 I.S. 1200 (Part‐IX) Method of measurement of building and civil

engineering works, (Roof covering) 2 I.S. 2645 Specification for integral cement water

proofing compound 3.0 GENERAL: 3.1 The work of water proofing treatment shall be executed through a

specialized agency having sufficient experience in the field of all types of cement based water proofing works.

3.2 The contractor shall submit the detailed specifications and the agency to be

appointed for water proofing works for approval of the Engineer Incharge before commencement of work.

3.3 The contractor shall provide at site a competent supervisor during execution

of waterproofing works over areas and shall ensure the adequacies of the





Page 128 of 139

works carried out to be in line with the drawings and specifications. 3.2 The most effective method of waterproofing is not to allow water to pond

over the surface. Adequate care shall be exercised during the laying of cement screed to ensure that waterproofing compound is added in the measures required and that proper slope is provided for drainage of water.

3.3 Construction joints are the most vulnerable from seepage point of view. It

shall be ensured that all the construction joints in the RCC slab , beams, gutters etc. shall be injection grouted prior to the laying of screed concrete. All efforts shall be put to see that the screed concrete is laid in one go as far as possible without joints. In unavoidable circumstances, utmost care regarding treatment of joints prior to resumption of concreting from the left over joints shall be exercised. The joints shall be chipped off loose materials and coated with chemicals like “NITOBOND” or equivalent to ensure proper adhesion between the joints.

3.6 He shall also bring to the notice of the Engineer‐In‐charge, the protective

measures required for the protection of the water proofing for subsequent operations over it.

3.7 The performance guarantee bond for all the water proofing works carried

out by the water proofing agency will be required to be furnished by them through the contractors.

3.8 In addition to the above, the main civil contractor also shall have to submit

the performance guarantee bond in the prescribed form for water proofing guarantee as specified in appendix ‘B’.

4.0 APP MODIFIED BITUMINOUS MEMBRANES WATER PROOFING TREATMENT

OVER THE TERRACE: 4.1 Water proofing treatment shall be as specified in the schedule of items. 4.2 The concrete surfaces should be cleaned of all unwanted materials and the

same shall be made rough. 4.3 The construction joints or cracks, if any, should be inspected and if

found necessary ,“Damp proof” compound with cement solution as per manufacturer’s specifications shall be injected to seal off the cracks as well as any honey‐combs and cavities in the slab.

4.4 The same shall then be subjected to terrace method of water proofing

treatment as per manufacturer’s specifications.





Page 129 of 139

4.5 The cleaned terrace shall be watered properly and cement screed with

water proofing compound shall be laid to provide necessary gradient for easy flow of rain water.

4.6 Over the surface, APP modified bituminous polyester reinforced

waterproofing membrane manufactured from a rich mixture of bitumen and selected polymers blended together to obtain excellent heat resistance, flexibility & UV resistance shall be used. Modified bitumen then shall be coated onto a dimensionally stable carrier to obtain excellent tensile strength, tear and puncture resistance. The membrane should be lightweight, UV resistant and self protective, weather resistant and flexible enough to resist the movements in cracks. The thickness shall be minimum 4mm and granule surfaced. The reinforcement within shall be of atleast 140 gms/sqm polyester mesh.

4.7 Surface Preparation Concrete, mortar surfaces must be clean, free from grease, oil and loosely

adhering particles. Steel and iron surfaces must be free from scale, rust, grease and oil. All surfaces must be as true as possible.

4.8 Apply bituminous primer to a clean, smooth and dry surface by brush, roller

or spray. Unroll and align and re‐roll correctly before torching. Overlaps should be minimum 100mm. Use gas burner to heat the substrate and the thermo fusible film on the underside on lower face of membranes. When the thermo fusible film melts after torching, the membrane is ready to stick. Roll forward and press firmly against the substrate to bond. Heat both the overlaps and use the round tipped trowel heating the same to smoothen and press into seam. All angles and abutments should be sealed with extra care to ensure full bondage. The edges should be sealed well into the grooves.

4.9 Membrane will be applied first to the rain water channels and then to the

sloped concrete roof. The membrane shall be installed vertically from rain water channel towards the ridge of the roof. End joints shall be laid in a scattered manner so that multiple overlapping of membranes at the same location is avoided.

4.10 This treatment shall be continued along the inner sides of parapets or

adjoining walls up to a height of 300 mm to 375 mm till the horizontal projection (gundi).

4.11 The construction joints shall be taken at ridges and should be made properly





Page 130 of 139

watertight and monolithic. 4.12 Care shall be taken to finish the rain water inlets etc. properly so that no

leakage occurs. 4.13 The terrace shall be tested for leak tightness after the treatment is

completed and any defects shall be made good. 5.0 CEMENT BASED WATER PROOFING TREATMENT TO OVERHEAD WATER

TANK: 5.1 The tank is to be treated from inside as per ‘Injection’ and ‘Surface’

methods which includes the plaster finished smooth with trowel.

5.2 Injection to be given to the floor and walls as and when found necessary and thereafter a layer of ‘Cetroof’ water proofing will be laid on the floor and will be conformed along the side and partition walls to their full height.

5.3 The thickness of the treatment on the floor will be about 50 mm and on the

wall about 20 mm. 5.4 After the treatment is completed the tank shall be filled with water and the

water retained for 24 hours. If any leakage is observed the contractor shall rectify the defects and the tank shall be retested for leak tightness.

6.0 CEMENT BASED WATER PROOFING TREATMENT TO THE BASEMENT: 6.1 The water proofing treatment for under ground trenches, walls, raft, lift pit,

water tank etc. shall be done of basement type (Box Type). 6.2 The PCC surface below raft shall be thoroughly cleaned and a layer of water

proofing treatment about 75 mm thick shall be laid. The RCC raft shall then be cast over these surfaces. The side walls shall be

cast afterwards and the water proofing treatment shall be continued on these walls up to the required heights.

6.4 The thickness of treatment for vertical surfaces shall be 40 mm to 50 mm. 7.0 WATER PROOFING TREATMENT IN SUNKEN FLOORS OF TOILET AND BATH

ROOM: 7.1 Water proofing treatment shall be as specified in the schedule of items over





Page 131 of 139

sunken floors of toilets, bath rooms and washing places. 7.2 The RCC slab and other surfaces should be cleaned of all foreign materials

such as loose mortar, concrete, local humps, bare metal pieces and other unwanted material.

7.3 The surface to be treated shall be hacked to remove loose mortar scalings

and roughened. The surface should then be rubbed vigorously to remove all dust with the help of wire brush / brooms.

7.4 The surface thus prepared shall then be washed with clean potable water

before laying the water proofing treatment. 7.5 The cracks, honey combing if any should be located and should be treated

with injection, grouting etc. to seal off the cracks, air holes, honey comb, etc. to the entire satisfaction of the Engineer‐In‐charge.

7.3 The prepared RCC surface shall be then watered again thoroughly and

cement slurry shall be spread over the surface along with water proofing as per manufacturer’s specifications.

ALTERNATE ‐ I 7.4 A two component acrylic polymer based flexible cementitious coating of

heavy duty flexible coating system with excellent waterproofing and shall be used for waterproofing sunken slabs. The product shall be similar to Dr. FIXIT Pidifin 2k or equivalent.

7.4.1 METHODOLOGY : 7.4.1.1 Surfaces to be applied upon, must be clean, dry, free form dirt and loose

material. 7.4.1.2 Over the R.C.C base slab, apply polymer modified cementitious seamless

waterproofing membrane at a rate of 2‐2.5 square meter per kg to all required areas, at a thickness of 500 – 600 microns and allow to dry for 4 ‐6 hours.

7.4.1.3 Apply second coat in the opposite direction at the same rate. After application of second coat it gives the total thickness shall be 1 to 1.2 mm. The treatment is left as it is for 72 hours for air cure.

7.4.1.4 The waterproofing shall be carried at least 300 mm‐on vertical surfaces, or at least 150mm above the floor finish level.

7.4.1.5 After 3 days of air curing, a layer of 10mm Cement/Sand (Ratio 1:4) protective screed, using Integral Waterproofing Compound @ 200ml/50 kg





Page 132 of 139

bag of cement, shall be applied on top of the membrane. Care shall be taken whilst laying the protective screed so as not to damage the waterproofing membrane below.

ALTERNATE –II

7.5 25 mm thick bedding of cement mortar 1:4 with water proofing compound @ 2% of weight of cement shall be laid on the floor in specialized manner. 18 mm thick cement plaster of cement mortar 1:4 with water proofing compound © 2% by weight of cement shall then be applied over the vertical surfaces.

Finishing & Curing 7.6 The water proofing plaster so laid should be allowed to set for atleast one

week and kept under water. 7.7 Any seepage/ dampness noticed on the under side of the ceiling should be

treated again as detailed above, 7.8 Cinder fill as specified in the schedule of items shall be laid over the water

proof plaster to fill up the space/ voids of sunken floor areas. 7.9 The treatment shall be cured with clean water for a minimum period of 10

days. 8.0 MODE OF MEASUREMENTS: 8.1 The measurement shall be for the actual area covered by the treatment. 8.2 The length and breadth shall be measured along the walls before the

treatment is laid. 8.3 The height of cinder fill shall be considered for measurement after

deduction of the average thickness of the treatment laid horizontally over the sunken slab and quantity of cinder fill shall be measured in cum.

8.4 The areas of all openings, cutouts etc. shall be deducted.





Page 133 of 139

C: 19 HEAT RESISTANT CONCRETE.

1) HEAT RESISTING CONCRETE (HRC)

This Specification lays down requirements of Heat Resisting Concrete of Mark M30 to withstand Temperature upto 700 Deg. C. This concrete is required to withstand high temperature, such as in foundations for coke ovens batteries, furnaces, flues, stoves, reheating furnaces, soaking pits etc.

2) MATERIALS.

2.1 CEMENT: Cement to be used shall be Portland Blast Furnace Slag Cement confirming

to I.S.455‐1989 with Slag content not less than 50%.

2.2 AGGREGATES: Course Aggregates shall be 20mm and down graded Basalt Aggregates containing 52 to 45% Silica and free from quartz and shall be freshly quarried and free from dust and foreign materials.

GRAIN COMPOSITION OF BASALT COARSE AGGREGATE

MESH OF SIEVE (mm) TOTAL RESIDUE IN % BY WEIGHT

20 0‐5 10 30‐60 4.75 100

2.3 BASALT SAND: This shall be from Fresh and Good Quality Basalt Rock, The Grain composition shall be as follows:

BASALT SAND

MESH OF SIEVE (mm) TOTAL RESIDUE IN % BY WEIGHT 4.75 0‐15 1.25 20‐55 0.14 80‐100

3) MIX DESIGN.

3.1 The approximate quantities of materials required per Cubic Metre of Concrete to withstand a Temperature of 700 Deg. C are as follows:

BALAST FURNACE SLAG CEMENT 500 Kg.

BASALT SAND 700 Kg.





Page 134 of 139

BASALT COARSE GRADED AGGREGATES (20MM Down)

1100 Kg.

WATER 210 Ltrs.

For a Guideline of how to adjust percentage Aggregates for Concrete Mix Design refer IS Cement,10262, Reaffirmed in 1999.

3.2 The Final Composition of HRC, Grading of Aggregates, Cement Content, Water‐

Cement Ratio etc., shall be ascertained by means of a series of preliminary tests. 3.3 The following Test shall be carried out during Mix Design.

A) TESTING: Tests on HRC samples shall be conducted to find:

• Residual compressive strength after heating. • Compressive Strength of concrete specimens cured under normal conditions. • Number of 10Cm Cubes specimens to be prepared and tested are as follows:

Tests for Compression at Natural Humidity after 7 days Tests for Compression after drying at 105 C after 7 days Test for Compression after drying at 105 C and with subsequent Heating upto 700 C after 7 days Tests for Compression under Normal conditions after 28 days Control Specimens

B) PREPARATION OF CONCRETE SPECIMENS.

About 15 Nos. of 10cm Cubes Specimens to be prepared for testing. Compaction of Concrete Mix in the moulds shall be made on a vibrating platform, laying and vibrating of Concrete Mix shall b done not later than 25 minutes after mixing. Duration of vibration shall not exceed 1.5 minutes (90 Sec). Curing should start as soon as the surface is firm. Under normal atmospheric temperatures, this will occur within 4 to 10 hour after mixing the concrete. The Moulds with Concrete should then be moist for 48 hrs., covered with moist cloth by continuous spraying with water, thereafter the specimens shall be taken from moulds and kept in a chamber with 90% humidity at a temperature of 20 Deg. C + 2 Deg. C prior to testing. The Specimens shall be taken out from the chamber not earlier than 1 hour before testing.





Page 135 of 139

C) TEST FOR COMPRESSIVE STRENGTH OF SPECIMENS CURED UNDER NORMAL CONDITIONS.

3 Nos. of 10cm Cubes Specimens shall be tested for compressive strength after 7 days, and 3 Nos. Specimens shall be tested for compressive strength after 28 days.

The test load shall be increased continuously at the rate of 2 to 3 Kg/sqm per second till failure.

The compressive strength shall be taken as the average of two maximum test results of the three specimens. The compressive strength of 10 cm Cubes shall be multiplied by a factor 0.9 to get the equivalent strength of 15 cm Cubes. Mark 30 HRC shall have 28 days compressive strength of 30 N/sq mm and 7 days strength shall be 20N/sq.mm on 15cm Cubes.

D) TEST FOR RESIDUAL COMPRESSIVE STRENGTH AFTER HEATING.

Six Nos. of 10cm Cube Specimens cured under normal conditions (at 20 Deg. C + 2 Deg. C and 90% humidity) during 7 days shall be dried in an oven for 32 hrs., gradually raising the temperature up to 105 Deg. C as follows:

TIME IN HOURS TEMPERATURE IN DEG. C

0 25 1 75 2 100 30 100 32 105

Thereafter, 3 Specimens, dried as above shall be cooled at 25 Deg. C

gradually and tested for compressive strength as before. The equivalent compressive strength for 15 cm shall be corrected as explained above. Compressive strength of dried specimens (105 Deg. C) shall be the same as that of the specimens cured under normal conditions.

Other three specimens already dried by heating upto 105 Deg. C during 32

hrs., shall be further heated to 700 De. C in a muffle oven as follows:

TIME IN HOURS TEMPERATURE IN DEG.C 0 105 1 150 2 300





Page 136 of 139

3 450 4 550 5 650 6 700 7 700 8 700

This specimens shall then be cooled to 25 Deg.C and air cured for 7 days and tested for compressive strength residual compressive strength of this specimen after normally cured specimens minimum permissible residual strength after heating upton 700 Deg.C is 40%.

4) ROUTINE TESTS.

4.1 12 samples of Concrete from works shall be taken for test one for every 50 Cum

Pour of Concrete or part thereof and tests to be carried out for 7 days and 28 days compressive strength at normal conditions.

5) MANUFACTURE, PLACEMENT AND CURING.

5.1 In the Manufacture of Heat Resistant Concrete difficulties may arise in workability of

the mix because of porus aggregates absorbing water, this shall be considered in the mix design as well, in order to obviate this, the aggregates shall be sprayed with water and the surplus water then allowed to run off. The aggregates should be allowed to dry in air and used the following day.

5.2 Mixing period of Heat Resistant Concrete are longer, in Case where it is found that

the mix is very stiff and excessive water is being absorbed by the aggregate. The coarser factions of the aggregate may be weighed and fed into the mixer, together with one half of the water. These constituents are mixed for 5 minutes to ensure that the surfaces of the aggregate particles are fully wetted, correct weights of cement and fine aggregates together with remaining water are then added and thoroughly mixed for 10 minutes, taking care to see that lumps are not formed. Water may also be added in stages.

5.3 Placement and compaction should be delayed until the aggregates are completely soaked. This standing time should be within the setting time and in any case should not be more than 1 hour from the start of mixing process. This will ensure that the concrete reaches higher strengths.

5.4 Concrete shall be laid in layers of 200 MM and well compacted using needle

vibrators at an approximate rate of 1.5 minutes per Sqm. The vibrator should be





Page 137 of 139

withdrawn slowly. The stiffness of the mix is correct for a particular vibrator if the concrete closes up when the vibrator is withdrawn slowly.

5.5 Wet curing of heat Resistant Concrete shall commence early depending on the Heat

of Hydration. Fresh Concrete should be covered to prevent loss of moisture and avoid surface cracks, curing shall be continued for a minimum of 7 days side shuttering can be removed early to facilitate greater wetting of concrete curing compounds may also be used to retain and prevent loss of water.

6) DRYING AND COMMISSIONING:

6.1 Heat Resistant Concrete should not be loaded until required strength of concrete is reached as determined by cube tests.

6.2 The drying and raising of temperature to operating temperature should be done

gradually and in stages as follows:

Raise temperature to 150 Deg C at a rate of 5 to 10 Deg C/Hour. Holding time at 150 Deg. C : 7 days.

Raise temperature from 150 Deg. C to operating temperature at a rate of 25

to 50 Deg. C/ Hour.





Page 138 of 139

C:20 SITE LEVELLING AND LOAD BEARING FILLS. 1) CUTTING AND FILLING FOR SITE LEVELING.

Excavation and Filling Operations for Site Leveling shall be so planned and executed, that transportation and rehandling are minimized. The sides of excavation and fills shall be maintained in stable condition by adequate batters, stepping and dewatering. Materials not desirable shall be disposed off in area indicated by Engineer. When it is required to blend the material, it shall be done by selective excavation and filling operation. Wells, Ponds, Cesspools and Water logged areas shall be emptied of water and deslushed before filling operation. Filling shall be done in horizontal layers not exceeding 500/300mm in thickness as specified or as directed by the Engineer. All clods shall be broken before placing the fill. Earth moving equipment shall be allowed to ply over the fill to permit compaction. Adequate allowance shall be made for subsidence of fill material. Levels shall be taken and excess or shortfall shall be made good by appropriate cutting or filling.

2) LOAD BEARING FILLS.

Load Bearing fills include embankments for roads and railways and such other earth fills above ground levels provided for protection of fuel oil tanks, pads for storage tanks, drain, bunds and the like. Fill materials shall either be selected earth obtained from excavations for site leveling, trenches and foundations or from selected borrow areas as may be required. Soils selected for filling in embankments shall be of uniform quality and free from boulders, organic materials and other objectionable matter. Soils having high silt and clay content and having laboratory maximum dry density less than 1.44 gms per c.c. shall not be used for Load Bearing Fills. For fills greater than 3m in height soils shall have laboratory density not less than 1.52 gms per c.c. Soils for top 500 mm of fills for roads and railways shall have laboratory density not less than 1.65 gms per c.c. and shall not have marked swelling and shrinkage properties.

3) Foundation preparation for embankments shall be done as prescribed under site

clearance. The founding strata shall be compacted as much as possible by rolling or tamping before placement of fill material. The water content of founding strata should be same as that specified for embankment fill. Any pockets of loose material or depressions left in founding strata as a result of clearing operation shall be filled and compacted with the same material as the surrounding founding strata. When an embankment is to be placed on steep sloping ground the surface of the ground shall be trenched in steps or trenched or broken up in such a manner that the new materials bonds well with the founding strata.

4) Fill material shall not be placed until foundation has been inspected and approved

by Engineer. Material shall be placed in even, continuous, horizontal layers over full





Page 139 of 139

width of embankment in well compacted layers not exceeding 200 mm thickness. Each layer shall be compacted by means of smooth rubber tyred rollers, sheep‐foot rollers, tractors, tampers or other mechanical means as may be found suitable for the location. Before rolling, the water content shall be checked and corrected by sprinkling with water or adding dry material or aeration as may be required. This shall be followed by mixing and the layer left for soaking before compaction. The water content shall be within plus or minus 2% of Standard Proctor Optimum. Density of compacted layers shall be determined by sand replacement method. Average compacted density shall be at least 95% of Standard Proctor Density. The number of tests to be conducted for determination of moisture content and density shall be as prescribed by the Engineer. Side slopes of embankments shall be formed along with the main embankment. No side dumping shall be done for the formation of slopes. When required the width of each layer shall be constructed slightly in excess of required width and slopes trimmed to remove loose edge materials and completed to lines shown in drawings or as directed by the Engineer. Sub grades for road works shall be thoroughly wetted sufficiently in advance of placing of any base course and it shall be ensured that it is firm and moist for at least 50 mm below the surface. Should the sub grade for any reason be loose or have density less than required, it shall be recompacted and refinished. Excessive loss of moisture in the sub grade shall be prevented by sprinkling and/or scaling. No traffic or hauling equipment shall be permitted to ply on finished sub grade and any damage caused to such portion shall be made good by the Contractor at his own cost.





Page 1 of 1

Chapter‐ I

SECTION ‐III METHOD OF MEASUREMENT 1.0 GENERAL 1.1 The works executed shall be measured in stages. Approved billing schedule

for civil works shall form the basis of identification of stages of construction. 1.2 The tenderer shall submit relevant backup calculations for the quantum of

work considered in each of the stages considered for approval of billing schedule.

1.3 As a guideline the stages of work shall generally be considered as

Foundation, Lintel level, Floor slab/ roof slab level. Sanitary & water supply, Finishing, Site clearance & handing over. For other items of work, such as roads, drains, stages shall be considered as percentage of the entire work.

1.4 In case of requirement of detailed measurements to be taken, the method

of measurement of work shall be in accordance with IS: 1200 (Part 1 to 28) – 1971 to 1993 / SP:27.

1.5 The measurement considered shall be purely for the purpose of clearance of

stage payments and shall not in any way indicate change of scope. No claims shall be entertained on this account.





Page 1 of 4

Chapter‐I

SECTION – IV NORMS OF CEMENT CONSUMPTION 1.0 GENERAL

1.1 For calculating the requirements of cement in various items of work the

following standards shall be adopted. Over the above theoretical quantity of cement, additional allowance upto plus or minus 3% shall also be allowed as certified by the Consultant.

1.2 For items not covered in this standard, CPWD standards shall be followed or

calculated as per uses/requirement in absence of standard norms. Cement required for enabling work and cement required for testing purposes will be taken into account for consumption purpose. However, in no case such quantity should exceed 5% of the total cement used in the work or as certified by the Consultant based on actual observation whichever is less.

2.0 MASONRY WORK

Sl.No.

Description of Item

Cement requirement

1. Random Rubble Masonry in CM (1:4) 1.255 quintals per cum

2. Random Rubble Masonry in CM (1:6) 0.825 quintals per cum

3. Coursed Rubble Masonry in CM (1:5) 0.98 quintals per cum

4. Brick work in CM (1:5) 0.775 quintals per cum of BW

5. Brick work in CM (1:6) 0.625 quintals per cum of BW

6. Half brick work in4 CM (1:3) 1.43 quintals per 10 sqm of area

7. Half brick work in CM (1:4) 1.06 quintals per 10 sqm of area

3.0 PLAIN/REINFORCED CONCRETE Sl.No.

Description of Item

Cement requirement

1. RCC/PCC of nominal mix (1:4:8) complete (excluding finishing with CP)

1.70 quintals per cum of concrete





Page 2 of 4





4. RCC/PCC of nominal mix (1:1.5:3) complete (excluding finishing with CP)


4.0 CONTROLLED CONCRETE – PLAIN AND REINFORCED S.No.

Description of Item

Cement requirement

1.

Concrete grade

(i) M‐7.5B (ii)M‐10B

2.

Concrete grade

(i) M‐15C (ii) M‐15D

3.

Concrete grade

(i) M‐20C (ii) M‐20D

To be mutually agreed based on mix design to be prepared by Tenderer & approved by the Consultant plus wastage and all incidentals as decided.

4.

Concrete grade

(i) M‐25C (ii) M‐25D

5.

Concrete grade

(i) M‐30C (ii) M‐30D

To be mutually agreed based on mix design to be prepared by Tenderer and approved by the Consultant plus wastage and all incidentals as decided.

5.0 FINISHING S.No.

Description of Item

Cement requirement

1.

6 mm thick C.P. 1:4

0.280 quintal per

10 sqm area





Page 3 of 4

2.

12 mm thick C.P. 1:4

0.550 quintal per

10 sqm area

3.


0.450 quintal per

10 sqm area

4.


0.650 quintal per

10 sqm area

5.


0.440 quintal per

10 sqm area

6.0 FLOORING S.No.

Description of Item

Cement requirement

1.

40mm thick IPS cement concrete flooring (1:2:4) with 20mm and down stone chips finished with a floating coat of neat cement

1.500 quintal per

10 sqm area

2.

40mm thick (IPS) flooring with base coat 30mm thick (1:2:4) using stone chips 10mm nominal size and 10mm topping coat 1:1 (1 cement : 1 stone chips 3 to 6mm size) with a floating coat of neat cement

2.320 quintal per

10 sqm area

3.

Extra for each additional thickness of 5 mm granolithic layer of (1:2:4) for flooring

0.016 quintal per

10 sqm area

7.0 MISCELLANEOUS S.No.

Description of Item

Cement requirement

1.

Grouting with

CM (1:2)

7.18 quintal per cum





Page 4 of 4

CM (1:3)


2.

Fixing steel windows with (1:2:4) concrete blocks

0.40 quintal per

10 sqm of area

3.

Cement‐sand mortar :‐

a)

(1:1) (1 cement : 1 sand)


b)


6.8 quintal per cum

c)


5.1 quintal per cum

d)


3.8 quintal per cum

e)


3.1 quintal per cum

f)


2.5 quintal per cum





Page 1 of 6

Chapter‐I

SECTION – V DIMENSONAL TOLERANCE 1.0 GENERAL 1.1 The materials used in construction shall, besides conforming to the

specifications and standards mentioned, be the best of the existing kinds obtainable. Where a particular ‘Brand’ or ‘Make’ of material is specified such ‘Brand’ or ‘Make’ of material alone shall be used.

1.2 A high standard of workmanship and accuracy shall be achieved in all

sections and parts of the work. The workmanship shall be in accordance with the latest and the best civil engineering practice.

1.3 The Tenderer shall ensure that all sections of the work are carried out with

utmost care to achieve the dimensions shown in drawings or specifications. In the absence of such specific mention in drawings the following dimensional deviations may be tolerated, provided they do not impair the appearance or render the particular section of work unacceptable to the purpose for which it is intended. Tolerance for materials and workmanship not covered in this part as mentioned hereinafter will be in accordance with the relevant IS code.

Description Permissible tolerance Building bricks in length, width & height : As per IS:1077 Laterite stone, in length, width & height : ± 5 mm Natural building stones

Length, width : ± 5 mm Height : ± 3 mm

Length & width : + 5 mm & ‐10 mm

a) For stones required in ashlar masonry

b) For stones required other than in ashlar masonry

Height : ± 5 mm

Length : ± 1% of standard length

Concrete & Reinforced concret pipes

Internal dia upto 300mm : + 3 mm, ‐ 1.5 m Length of fittings : ± 10 mm Length of pipes : ± 20 mm

Thickness : ‐ 1 mm Internal dia of socket : ± 3 mm

Cast iron spigot & socket pipes and fittings

Depth of socket : ± 10 mm





Page 2 of 6

External dia upto 75mm : ± 3 mm 100 mm : ± 3.5 mm 150 mm : ± 4 mm

Upto 75 cm dia length ± 10 mm Upto 90 cm dia length ± 15 mm In thickness of barrel & socket not exceeding 450 mm

± 2 mm

Stone ware pipes

In thickness of berrel and socket between 50 to 600 mm

± 3 mm

Length of all four sides ± 2.5 % Glazed tiles Individual dimensions and thickness

± 2.5 %

Metal Doors, Windows & Ventilators

In overall dimensions ± 1.5 mm

Wooden Doors Windows & Ventilators

In overall dimensions ± 3 mm

Width ± 3 mm

All components of shutter except glazing bars

Thickness ± 1 mm

Glazing bars Width & thickness ± 1 mm

1 Mild steel tubes, tubulars and other wrought steel fittings Butt welded light tubes + not limited , ‐ 8 % Medium and heavy tubes + not limited, ‐ 10 %

Thickness

Seamless tubes + not limited, ‐ 12.5 % Single tube (irrespective

of the quality) + 10 %, ‐ 8 %

For quantity of less than 150 m of one size

+ 10 %, ‐ 8 %

Weight

For quantity of 150 m and over of one size

+ 4 %, ‐ 4%

Earth work Finished level of site leveling in hard rock ± 50 mm Finished level of site leveling except for hard

rock ± 100 mm

Level of pits, trenches and foundations ± 50 mm Concrete & reinforced concrete 1.01.01 Plan dimensions + 50 mm, ‐ 12 mm





Page 3 of 6

Eccentricity 0.2 times the dimension of footing in the direction limited to 50 mm

Footings

Thickness ± 0.05 times the specified thickness

Deviation of plane and lines of their intersection from vertical or inclination along full height

± 20 mm

Deviation of horizontal plane from horizontal line

For 1 m of plane in any direction

± 5 mm

For the whole plane ± 20 mm Sizes of cross section ± 8 mm Surface of inserts to support loads

± 5 mm

Foundations

Length of elements ± 20 mm Top level of bolts + 20 mm Top level of foundation before grouting

‐ 20 mm

Axes of anchor bolts in plan

± 5 mm

Axis of foundation in either direction

± 10 mm

Deviation in vertical line along height

± 5 mm

Sizes of pits in plan ± 20 mm Sizes of steps in plan ‐ 20 mm Levels of steps, benches and pits

‐ 20 mm

Axes of inserts in plan ± 10 mm 2 Basic

dimensions in plan

± 10 mm

Equipment foundations

Deviation of horizontal plane from horizontal line





Page 4 of 6

For 1 m of plane in any direction

± 5 mm

For whole plane ± 20 mm Local deviation of top surface when checked with a 2 m long straight edge

± 8 mm

Surface when checked with a 2 m long straight edge

± 8 mm

Sizes of cross section + 8 mm, ‐ 0 mm Length of elements ± 20 mm Deviation from horizontal plane for whole building

± 10 mm

verticality 1 in 1000 of height For columns supporting floor beams

± 10 mm

2.01.01 Buildings

For frame columns linked with crane girders & beams

± 10 mm

Length ± 20 mm Flatness of surface when checked with a 2 m long straight edge

± 8 mm

Level of top surface to support assembled elements

± 5 mm

Deviation in planes and lines of intersection from vertical

± 15 mm

2.01.02 Reinforced concrete walls

Size of cross section ± 8 mm Length of bar upto 75 cm long (other that straight bars)

+ 3 mm, ‐ 5 mm

75 to 150 cm long + 5 mm, ‐ 10 mm 150 to 250 cm long + 6 mm, ‐15 mm 250 cm long and above + 7 mm, ‐25 mm Straight bars, all lengths ± 25 mm

2.01.03 Placement of reinforcement

Spacing bars + 5 mm 2.01.04 Shift in location in plan ± 5 mm





Page 5 of 6

Same when bolts are located outside of structural columns

+ 10 mm

Top level ± 20 mm

Anchor bolts

Threaded length + 30 mm Masonry work For walls For pillers Width ± 10 mm ± 10 mm Shift in axes ± 10 mm Deviation from

horizontal line for every 10 m length

± 15 mm

Flatness of surface when checked with a 2 m long straight edge

± 10 mm ± 5 mm

Deviation in lines separating storyes

± 15 mm ± 15 mm

Deviation of surface from vertical and at angles and corners for 1 storey

± 10 mm ± 10 mm

For whole building ± 30 mm ± 30 mm Dimensions of

openings for doors, windows, etc.

+ 15 mm, ‐ 0mm

Flooring, Skirting, Dado and Plastering In situ flooring 4 mm Concrete tile and mosaic

in any 3 m length 3 mm

In large open area 15 mm Wall tiling surface should not vary

from general plane by more than

1 in 200

In any 2 m length 1.5 mm

Marble and such superior work In any row 3 mm

Flatness when checked with a 2 m long straight edge

3 mm

Plastered surfaces

Vertical surfaces upto 1 storey

5 mm





Page 6 of 6

Over full height 10 mm Metallic inserts On assembled

components Length & width ± 3 mm

Road work

The levels of subgrade and different pavement courses should not vary from those calculated with reference to the longitudinal and cross sections of the road as shown on the drawing beyond the tolerance given below:

Subgrade ± 25 mm Sub base + 20 mm Base ± 15 mm Wearing coat ± 6 mm





Page 1 of 4

Chapter‐I

SECTION – VI: SAFETY REQUIREMNTS FOR CONSTRUCTION WORKS 1.0 GENERAL 1.1 This specification deals with the subject matter of safety and protection to

be observed in the Civil Construction. This shall be followed along with all related statutory requirements/obligation including Government byelaws, codes, ordinance of local or central authorities related to the construction work.

1.2 In case of complicated work like deep excavation, intricate shuttering and

formwork, excavation in loose soil and below water table, stacking of excavated earth etc., work plan with necessary drawings and documents have to be prepared by the Tenderer and got approved by the Consultant.

1.3 Necessary reference shall be made to the following Indian Standard Codes

on safety requirements for various type of work:

2.0 INDIAN STANDARD

IS:4130 – 1991 Demolition of Buildings IS:3764 – 1992 Excavation Work IS:4014 – (P‐II) – 1967 Scaffolding, Steel Tubular IS:3696 – (P‐I & II) Scaffolds and Ladders 1987 to 1991 IS:4138 – 1977 Working in Compressed Air IS:7293 – 1974 Working with Construction Machinery IS:8989 – 1978 Erection of Concrete Framed Structures

3.0 EXCAVATIONS 3.1 No excavation or earthwork below the foundation level of an adjoining

building shall be taken up unless adequate steps are taken to prevent damage to the existing structure or fall of any part.

3.2 Every accessible part of an excavation, pit or opening in the ground into

which there is a danger of persons falling shall be suitably fenced with a barrier upto a height of one metre suitably placed from the edge of the excavation as far as practicable.





Page 2 of 4

3.3 No material or load shall be placed or stacked near the edge of the excavation or opening in the ground. The excavated material shall not be placed within 1.5 m of the trench or half of the depth of the trench whichever is more.

3.4 Cutting shall be done from top to bottom. No undercutting of sides of excavation shall be allowed.

3.5 Materials shall not be dumped against existing walls or partition to a height

that may endanger the stability of the walls. 3.6 While withdrawing piled materials like loose earth, crushed stone, sand, etc.

from the stock piles, no over hanging shall be allowed to be formed in the existing dump.

3.7 No material on any of the sites of work shall be so stacked or placed as to

cause danger or inconvenience to any person or public or any other agency at work.

4.0 SCAFFOLDING, LADDERS & SHUTTERING 4.1 For all works that cannot be done from the ground level or from part of any

permanent structure or from other available means of support, soundly constructed scaffoldings of adequate strength shall be used as a safe means of access to places of work.

4.2 All scaffolding shall be securely supported or suspended and wherever

necessary be properly braced to ensure stability. 4.3 All working platform and stages from which workers are liable to fall shall be

of adequate width depending on the type of work done and closely boarded and planked.

4.4 Every ladder shall be securely fixed at top and bottom. A ladder more than 5

m long shall have a prop. 4.5 No portable single ladder shall be over 8 m in length. 4.6 Unfinished scaffolding which is under construction shall be prominently

marked as unsafe and any access points shall be closed. 4.7 Shuttering

The above remarks shall be applicable for this also. Shuttering, particularly for slabs, should be treated as a scaffold. Unfinished shuttering should be





Page 3 of 4

marked as dangerous similarly the finished form work should be adequately supported, care being taken to avoid trap door effects.

5.0 SAFETY APPLIANCE Those engaged in white washing and mixing or stacking of cement bags or

any materials which is injurious to the eyes, shall be provided with protective goggles.

5.2 The Tenderer shall not employ men or women below the age of 18, on the

work of painting with products containing lead in any form. Whenever men / women above the age of 18 are employed on the work of lead painting the following precautions shall be taken:

5.3 All necessary personnel safety equipment such as safety helmets, safety

boots, safety belts, leather gloves for welders, clear glass safety goggles etc., as considered adequate by the Consultant have to be kept available for the use of persons employed at the site of work and maintained in condition suitable for immediate use and Tenderer shall take steps to ensure proper use of equipment by the workers.

5.4 Sign boards 1 x 1.5 m in size with the following wording shall be erected at

the access to these areas. “CONSTRUCTION AREA, HELMET REQUIRED BEYOND THIS POINT”.

5.4 Arrangement for rendering prompt and adequate first aid to the injured

persons shall be maintained at every work site under the guidance of a medical officer‐in‐charge of the project. Depending upon the magnitude of the work the availability of an Ambulance at a very short notice (a telephone call) shall be ensured.

5.5 First‐aid arrangements commensurate with the degree of hazard and with

the number of workers employed shall be maintained in a readily accessible place throughout the working hours. At least one experienced first‐air attendant with his distinguishing badge shall be available on each shift to take care of injured persons. Arrangements shall be made for calling the medical officer, when such a need may arise. It is recommended that foreman/assistant foreman / supervisor / permanent workmen who are normally present at each working place in each shift are given adequate training on first‐aid methods to avoid employment of a separate attendant.





Page 4 of 4

6.0 MISCELLANEOUS 6.1 The Tenderer shall provide necessary fencing and lights to protect the public

from accident.

6.2 To ensure effective enforcement of the rules and regulations relating to safety precautions, the arrangements made by the Tenderer shall be open to inspection by the Consultant and Owner.

6.3 All sources of ignition shall be prohibited in areas where flammable liquids are stored, handled and processed. Suitable warning and ‘NO SMOKING’ signs shall be pasted in all such places. Receptacles containing flammable liquids shall be stacked in such a manner as to permit free passage of air between them.

6.4 All combustible materials shall be continuously removed from such areas where flammable liquids are stored, handled and processed. All spills of flammable liquids shall be cleared up immediately. Containers of flammable liquids shall be tightly capped.

7.0 REPORTING OF ACCIDENT

7.1 All accidents, major or minor must be reported immediately. The Tenderer, will provide first aid to the injured person immediately and the injured person shall report to the first aid station along with the ‘INJURED ON WORK’ form duly filled in quintuplicate and submit to the Medical Officer of the First Aid Station”.

7.2 Serious Injury

7.3 In case of serious injury, the following procedure shall be adopted by the Tenderer:

a) Provide First Aid at his own First Aid Station. b) Take the injured person to the Hospital along with the “INJURED ON

WORK” form duly filled in. c) Reporting the accident to the Owner/Consultant by the Tenderer.

7.4 Fatal Accident Fatal accident must be reported immediately to the Consultant/Owner as well as to the Police.

8.0 PENALTY

Failure to observe the Safety Rules will make the Tenderer liable to penalty by way of suspension of work, fine and termination of contract.





Page 1 of 4

Chapter‐I

SECTION – VII: LIST OF RECOMMENDED MAKES/ MANUFACTURERS 1.0 GENERAL

1.1 The makes and manufacturers shall preferably be from the following list. In case the

same is not available in the market or incase of a change in trade name, equivalent makes/ re‐designated manufacturer shall be used with the approval of Consultant.

1.2 In case of items not covered in the list, the material shall be the best available in the

market and each item should have BIS certification mark. Sl.No Description Manufacturers 1 TILES:

i) Terrazzo and cement tiles. M/s. NITCO; M/S. NEC; M/S. NIMCO.

ii) White glazed tiles. R Johnson; Somani Pilkington; Spartek .

iii) PVC tiles. M/s. Bhor Industries., M/s. Premier Vinyl Flooring Ltd

2 METALLIC FLOOR HARDENR. M/s. Triveni Color Industries (Floornate) M/s. Heatly & Gresham (India) Ltd M/s. De‐Rust Chemical Corporation of Inida (Ferronite) M/s. Cement Research Corporation Pvt Ltd. (Stilonite)

3 WOODEN DOORS / BLOCK BOARDS / PLYWOOD/ PARTICLE BOARD.

M/s. Indian Plywood Mfg. Co. Ltd M/s. Kit Ply Industries Ltd; M/s. Nuboard M/s. Sitapur, M/s. Kutty Flush Doors M/s. Mysore Plywood Ltd; M/s. Joinery Manufacturer; M/s Northern Doors M/s. Wood India, Calcutta; M/s Pioneer Timber product, Chandigarh M/s Sakti Flush doors or equivalent approved manufacturer

4 STEEL DOORS & WINDOWS M/s. Sen Harvic; M/s AGEW; M/s. Hopes Metal; M/s. Multiwyn M/s NCL Seccolor Ltd. or equivalent approved manufacturer

5 ROLLING SHUTTERS M/s. SwastikRollling Shutters & Engg. Co. (P) Ltd., M/s Hercules Rolling Shutters &





Page 2 of 4

Sl.No Description Manufacturers Engg Works. or equivalent approved manufacturer

6 ALUMINIUM DOORS, WINDOWS, WALL SPANS.

M/s. Ajit India; M/s. Alumilite; M/s. Indal;; M/s Jindal.

7 GLASS. (Plain/Frosted, Garless, Bajra etc.)

M/S Triveni M/s Modigaurd M/s Sant gobain Or equivalent approved manufacturer

8 HARDWARE FITTINGS & FIXTURES.

M/s Jayant Metal Manufacturing Co. M/s Shalimar Hardware. Everite. M/s Godrej & Boyce mfg. Ltd. or equivalent approved manufacturer.

9. A/C SHEETS. M/s Asbestos Cement ltd. (Everest); M/s Charminar or equivalent approved manufacturer.

10. WATERSTOPS. (PVC/RUBBER)

M/s Basecon; M/s Pask; M/s Asian Engg. Products; M/s Capnhans india Ltd; M/s Fixopan Engrs. Pvt. Ltd. or equivalent approved manufacturer.

11. EXPANSION JOINT AND TARFELT WATERPROOFING

M/s Shalitex; M/s Tiki Tar industries; M/ Shalimar Tar Products; M/s Lloyd Insulation (I) or equivalent approved manufacturer.

12. INTEGRAL WATER: PROOFING COMPOUND

Accoproof, Cico; Impermo or equivalent approved manufacturer.

13. CEMENT BASED: WATERPROOFING TREATMENT

M/s India Waterproofing Co.; M/s All India Waterproofing Co; M/s Likproof India Pvt. Ltd.; M/s Modern Waterproofing Co.; M/s Nina Industries.

14. PAINTS AND VARNISH M/s Asian Paints; M/s Goodlas Nerolac; M/s Garware Paints Ltd.; M/s I.C.I. Paints; M/s Berger (British) Paints; M/s Jenson Nicholson; or equivalent approved manufacturer.

15. CEMENT BASED WATERPROOF PAINTS & RESINBASED THERMO PLASTIC PAINTS

M/s Snowcem India Ltd. M/s Nitco Paints Pvt. Ltd. (Nitcocent); M/s Hindustan Colour Chemical Industries;





Page 3 of 4

Sl.No Description Manufacturers M/s Terraco (Terraccin & Terracoat); M/s Surfa Coat Pvt. Ltd. or equivalent approved manufacturer.

16. PRESSED STEEL DOOR: FRAMES

M/s Sen Harvic M/s Techome M/s Madhu Industries, Bangalore or equivalent approved manufacturer.

17 FALSE CEILING / PANELING INDIA GYPSUM LTD., 18 DECORATIVE LAMINATES Decolam , Formica 19 PVC/ FRP DOORS Rajashri plastic, Thermodeck 20

DOOR CLOSERS Everite, Hardiwyn, Dewan Industries

21 SEALANTS GE Silicon,Bostik 22 CONCRETE PAVER BLOCKS Basant Belton,

Adideep Interlock Pavers, PVt. Ltd., Designers Pavings & Tiles Pvt. Ltd., Bessers Concrete Paver Blocks.

23 SANITARY APPLIANCES Parraware,Hindustan 24 CP BRASS FITTINGS Jaquar MBM, GEM,

Kigston, 25 CP BRASS WASTE COUPLING, BOTTLE

TRAPS Jaquar, ESSO, GEM, Kingston,

26 PVC flushing cisterns Parry ware, Hindware

27 Mirror Hindustan Pilkinton, Modigaurd. Atul glass Works , Golden fish

28 Plastic seat and cover Commander, 29 Stainless Sink Nirali, Dayana, AMC, etc. 30 GI Pipes ITC, Zenith, Ambica 31 GI Mallable fittings PEC, MJM. Bimal 32 GM gate/ Globe valves Neta, Sant, NEW,Leader 33 Ball Valves MBM, Techno, Leader 34 CI water quality pipes IISCO 35 CI soil quality pipes IISCO, Neco 36 SW Pipes & Gulley traps Perfect Kashmira, 37 RCC Hume Pipes Indian Hume Pipes, Pranali Premier 38 HDPE Pipes & fittings Prince, Gautam 39 PVC pipes & fittings Flowgaurd 40 Modular floors Unitile 41 CI manhole covers Neco 42 PVC storage tanks Sintex, Century, Polycon 43 CEMENT ACC, COROMANDEL, RAJASHREE,

ZUARI, L&T (ULTRA TECH CEMENT)





Page 4 of 4

Sl.No Description Manufacturers 44 REINFORCEMENT STEEL SAIL, TATA STEEL, RINIL 45 ADMIXTURES FOSROC, SIKA, ROFF,

46 Anti‐ termite M/s Pest Control (I) Ltd., M/s Mysodet Pvt Ltd.,

ITEM NO

DESCRIPTION OF ITEM UNIT QUANTITY RATE (Rs) AMOUNT (Rs)

SECTION ‐ EW ‐ EARTHWORK

Earthwork in excavation and backfilling in layer of 30 cm for Foundations of buildings, pipe supports, equipments, tunnels, trenches,culverts, manholes, etc., in Oridnary soils including Soft rock / Disintegrated rock, in both Dry and Wet conditions, including Pumpingand Bailing out Surface and Subsoil water, Shoring, Strutting, Slush removal at all heights and depths as per Drawing andSpecifications wherever required , in Foundation pits and other places with excavated suitable surplus earth, including reclaiming fromspoil heaps kept elsewhere including dressing and levelling,watering and mechanical compaction etc.,Transporting surplusunserviceable soil to Dumping yards within plant site and spreading in layers as per Specifications and direction of Consultant. TheMeasurement for payment shall be for the Theoretical volume only i.e., the volume of the block of the excavation having maximumbottom dimension of the foundation as per Drawing and to actual depth.

( The Contractor shall take into account in his rate, the provision for excess excavation for necessary working space, slope etc.,required for excavation and other allied works and refilling the side slopes and working space)

a) For depth upto & including 2.00 m CUM 20329.00

b) For depth beyond 2.00 m and upto & including 4.00 m CUM 5083.00

c) For depth beyond 4.00 m and upto & including 6.00 m CUM 2033.00

Same as in item EW‐1but in hard rocks,excavation by blasting




Controlled earth filling under floors and other places with special compaction to achieve dry density of 95% standard proctor densitywith excavated surplus earth including cost of excavation reclaiming from spoil heaps within plant site as per instruction of theConsultant at all heights/depths, transporting, depositing, compacting and dressing, trimming complete as desired in layers notexceeding 15 cms including watering, consolidating by mechanical means as per specifications and instructions of the Consultant.

a) With available earth CUM 1017.00

PART ‐ A:CIVIL WORKS

BMM ISPAT LIMITED

EW1

EW2

EW‐3

SPEC.NO.MEC/01/56/Q6WX/CIVIL WORKS/TS/201 Rev. 0(c) 2011, MECON LIMITED, All rights reserved.

PAGE 1 OF 28

ITEM NO



BMM ISPAT LIMITED

EW‐4

Controlled earth filling in site levelling, under floors and other places with earth brought from outside sources, with specialcompaction to achieve dry density of 95% of standard proctor density as per instruction of the Engineer Incharge at allheights/depths (lifts), transporting, depositing, compacting and dressing, trimming complete as desired in layers not exceeding250mm including watering, consolidating by mechanical means as per specifications and instructions of the Engineer Incharge.(Payment shall be made for consolidated thickness only)

CUM 1017.00

EW‐5Supplying and filling approved quality sand in foundation or under floor, trenches, pits and other places, at all locations in layers of200 mm thickness including watering and ramming, all lead, lift and depth complete as per drawing and specification and direction ofthe Consultant

CUM 5083.00

SECTION TOTAL‐ EW

SECTION ‐ AT ‐ ANTITERMITE TREATMENT

AT‐1

Supplying and injecting with approved quality chemical emulsion at the rates and concentrations as per IS 6313‐1981 Part II forpreconstructional antitermite treatment and creating a chemical barrier under and alround the column pits, foundation, walltrenches, plinth filling, junctions of wall and floor, expansion joints, apron, surrounding of pipes, conduits etc., along the perimeter ofthe building including all byeworks complete as per specification and direction of Consultant(only ground floor plinth area of thebuilding will be measured for the payment in the following three stages. i) 50% after completion of the foundations ii) 30% aftercompletion of the ground floor flooring iii) 20% after completion of all treatment works including ground floor doors & windows.Work to be executed by M/s Pest Control (India) or any other approved agency and specified guarantee for 10 (ten) years shall befurnished by the tenderer.Payment will be cleared only after submission of Guarantee.

SQM 509.00

SECTION TOTAL‐ AT


PAGE 2 OF 28

ITEM NO



BMM ISPAT LIMITED

SECTION ‐ CC ‐ PLAIN AND REINFORCED CONCRETE

Supplying and Laying Plain Cement Concrete of following Grades (including Shuttering if required) in all levelling courses underFoundation, Floors, Pipelines, Pits etc., at all depths complete all as per Drawings and Specifications and instruction of the Consultant.

a) M‐5 Grade Concrete, using 40 mm down graded coarse aggregate. CUM 4435.00

b) M‐7.5 Grade Concrete, using 40 mm down graded coarse aggregate. CUM 4435.00

c) M‐10 Grade Concrete, using 40 mm down graded coarse aggregate. CUM 5913.00

CC2

Supplying and laying plain cement concrete of proportion 1:2:4 at all leads and lifts, in all floors, aprons, pits, drains and other similarworks, steps, coping of compound wall etc. by mechanical mixing using graded stone aggregate 20 mm max. size and down includingmechanical mixing, transporting, consolidation, including shuttering, if required, as per specifications, drawings and instructions of theEngineer Incharge.

CUM 650.00

Supplying & laying reinforced cement concrete flooring of thickness as mentioned in the drawing of following grades in long panelswith necessary slope using screed vibrators, etc., in floors and any other works as directed. The rates shall include the cost ofnecessary shuttering (but excluding the cost of steel reinforcement) to maintain the line and level of the floor to achieve the flat andsmooth surface within the specified tolerance, cleaning and preparing the base surface and other necessary bye‐works, provision forconstruction joints, expansion joints, etc., all complete as per specification, drawings and direction of the Consultant.

a) M‐20 Grade, design mix, Concrete, using 20 mm down graded coarse aggregate. CUM 1525.00

Supplying and Laying of design mix, with minimum cement content per Cum of concrete to be not less than 320 kg) ReinforcedCement Concrete of following Grades (excluding Shuttering and Reinforcement) at all depths and heights in all types of Foundations,Footings, pile caps, equipment foundations, columns, lintels, ducts, beams, brackets, slabs, sloped roofs, walls, sills, parapets, bandsand any other works both in under ground and Superstructures all complete as per Drawings, Specification and instruction ofConsultant.

a) M‐25 Grade Design Mix Concrete, using 20 mm down graded coarse aggregate. CUM 66069.00

b) M‐30 Grade Design Mix Concrete, using 20 mm down graded coarse aggregate.(with cooling of aggregates/ use of ice for massconcreting of BF/ Stoves foundation)

CUM 5083.00

CC1

CC3

CC4


PAGE 3 OF 28

ITEM NO



BMM ISPAT LIMITED

CC5Supplying and laying reinforced cement concrete grade M‐25 with stone aggregate of 20 mm and down graded (excluding shutteringand reinforcement) at all heights for super structures of silos, water tanks and chimneys of all shapes with all byeworks complete asper drawings, specification & instruction of the consultants.

CUM 1525.00

Providing, Fixing and Stripping of Shuttering of good quality plywood or steel plate on steel frame for all types of Structures notcovered in respective items including Centering / Scaffolding, all complete as per Drawings, Specifications and directions of theConsultant.

a) For Structures at all depths and heights. SQM 304932.00

b) For Structures at all depths and heights for curved shuttering. SQM 12198.00

CC7

Supplying and providing slip‐form shuttering for construction of cylindrical silos, water tank shafts, chimneys with sliding surfaces oninternal and external faces of the shaft with steel sheet form panels, with necessary widening at the bottom for ease of slidingupwards, with all necessary ribs, yoke frames, working platforms, suspended finishing platforms, hydraulic lifting jacks, pump sets,including jacking rods with all necessary accessories provided at designed centers, arrangements for verifying verticality, includingarrangements for correction of out of plumb movement and twist or rotation in plan, elevation control mechanism, including allnecessary bye‐works for provision of inserts, openings and dowel bars as directed by engineer (Both internal and external faces shallbe measured for payment. The scheme of slip‐form shuttering shall be got approved by the engineer in‐charge).

SQM 1017.00

Supplying, fabricating and fixing in position HIGH YIELD STRENGTH DEFORMED BARS ‐ TMT steel reinforcements of grade Fe 500 D atall levels and positions, all leads and lifts including the cost of transport, straightening, cutting, bending, cranking, binding, fixing, tyingin position with two nos. of 1.6 mm dia. soft drawn annealed binding wire, welding, provision of necessary chairs and spacers,including tying and bending dowel bars and their straightening upon deshuttering (wherever necessary) as per drawings andspecifications and including cost of binding wire, labour, cover blocks in CM 1:2 etc., all complete for reinforced concrete as perspecifications, drawings and instructions of the Engineer Incharge. The pins,chairs and spacer bars provided will be measured forpayment.

a) Reinforcement conforming to Grade Fe‐500 D of IS : 1786‐2008 ( TMT‐EQR bars from SAIL or equivalent from RINL/TATA STEEL) MT 2135.00

CC9

Suppliying,Fabricating, Fixing at all levels and positions Steel embedment/ Inserts like Anchor bolts,Plates, chequerred plates,Channels, Anchor boxes, Bolt with nuts and washers Bolt caps, GI pipe Sleeves including Threading etc., including two coats ofapproved quality Synthetic enamel paint over a primer coat on the exposed Surfaces wherever necessary, complete as perDrawings, Specifications and directions of the Consultant. Insert materials shall conform to IS:2062 ( Jigs, Templates and Fixtureswill not be paid separately. )

KGS. 16264.00

CC10Supplying, Fabricating, Fixing at all levels and positions High tensile Bolt conforming to IS:1367‐1991with nuts and washers Bolt caps,including Threading etc., complete as per Drawings, Specifications and directions of the Consultant.( Jigs, Templates and Fixtureswill not be paid separately. )

KGS. 2033.00

CC6

CC8


PAGE 4 OF 28

ITEM NO



BMM ISPAT LIMITED

Supplying and mixing approved water proofing admixture as per the manufacturer's specification including cost of material ,complete, with all byeworks as per drawing and instruction of the Consultant.

a) Liquid water proofing compound (conplast X421 IC or equivalent) conforming to IS:2645‐1975 LITER 5083.00

Construction of Anchor holes or Anchor pockets of following Cross sections including necessary Shuttering and its removal,Cleaning and keeping it covered till Erection of bolts etc., as per Specifications, Drawings and direction of the Consultant.

a) Cross section upto and equal to 200 sqcm. RM 204.00

b) Cross section more than 200 sqcm and upto 650 sqcm RM 102.00

Supplying & Grouting ( including tamping ) for Foundations, Structures, Equipments, Base plates, Anchor holes etc., with CementConcrete of the following Grades (including Shuttering wherever necessary) at all levels and as per Drawings, Specifications anddirection of the Consultant.

a) M‐30 Grade Design Mix Concrete,using 12 mm down graded coarse aggregate. CUM 26.00

CC11

CC12

CC13


PAGE 5 OF 28

ITEM NO



BMM ISPAT LIMITED

CC‐14Supplying & grouting for foundations, equipment base plates, anchor bolts etc., with cement based non shrink compound such asShrinkomp of ACC or approved make including shuttering at all levels and as per drawings, specification and direction of Consultant.

CUM 6.00

CC‐15Supplying & laying roof screed with M‐15 grade concrete (12 mm down graded coarse aggregate) with smooth finish and requiredslope (ave.50 mm thick) including mixing of water proof compound as per manufacturer's specification (payment for water proofingcompound will be done under relevant item).

SQM 1017.00

CC‐16Providing and laying heat resistant concrete of grade M‐30 using basalt aggregates, basalt sand and Blast furnace slag cement, infoudations of Blastfurnace and stoves etc. as per specifications and direction of Consultant

CUM 1220.00

SECTION TOTAL ‐ CCSECTION ‐ MN ‐ STONE & BRICK MASONRY

MN1Supplying & Laying Random Rubble Masonry brought to courses with locally available stone in cement & sand mortar (1: 5) of anyshape in foundations, superstructure plinths, trenches, drains etc., at all depths & height, curing, including filling of joints with CM 1:5and racking of joints, etc. complete with all byeworks as per specification and drawings.

CUM 1525.00

MN2Supplying & Laying hollow cement concrete block work of 200 thk. (400x200x200‐D5 grade) in super structure,in cement mortar 1:5(1cement : 5 sand) including projections,pillars, parapet mantle all complete including cut work, scaffolding, curing etc.,with all bye‐works as per specifications, drawings and directions of the Consultant.

CUM 1525.00

MN3Same as item no.MN‐2 but with 100mm thk. partition wall (400x100x200) in cement & sand mortar 1:4(1 cement : 4 sand) includingRCC band 75mm thk. at every 5 courses with 2 bars of 8 mm dia.in each layer with one legged stirrup at every 300 c/c, with neccessaryshuttering for RCC band.

SQM 204.00

SECTION TOTAL ‐ MN


PAGE 6 OF 28

ITEM NO



BMM ISPAT LIMITED

SECTION ‐ FN ‐PLASTERING & SURFACE FINISHES

FN1

Supplying and Laying 20 mm thick external sponge finish cement plaster 1:5 (1 cement : 5 sand) as per architectural shapes marked inthe drawings, at all depths and heights in two coats of 12mm & 8mm. 2nd coating 8mm shall be finished with sand faced plasteringon faces of walls, pillars, projection, bands, cornices, fins, sills, etc., including raking out joints if any left out, necessary dabbing,curing, scaffolding, providing chicken mesh at junctions of columns, beams etc., complete at all heights as per specification anddrawings, second layer with water proofing compound (to be paid under relevant items).

SQM 3050.00

FN2

Supplying & laying 12 mm thick cement plaster 1:4 (1 cement : 4 sand) smooth finish as per architectural shapes marked in thedrawings, at all depths and heights in one layer on internal faces of walls, pillars, projection, bands, cornices etc., including necessarydabbing, curing, scaffolding, providing chicken mesh at junctions of columns, beams etc., complete at all heights as per specificationand drawings.

SQM 5083.00

FN3Supplying and Laying 6 mm thick cement plaster 1:4 (1 cement : 4 sand) to ceiling of slabs, chajjas, bands, beams, columns, loft slabs,staircases, and any other location at all heights wherever required with all bye works dabbing, curing, scaffolding, including providingchicken mesh at junction of columns, beams,etc., complete at all heights and levels as per specification and drawings.

SQM 509.00

FN4Supplying and Laying 12mm thick cement plaster CM 1:4 (1 cement : 4 sand) to apron, drain and any other location at all heightsincluding floating coat of neat cement @ 2.2 kg/sqm wherever required with all bye‐works dabbing, curing, complete all heights andlevels as per specification and drawings and as directed by Consultant.

SQM 610.00

FN5

Providing two coats of water based 100% acrylic exterior emulsion paint over a coat of approved primer which in turn shall be appliedover a coat of colourless biowash of approved make over external concrete/masonry/plastered surfaces as antifungal treatmentincluding prior washing of the surface with clean water, removal of dirt, debris etc. at all heights and levels, including surfacepreparation, scaffolding at all locations and heights with all byeworks complete as per manufacturer's specification and direction ofthe Engineer Incharge.

SQM 1525.00


PAGE 7 OF 28

ITEM NO



BMM ISPAT LIMITED

FN6

Distempering with two coats of acrylic oil bound washable distemper over internal plastered surfaces, of approved shade & makeover one coat of approved cement primer, including preparing the surfaces by applying BIRLA WHITE Wall Care Putty (Fine finish) /Gypsum wall putty from Supreme Gypsum 1.5mm thick, surface preparation, cleaning and all byeworks, filling hair cracks with putty /approved filler wherever required, scaffolding & cleaning, cost of all materials, labour etc. at all heights and lifts, all as per drawing,specifications and as directed by Engineer Incharge etc. complete.

SQM 2033.00

FN7Supplying and applying waterproof cement paint of approved make and shade with textured finish in two coats at all locations overand including a priming coat over wall surface, etc., including preparation of surface complete with all bye works, specification anddirection of the Consultant.

SQM 1500.00

FN8Supplying and applying 3coats of white wash all heights and locations with all bye works including scaffolding complete as perspecifications

SQM 3050.00

FN9Supplying & laying flush cement pointing to stone masonry on external face, in cement mortar 1:3 at all locations to a minimum depthof 20 mm, complete as per specifications, drawings and directions of Consultant.

SQM 255.00

Supplying & Laying the following thickness lath plaster at all heights and locations for vertical fins, facias, bands, drops, etc., consistingof cement‐sand plaster of proportion 1:3, including finishing the exposed faces smooth, providing of wire mesh to reinforcement bars,necessary shuttering, surface preparations, etc., all complete as per drawings and directions of the Consultant. The steelreinforcements shall be paid for under reinforcement item.

a) 50 mm thick SQM 102.00b)75 mm thick SQM 51.00

FN‐11Supplying and painting two coats of Synthetic Enamel paint of approved colour and make over a coat of primer over new wooden/steel work, al all levels and heights, including preparation of surface for receiving the paint by surface scarping, rubbing, applying filler,etc., including cost of filler, etc., complete as per specification and direction of consultant.

SQM 102.00

FN‐12

Providing and applying two coats of Industrial grade hot bitumen 85/25 conforming to IS 702 over concrete surfaces includingcleaning of surfaces of all undesirable material, cutting and removal of binding wires etc, filling voids with cement mortar 1:4 andrendering the surface dry before application, as per specification and directions of Consultant, complete, for foundations, pedestals,pits, etc.

SQM 2033.00

FN‐13 Supplying and making 10 mm grooves in external wall plastering at the joints of beam/column and brick wall including scaffolding etc.. RM 509.00

FN‐14Providing drip mould of size 20mm x 8mm over cement plastering of chajjas, roof projections etc. at all heights and levels in cementmortar 1:3, hacking, curing, scaffolding etc at all heights and lifts, all complete as per specifications and instructions of the EngineerIncharge.

RM 250.00

SECTION TOTAL ‐ FN

FN10


PAGE 8 OF 28

ITEM NO



BMM ISPAT LIMITED

SECTION ‐ FL ‐ FLOORING, PAVING & FACING

FL1

Supplying & laying hard core with hard granite stone boulders below floors and aprons including laying, packing, filling interstices withgood quality spalls, dry and wet consolidation with mechanical means, blinding with good quality moorum/ sand (cost inclusive) withall bye works complete for hard core upto 230 mm thick below floor and 115 mm thick, below apron as per specification andinstruction of the Consultant (Consolidated thickness will be paid).

CUM 2542.00

FL2

Supplying and laying 40 mm thick grey cement concrete flooring laid in panels with a maximum panel area of 2.50 sqm. at all locationsand levels including skirting, steps, nosing, landing slab etc., consisting of plain cement concrete 1:2:4 base (under bed) 30 mm thick(1 cement : 2 coarse sand : 4 stone chips 12 mm & down) and topping 10 mm thick (net after cutting) of mix 1:1:1 (1 cement : 1medium sand : 1 fine stone grit upto 3.0 mm size) and finished with a floating coat of neat cement 2.2 Kg of cement per Sqm offlooring, providing glass strips 4 mm thick upto 40 mm deep, complete with all bye works as per specification, drawing, (Chequerringin floor finish inclusive if required) and as directed by the Consultant.

SQM 10165.00

Supplying and laying granolithic flooring with total thickness as given below, laid monolithically over base concrete in panels with amaximum panel area of 2.50 sqm. at all locations and heights including skirting, treads of steps, nosing, landing slab etc., with underbed consisting of plain cement concrete 1:2:4(1cement: 2coarse sand:4stone chips, 12mm and down) and topping of mix1:1:1(1cement:1medium sand:1fine stone grit upto 3mm size), supplying and fixing 1.5mm thick aluminium strip for full depth,chequerring in floor finish inclusive if required, rounding, sloping, curing, finishing, preparation of slabs, steps, etc., all as perspecifications, drawings and directions of the Consultant.

a) 25mm thick with 19mm under‐bed and 6mm topping mixed with non‐metallic floor hardener as per manufacturer's specificationand instructions (Fosroc, Sika or equivalent)

SQM 509.00

FL4

Providing and laying 21 mm thick grey cement skirting or dado on walls, risers of steps or in any other vertical surfaces at anylocations consisting of 15 mm thick back coat of cement mortar 1:3 (1 cement : 3 sand) and 6 mm topping (net) with 1:1 cement stonechips mix (1 cement : 1 medium sand : 1 fine stone chips 3 mm down graded) finishing with a floating coat of neat cement, in dado,etc. complete with all bye works as per specification and direction of the Consultant at all levels.

SQM 6000.00

FL3


PAGE 9 OF 28

ITEM NO



BMM ISPAT LIMITED

Providing and laying anti‐skid ceramic tiles tiles conforming to IS:13754 and of approved colour at all levels and locations usingapproved first quality tiles in flooring of toilets etc. and as shown in the drawing laid over and including minimum 35 mm bed (CM 1:3)joints filled with white cement mixed with matching shade of pigment etc. at all leads and lifts, complete with all byeworks as perspecification and direction of Engineer Incharge

a) 300mm x 300mm x minimum 7.7mm thk. in flooring

i) Light shades Sqm 100.00

ii) Dark shades Sqm 50.00

Providing and laying ceramic tiles conforming to IS:13754 of approved colour at all levels and locations with necessary specials etc.using approved first quality tiles as shown in the drawing laid over and including minimum 15 mm thk. CM 1:3) backing and tile fixingadhesive mixed to cement paste used for fixing the tiles, joints filled with white cement mixed with matching shade of pigment etc. atall leads and lifts, complete with all byeworks as per specification and direction of Engineer Incharge.

a) In dado / skirting using 300x 400 mm Tiles.i) Light shades Sqm 50.00ii) Dark shades Sqm 10.00b) Dado using 300 x 200 mm tiles (Light shade) Sqm 50.00c) In skirting using 200x 100 mm Tiles. (Light Shade) Sqm 50.00

FL‐7

Supplying and laying white glazed tiles conforming to IS 13753 (Part II) of size 200 x 100 x 6 mm in skirting / dado including providingbands of approved shade and size with 12 mm thick CM bed 1:3 as shown in the drawing and joints filled with white cement withapproved colour pigment complete with all bye works as per specifications and direction of Consultant, fixing tiles with approvedfixing adhesive compounds as manufacture's specification.

SQM 153.00

Providing and laying vitrified ceramic tiles of approved colour and design at all levels and locations using approved first quality tiles in flooringwith or without spacers as shown in the drawing, laid over a bedding of cement mortar bed of mix 1:4 to achieve overall flooring thickness as40mm and a backcoat of white cement slurry and joints filled with white cement mixed with matching pigment complete with all byeworks likecovering with plaster of paris, curing etc. at all leads and lifts and as per specification / instructions of the Engineer Incharge.

a) Using 600mm x 600mm x minimum 8.50mm thk.with matt finish Sqm 127.00

b) Using 900mm x 900mm x minimum 11.50mm thk.with matt finish Sqm 127.00

c) Using 600mm x 600mm x minimum 8.50mm thk.with glossy finish Sqm 127.00

d) Using 900mm x 900mm x minimum 11.50mm thk.with glossy finish Sqm 127.00

FL5

FL‐6

FL‐8


PAGE 10 OF 28

ITEM NO



BMM ISPAT LIMITED

Providing and laying vitrified ceramic tiles of approved colour and design at all levels and locations using approved first quality tiles in skirtingwith or without spacers as shown in the drawing, laid using approved tile fixing adhesive and joints filled with white cement mixed with matchingpigment complete with all byeworks, curing etc. at all leads and lifts and as per specification / instructions of the Engineer Incharge.





FL‐10Providing and laying 20 mm thick polished granite slabs with bull nosing and partly flamed, making curvature of all exposed edges andtheir due polishing, over 20 mm thick 1:3 CM backing for treads of staircase and entrance steps etc. at all leads and lifts, complete asper drawings, specifications and directions of Engineer Incharge.

SQM 41.00

FL‐11Supplying and laying 8mm thick polished grey granite tiles, over 12 mm thick 1:3 CM backing for risers of steps and skirting ofstaircase and entrance steps etc. complete as per drawings and directions of Consultant.

SQM 11.00

Providing & laying/fixing in position 2.40m x 1.20m x 30 mm thick machine polished granite slabs of approved colour & qualityincluding machine/handcut, polishing, buffing the edges all in line, level, laid over 20mm thk. cement mortar 1:3 bedding and afloating coat of cement @4.39 Kg/sqm with best workmanship, finishing, curing, complete in flooring at all leads and lifts including allbyeworks like covering with plaster of paris, curing etc. as per drawings, specifications and instructions of the Engineer Incharge.

a) Black shade. Sqm 50.00

b) Other shades. Sqm 50.00

SECTION TOTAL ‐ FL

FL‐12

FL‐9


PAGE 11 OF 28

ITEM NO



BMM ISPAT LIMITED

SECTION ‐ WW ‐ WOOD WORK

Supplying and fixing exterior grade block board flush board shutters bonded with phenol formaldehyde hot pressed (solid core)including non standard size, single or double hung in doors, wardrobes, cupboards, conforming to IS 2202 specification from approvedmanufacturer with all bye works complete as per specification and drawing, at all locations with necessary sand blocks, cleatswherever required but including the cost of fittings & fixing. The shutters shall be supplied with teakwood internal edge lipping fromfactory and 6mm external edge lipping shall be provided at site

a) both faces teak veneered , 35 mm thick (including 4 heavy duty brass hinges with necessary screws & 6 levers godrej mortise deadlock with grip handle)

SQM 31.00

Providing & fixing colour coated aluminium hardware fittings with approved quality and shade as per IS specifications/as approved byConsultant to woodwork with cadmium plated MS screws, suitable sockets in masonry/concrete surface if required including all bye‐works complete as per specification, drawing and instruction of Consultants (fittings shall not be paid separately in composite itemswhich specify inclusions of fittings)

a) Butt hinges (extruded section 125 mm x 63 mm x 4 mm) Nos 41.00

b) Tower bolts (with barrel & bolts of extruded section ‐

(i) 250 mm x 12 mm (bolt size) Nos 31.00

(ii) 150 mm x 10 mm Nos 31.00

c) Sliding door bolts including locking arrangement (aldrop) Nos 16.00

(I) 250 mm long x 20 mm dia rod Nos 26.00

d) Grip handle without back plate of approved IS brand

(i) 150 mm long Nos 6.00

(ii) 100 mm long Nos 21.00

e) floor stopper of double type for door shutters up to 40 mm thick

(I) rubber ‐ double type Nos 4.00

Providing & fixing Godrej Mortise dead lock with back plate, duplicate keys & other fixtures complete with all bye‐works as perspecification and instruction of the Consultant

a) with 2 levers (depth 65 mm) Nos 16.00

b) with 6 levers (depth 76 mm) Nos 16.00

SECTION TOTAL ‐ WW

WW‐1

WW‐2

WW‐3


PAGE 12 OF 28

ITEM NO



BMM ISPAT LIMITED

SECTION ‐ ST ‐ STEEL & IRON WORK

Supplying and fixing pressed steel framesmanufactured from commercial steel sheet 1.6mm thick and butt welded at the corners, fordoor frames including SS hinges (KICH make as shown in drawings), lock jambs, beads, brace ties, adjustable lugs jammed in PCCblocks 1:2:4 , lock strike plate, shock absorbers, including two coats of synthetic anti corrosive enamel‐ Eco friendly paint with lowvolatile organic compounds ( limit not exceeding 250g/ )over a coat of primer consisting of volatile organic compounds less than250g/L, filling the frame with cement mortar 1:5 all complete at all heights and levels as per IS 4351 and drawings, specifications andinstruction of the Engineer Incharge. SS hinges shall be paid for under relevant item.

a) 105mm (Profile ‐ A) RM 30.00b) 125mm (Profile ‐ B) RM 50.00

ST‐2

Supplying, fabricating and fixing fully glazed MS windows and ventilators made of pre painted, colled rolled steel of 0.6 mm thickneessconforming to IS 513 of approved make in single or composite units both openable and fixed type as approved drawings, galvanisedon sides at 120 gm / sqm zinc coating primer of 5 microns with thermo setting expoxy resin and finish painted with a polyster basedpaint 20 microns thick. The size of profiles is 46 x46 mm approximate for internal frames, 46 x 52 mm approximate for externalframes, 46 x 70 mm for mullion / transoms for ourter frame, 18 x 31 mm for fixed frames., fixing of 4 mm float glass with EPDMgaskets with hinges, handle, corner brackets, peg stays, etc. complete including fixing to the walls/ sills/ columns/ lintels as may berequired with necessary grouting of hold fasts.

SQM 102.00

Providing & fixing in position steel Rolling Shutters of approved make conforming to IS 6248, made from M.S. Laths (80 mm wide and1.25mm thick) including all necessary fixtures, fittings, top hood, guide channels, shutters suspension shaft with tested springs,ceiling strips, locking arrangements, & painting with a coat of approved steel primer including fixing the guides in masonry/concretewith PCC 1:2:4 etc. or with necessary coach screws, nuts, bolts etc. making good the masonry/concrete complete generally, at allheights and levels, as per drawings, specifications and the instructions of the Engineer Incharge. Note: The measurement for Rollingshutters will be as per structural openings. Hood etc. will not be measured separately. Fabrication drawing for rolling shutters shall beprepared and got approved before taking up fabrication work.

a) Pull and Push type, hand operated Sqm 50.00

b) Gear type operated Sqm 40.00

c) Electrically operated type Sqm 30.00

ST‐3

ST‐1


PAGE 13 OF 28

ITEM NO



BMM ISPAT LIMITED

ST‐4 Providing & fixing Ball Bearing of approved make for pull & push rolling shutters. Each 10.00

ST‐5 Extra for providing grills in rolling shutters in lieu of MS laths.Sqm of grill

60.00

ST‐6 Extra for providing wicket gate in rolling shutters in lieu of MS laths.Sqm of grill

44.00

ST‐7

Supplying, fabricating and fixing MS doors made of pre painted, colled rolled steel profiled sheets of 1.6mm thickness conforming to IS513 and frames made of 0.6 mm deep drawing quality, galvanised on sides at 120 gm / sqm zinc coating primer of 5 microns withthermo setting expoxy resin and finish painted with a polyster based paint 20 microns thick. The size of profiles is 46 x46 mm(approximate) for internal frames, 46 x 52 mm (approximate) for external frames, 23 x 130 mm for middle and bottom jams of internalshutter frame, fixing of 5 mm float glass viewing window of 0.05 sqm with EPDM gaskets, the door shutters shall be fixed to the framewith four hinges , handle, corner brackets, locks, aldoprs, tower bolts etc. complete including fixing to the walls/ columns/ lintels asmay be the case with necessary grouting of hold fasts.

KGS 153.00

ST‐8

Supplying, transportation, Fabricating and fixing structural steel conforming to IS 2062, including all stiffeners, cleats, gussets, etc.,straightening if required, cutting to required length, drilling, welding, providing one shop coat of red oxide zinc chromate primerbefore erection, assembly, bolting and /or welding of joints, machining of joints when necessary, grinding, etc., a touchup coat aftererection, and another coat of red oxide zinc chromate primer plus two coats of synthetic enamel paint as per specification, drawings,and as directed by Consultant at all levels, for all light structural works such as hand rails, chequerred plates, cat ladders, platforms,etc., involving rolled steel sections, tubes, etc., complete

KGS 2033.00

ST‐9

Structural steel in door, window, ventilator, louvres, cover frames using M.S. angles, flats, channels etc. of required sizes, includingcutting, fabrication, welding, erecting & fixing in position with necessary M.S. holdfasts, embedding in concrete, painting all steel workwith a coat of approved steel primer etc. complete at all heights and levels, as per drawings, specifications and instructions of theEngineer Incharge. (M.S. hold fasts will not be measured separetely for payment).

KGS 375.00

SECTION TOTAL ‐ ST


PAGE 14 OF 28

ITEM NO



BMM ISPAT LIMITED

SECTION AL ‐ ALUMINIUM WORK

Supplying and fixing in position colour anodised aluminium glazed window with sliding shutters with or without fixed glazing, usingthree track bottom section of size 92 x 45.5 x 1.5 mm (or nearest size) with water drainage cavity and matching sections for side, topand intermediate frames section and 40 x 27.7 x 1.10 m interlock section for shutter. The shutter should be mounted on nylon rollerswith approved quality fixtures such as aluminium handle, tower bolts, etc., providing 4.0 mm thick plain or pinheaded glass for shutterfitted with EPDM gasket. All aluminium sections shall be anodised minimum 15 microns and fabricated by reputed firm by cutting torequired length., joints mitered sub‐idviding the frame tenoned and reveled in the assembled frame to be stiffened with end clips,corner angles, etc., fixed to the wall, lintel, floor beam as the case may be with necessary stool screws, rawl plugs and teak woodguttas etc., including cutting masonry/ concrete and making good to the original surface using cement mortar.

All aluminium sections shall be coated with greasy material for non adhesion of mortar or any sticky material. The coating shall becleaned after installation with all lead and lift, all complete as per specifications and drawings and directions of the Consultant. Thefabrication drawing shall be got approved by Consultant. The rate shall also include giving a coat of bitumastic paint on the aluminiumsurfaces in contact with masonry / concrete and closing the gaps around the frame and the adjoining surface with approved siliconesealant on both faces to achieve watertightness.

SQM 153.00

Al‐2

Supplying and fixing in position colour anodised aluminium glazed ventilators/ windows with top hung shutters and with or withoutfixed glazing made of approved aluminium extruded sections sections. The shutter shall be provided with approved quality fixturessuch as aluminium handle, tower bolts, eye and hook etc., providing 4.0 mm thick plain glass for shutter fitted with glazing clips. Allaluminium sections shall be anodised minimum 15 microns and fabricated by reputed firm by cutting to required length., jointsmitered sub‐idviding the frame tenoned and reveled in the assembled frame to be stiffened with end clips, corner angles, etc., fixed tothe wall, lintel, floor beam as the case may be with necessary stool screws, rawl plugs and teak wood guttas etc., including cuttingmasonry/ concrete and making good to the original surface using cement mortar. All aluminium sections shall be coated with greasymaterial for non adhesion of mortar or any sticky material. The coating shall be cleaned after installation with all lead and lift, allcomplete as per specifications and drawings and directions of the Consultant. The fabrication drawing shall be got approved by Consul

SQM 21.00

AL1


PAGE 15 OF 28

ITEM NO



BMM ISPAT LIMITED

Supplying and fixing colour anodised aluminium glazed door with standard aluminium "INDAL" / JINDAL / HINDALCO extruded frame(size 101.5mmx44.5x2.5mm) and standard "INDAL" /JINDAL/HINDALCO shutters with 5.50mm thick sheet glass of approved qualityfixed with standard glazing bead inside and outside including all fittings such as handles, 6 lever lock, bolts,2mm thick rubber gasketsaround, etc., as per specifications, drawings and directions of the Consultant. The measurement for payments shall be for the fullopening including frames. The payment for floor spring shall be made under relevant item:

a) Single shutter SQM 16.00

b) Double shutter SQM 11.00

Supplying and fixing heavy duty floor spring of approved make (Everite or equivalent)

a) Single action Nos. 6.00

b) Double action Nos. 6.00

Supplying and fixing colour anodised aluminium partition of following type with INDAL / JINDAL / HINDALCO standard extrudedanodised aluminium section as per drawing with 101.5 x 44.5 x 2.5mm standard colour anodised aluminium frames, firmly secured toRCC slab above with TW infills. Partitions shall be provided with glazed aluminium doors wherever shown in drgs. which will bemeasured and paid separately. (payment shall be made for net area of partition excluding area of door openings). Vertical frames atapprox. 0.6m to 0.8m c/c fixed rigidly at floor & ceiling and horizontal frames at floor levels, sill levels (1 m above floor level) & lintellevel (2.1m above FFL) & ceiling level, complet including all bye works as per directions of Consultant.

a) full height partitions with 12 mm thick pre laminated board from FFL to sill level (1m ht.) & lintel level to false ceiling level & glazedpanel with 5mm thick float glass from sill level to lintel level

SQM 31.00

SECTION TOTAL ‐ AL

AL‐3

AL‐4

AL‐5


PAGE 16 OF 28

ITEM NO



BMM ISPAT LIMITED

SECTION ‐SW ‐ SANITARY & WATER SUPPLY

Supplying, fitting and fixing white glazed vitreous china wash basin of superior quality (HSW No. 10.007 or approved equivalent makewith ISI mark of nearest size) having single or double holes with 15 mm CP brass piller tap, CP brass chain and plugs, 32mm CP brasswaste coupling, PVC flexible waste pipe, 15mm PVC inlet water pipe connection, MS angle brackets painted with anti corrosive paint,15 mm CP brass angle cock, etc. all complete bye works as per specifications and direction of Consultant.

a) size 510 mm x 400 mm Nos. 6.00

SW‐2

Supplying, fitting and fixing white glazed vitreous china oval shaped wash basin of size 550 mm x 400 mm, without tap holes (HSWNo. 10.016 or approved equivalent make with ISI mark of nearest size) with 15 mm CP brass pillar cock long necked foam flow, 32mmCP brass waste coupling, PVC flexible waste pipe, 15mm PVC inlet water pipe connection, MS angle brackets painted with anticorrosive paint, 15 mm CP brass angle cock, etc. all complete bye works as per specifications and direction of Consultant.

Nos. 6.00

SW‐3

Supplying and fixing vitreous china white glazed Indian type water closet of superior quality 580mm size Orissa pan (HSW No. 20.004or approved equivalent make with ISI mark) with 'P' or 'S' trap, vent hole, with low level PVC cistern of 10 liters capacity (Slimline orequivalent), siphon & standard flush fittings, PVC connecting flush pipe 32mm dia, 15mm CP brass angle cock, 15mm dia flexible PVCinlet water connection etc. all complete.

Nos. 6.00

SW‐4

Supplying and fixing white glazed vitreous china European water closet (EWC) of superior quality 40cm high (HSW No. 20.007 orapproved equivalent make with ISI mark), double trap syphonic pattern, 'P' or 'S' trap, with low level cistern of 10 liters capacity (Slimline or equivalent with syphon and standard flush fittings, white colour solid plastic seat cover & lid of superior approved quality, CPbrass bar hinges, screws, bolts, rubber, buffers 15mm dia PVC inlet pipe connection and CP brass angle cock, fixing EWC to floor withnecessary teak wood block & brass screws, all complete as per drawings, specifications and directions of the Consultant.

Nos 6.00

SW‐5

Supplying and fixing white glazed vitreous china flat back, front lipped standing urinal size 610x400x380mm of superior quality HSWNo. 60.002 or equivalent approved make with ISI mark,with 10 liter capacity high level flushing cistern, 15 mm PVC flfexible inletconnection, 15mm CP brass angle cock, 15mm dia CP brass spreaders connceted to matching connecting pipe from cistern and 32mmdia PVC waste pipe upto floor all as per directions of the Consultant (partitions excluded):

Nos 6.00

SW‐6Supplying and fixing box type half‐round white glazed channels 100mm size with dead and outlet ends of approved make, set incement mortar 1:3 and joints finished with white cement.

RM 21.00

SW‐7Supplying 5.5mm thick, 600 x 450mm size polished plate glass mirror bevelled edge, of approved make fixed to with 6mm thickasbestos sheet backing with 4 nos SS dome screws including necessary drilling of mirror, fixing to wall by means of rawl plugs, allcomplete bye works

Nos 6.00

SW‐8 Supplying and fixing 600 x 120 x 5.5mm thick plate glass shelf with CP guard rail Nos 6.00

SW‐9 Supplying and fixing vitreous china white glazed soap tray of superior quality HSW No. 40.010 or approved equivalent Nos 6.00

SW‐10 Supplying and fixing CP brass soap container (Tilting type) Nos 6.00

SW‐1


PAGE 17 OF 28

ITEM NO



BMM ISPAT LIMITED

SW‐11Supplying and fixing recessed toilet paper roll holder including roller white glazed vitreous china, HSW No. 40.025 or approvedequivalent make

Nos 6.00

SW‐12 Supplying and fixing CP brass towel rail 600mm long, 20 mm dia with CP brackets fixed to wall with SS screws and TW guttas. Nos 6.00

SW‐13Supplying and fixing 100 x 75 mm HCI floor/Nahani trap of self cleansing type with CP hinged heavy brass grating to be fixed in PCCM15C and made water tight Cement shall be supplied by the OWNER. Contractor shall exclude the cost of cement in his quoted rate...

Nos 6.00

Construction of brick masonry inspection chamber with full bricks, in CM 1:5, provided with a light duty CI covers conforming toIS:1726, 610 x 455 mm, weight not less than 52 kg, embedding the CI frame in 100 mm thick RCC top slab, neatly finished including12mm thick plastering on both faces in CM 1:6, rounding, float coat of neat cement finish on the inner side, PCC bedding etc., allcomplete including excavtion and backfilling, shuttering, painting the frame and cover with two coats of approved anti corrosive paintetc., as per specifications and direction of Consultant.

a) Internal size 600x600x900mm deep Nos 6.00

b) Extra over item SW‐14 a) for additional depth of inspection chamber including providing and fixing CI rungs. RM 11.00

SW‐15Supplying yard gully trap 150x100mm with CI grating 150 x 150mm and water tight light weight CI covers conforming to IS:1726 ofsize 300x300mm including half‐brick masonry in CM (1:4) plastered neatly with CM (1:4) on both faces, 100mm thick PCC bed of markM‐10C, necessary excavation, complete as per direction of the Consultant.

Nos 6.00

SW‐16

Supplying and laying 50mm dia Polypropylene Random Copolymer pipes suitable for both hot and cold water supply, jointing withsockets using solvent cement as per IS 15801 / 7634 Part 3 ‐ 2003 of maximum thickness with all necessary fittings such as bends,tees, elbows, reducers, unions, nipples, plugs etc., laid below ground including excavation in soil, removal of sharp objects / stonesetc., testing for water tightness, anchoring, if required, with concrete anchor blocks of 1:2:2 proportion over a wrap of rubber /foamed polythene sheet, backfilling with suitably good soil in layers of 75mm, watering, compacting, placing of marker plates to showlocation etc. complete as per specification and direction of the Engineer Incharge.

RM 50.00

Supplying and laying Polypropylene Random Copolymer pipes suitable for both hot and cold water supply, jointing with socketsusing solvent cement as per IS 15801 / IS 7634 Part 3 ‐ 2003 of maximum thickness, with all necessary fittings such as bends, tees,elbows, reducers, unions, nipples, plugs, clamps, fixtures, etc., laid over ground including chasing and concealing in walls/floors withstraps / clamps over compressible material such as rubber / foamed polyethylene, testing for water tightness complete as perspecification and direction of the Engineer Incharge.

a) 50 mm nominal bore RM 30.00b) 40 mm nominal bore RM 250.00c) 32 mm nominal bore RM 150.00d) 25 mm nominal bore RM 100.00e) 20 mm nominal bore RM 75.00

SW‐17

SW‐14


PAGE 18 OF 28

ITEM NO



BMM ISPAT LIMITED

f) 16 mm nominal bore RM 50.00

Supplying of UPVC pipes for rain water system (Type‐A pipes) , soil and waste discharge system (Type‐B pipes) of maximumthickness in accordance to IS 13592 and laying below ground including jointing with sockets using solvent cement in accordance to IS7634 Part 3 ‐ 2003, with all necessary fittings such as bends, tees, elbows, reducers, unions, nipples, plugs etc., inclusive of excavationin soil, removal of sharp objects / stones etc., testing for water tightness, anchoring, if required, with concrete anchor blocks of 1:2:2proportion over a wrap of rubber / foamed polythene sheet, backfilling with suitably good soil in layers of 75mm, watering,compacting, placing of marker plates to show location etc. complete as per specification and direction of the Engineer Incharge.

a) Type A Pipes ‐ 160mm dia RM 35.00b) Type B pipes ‐ 160mm dia RM 250.00

Supplying and laying UPVC pipes for rain water system (Type‐A pipes) , soil and waste discharge system (Type‐B pipes) of maximumthickness, capable of withstanding 6 Kg/sqm of pressure, jointing with sockets using solvent cement as per IS 13592 / IS 7634 Part 3 ‐2003, with all necessary fittings such as bends, tees, elbows, reducers, unions, nipples, plugs etc., laid over ground on walls/floorswith straps / clamps over compressible material such as rubber / foamed polyethylene, testing for water tightness complete as perspecification and direction of the Engineer Incharge.

a) Type A Pipes ‐ 75mm dia RM 450.00b) Type A Pipes ‐ 110mm dia RM 550.00c) Type B pipes ‐ 110mm dia RM 300.00

Supplying, fitting and fixing superior quality gun metal gate valve (full way) of "LEADER" make or equivalent with ISI mark

a) 40 mm dia Nos 4.00

b) 32mm dia Nos 4.00

c) 25mm dia Nos 4.00

SW‐20 Supplying and fitting 15mm dia CP brass bib cock of superior quality of approved make with ISI mark Nos 4.00

SW‐21 Providing and fitting long body CP brass 15 mm bib tap of superior quality with ISI mark Nos 4.00

SW‐22 Supplying and fixing in position Three pronged CP brass robe hooks in toilets/ bath rooms with necessary brass screws, etc. NOS 6.00

SW‐23Supplying and fixing 20 mm thick pre polished marble dividers in between two urinal stalls with all exposedv edges bull nosed, fixingto the wall. Rates shall include cutting of wall tiles and dado, grout the divider into the wall 100mm deep and making good thesurface. The exposed area will 900 mm x 450 mm (width).

NOS 5.00

Supplying ,laying and commissioning IHP septic tanks of 2.5m long from indian hume pipe Co. or equivalent below ground level withmanhole covers,scum boards, vents,inlet,outlet connections made of high quality concrete including all bye works complete

a) 1100 dia. NOS 4.00

SW‐18

SW‐24

SW‐19

SW‐20


PAGE 19 OF 28

ITEM NO



BMM ISPAT LIMITED

SW‐25

Construction of 230 thk.brick masonry circular soak pit of 1.0m inside diameter with full bricks, in CM 1:5, provided with RCC 100thk.precast cover slab neatly finished including 12mm thick plastering on both faces in CM 1:6, rounding, float coat of neat cementfinish on the inner side, PCC bedding etc., all complete including excavtion and backfilling, shuttering, painting the frame and coverwith two coats of approved anti corrosive paint etc., as per specifications and direction of Consultant.

NOS 4.00

Construction of brick masonry circular type manhole with bricks of designation 5.0, in CM 1:4, side cement plaster 12mm thick incement mortar 1:3 (1 cement : 3 coarse sand) mixed with water proofing compound at 0.2% of weight of cement, finished with afloating coat of neat cement, foundation concrete 1:3:6 mix (1 cement : 3 coarse sand : 6 graded stone aggregate 40mm nominl size),and necessary channel in cement concrete 1:2:4 (1 cement : 2 coarse sand : 4 graded stone aggregate 20mm nominal size) finishedwith a floating coat of neat cement all complete as per standard design, as per IS 4111 at all leads and lifts as per drawings,specifications and instructions of the Engineer Incharge.

a) 900mm dia manhole for depths upto and including 1650mm from GL. Nos. 6.00

b) 1200mm dia manhole for depths from 1650mm upto and including 2250mm. Nos. 11.00

c) 1500mm dia manhole for depths from 2250mm upto and including 3000mm. Nos. 2.00

d) 1500mm dia manhole for depths from 3000mm upto and including 5000mm. Nos. 2.00

e) 1500mm dia manhole for depths from 5000mm upto and including 9000mm. Nos. 2.00

SW‐26


PAGE 20 OF 28

ITEM NO



BMM ISPAT LIMITED

Supplying and fixing CI manhole covers and frames conforming to IS 1726 including coating with material having base as blackbituminous material, locking devices, key holes, keys and lifting devices etc. and all byeworks as per specification and instructions ofthe Engineer Incharge.

a) Medium duty ‐ MD10 ‐ Circular shape 500mm dia Nos. 6.00

b) Heavy duty ‐ HD20 ‐ Circular shape 600mm dia Nos. 13.00

Providing and fixing brass ball valve with high pressure copper floats (horizontal plunger type) conforming to IS 1703 of the followingnominal bore along with necessary socket, backnut, reducers etc. complete with all byeworks at all leads and lifts as per drawings,specifications and instructions of the Engineer Incharge.

a) 32mm Nos. 6.00

b) 25mm Nos. 12.00

Providing and fixing sand cast iron fittings and accessories for soil and waste pipe conforming to IS 1729 including lead caulked jointsas per IS 3114, painting two coats of anticorrosive bitumastic black paint, both internally and externally complete at all leads and liftsas per drawings, specifications and instructions of the Engineer Incharge.

a) Floor trap with SS grating

1) 75mm dia of weight not less than 4.8 Kgs Nos 56.00


SECTION TOTAL ‐ SW

SW‐28

SW-29

SW‐27


PAGE 21 OF 28

ITEM NO



BMM ISPAT LIMITED

SECTION ‐ RD ‐ ROAD WORKS

RD‐1

Earth work in box cutting for roads in all kinds of soils excluding boulder studded soil/ rock requiring blasting or chiseling for formationof subgrade in cutting to required camber, gradient, including rolling, compaction and dressing up the surface, breaking clods,removal of slush and water, transporting and depositing or stacking unserviceable earth, etc. elsewhere within the plant site/projectarea as directed by Consultant for all heights etc., complete as per specification.

CUM 9657.00

RD‐2

Filling with approved murrum / gravel brought from outside sources & filling in layers not exceeding 150 mm thick including breakingclods, watering, rolling each layer with power roller of minimum 8 tonnes capacity to attain atleast 95% of the proctor density,dressing the sides & top to the required profile & grade etc. complete as per specifications, drawings and instructions of the EngineerIncharge.

CUM 10299.00

RD‐3Supplying 50 mm I.R.C. hard trap stone metal in stacks at site of work for premeasurement complete as per specifications anddirections of the Engineer Incharge.

CUM 1190.00

Forming WATER BOUND MACADAM including preparing the sub‐grade, spreading 50 mm graded metal in layers, blinding the surfacewith grit or murrum ,watering, compacting by power roller to proper camber and gradient including dry and wet rolling etc. completeas per specifications and directions of the Engineer Incharge.

a) 75 mm consolidated thickness in one layer as WBM 1st layer SQM 7928.00

b) 75mm consolidated thickness in second layer after necessary picking etc. SQM 7928.00

RD‐5supplying & laying 75 mm thick water bound macadam using 50 mm to 40 mm size quality metal, laid to proper camber and gradientwith templates, filling voids with approved quality moorum, dry and wet rolling wit 8 to 10 T roller, all as per specifications andirections of Consultant.

SQM 7420.00

RD‐6

Providing and laying 50mm premix carpet (hot process) using paving bitumen grade 60 / 70 @ not less than 3.5 % by weight of totalmix and aggregates as specified in the specifications including laying , rolling etc. over a tack coat at the rate of 7.50 Kgs / 10sqm usingmechanical pressure sprayer including cleaning of WBM surface prior to the application, all complete as per specifications anddirection of the Engineer Incharge.

SQM 7420.00

RD‐7Providing and laying 12mm thick premix sand seal coat using aggregate as per standard code of practice, bitumen of grade 60 / 70 ,notless than 7.0% by weight of total mix, including laying, rolling etc. complete including applying a coat of bitumen 60 / 70 grade over

the surface grade at the rate of 1.47 kg./m2 and and final consolidation with 8 to 10 ton power roller etc. complete. SQM 7420.00

RD‐4


PAGE 22 OF 28

ITEM NO



BMM ISPAT LIMITED

Supplying and fixing precast kerb stones made of PCC grade M15 using 20 mm down graded aggregate, properly cured, of thefollowing sizes, including making necessary casting yard, form work, machine mixing, compacting, finishing, submerged curing,conveying from casting yard to site of placing and fixing in position to correct line, level and curve, plumb over 20mm thick bedding inCM 1:6, jointing and pointing in CM 1:4 wherever required, painting with 2 coats of Yellow/ Black approved quality enamel paint forexposed surfaces, etc., all complete as directed. (The rate shall include the cost of excavation and backfilling for fixing kerb stones).

a) 555mm x 150mm x 450 mm NOS 1424.00

RD‐9

Earth work in forming embankment for roads for formation of subgrade to the full width of the road including slopes and cutting torequired camber, gradient, including rolling with 8 to 10t power roller compaction to get 95% proctor density and dressing up thesurface, breaking clods, removal of slush and water,removal of surplus earth after formation, transporting, etc.with selected andapproved earth with optimum water content and in 200mm layers complete as per drawings and specifications and directed by theconsultant.

CUM 5083.00

RD‐10

Construction of granular sub base by providing, laying, spreading and compacting of coarse graded material of grading 1 (minimumCBR value of 30%)spreading in uniform layers with motor grader on prepared surface, mixing by mix in place method with rotavator atOMC, and compacting with vibratory rollers 8 ‐ 10 tonne to achieve the desired density of 98% including protection of edges of GSBlayer, cost of all materials, labour, hire charges of machinery, lighting, guarding, barricading, all leads and lifts etc. complete asterdrawings/ as directed by engineer

CUM 1220.00

SECTION TOTAL ‐ RD

RD‐8


PAGE 23 OF 28

ITEM NO



BMM ISPAT LIMITED

SECTION ‐ MS ‐ MISCELLANEOUS WORKS

MS‐1

Supplying and fixing 30 mm thick (Forex or equivalent) PVC panel door of approved shade and design made out of 5 mm thick Cchannel of width 50mm to form the styles and rails the inner panel shall be of min 5mm thick which is welded/sealed to the style andrails along with 5x25mm PVC beading on all sides and both faces . The shutter frames shall have square aluminium tube of heavygauge 20x20mm on all sides complete including necessary SS hinges of 100 mm size 3 nos,SS tower bolt 100 x 10 mm dia 2 nos, asper instructions and direction of consultant. (The work to be executed by specilised agency)

SQM 11.00

MS‐2

Suppying and fixing PVC door frame of size 50x47(Forex or equivalent) mm with a wall thickness of 5mm, made out of extruded 5mmrigid foam sheet, mitre cut at two corners and jointed with 2 nos. of 150mm long brackets of 15x15mm aluminium square tube in twocorners. The two vertical door profiles are to be reinforced with 19x19mm aluminium square tube & hardwood shall be inserted in thesquare tube, EPDM rubber gasket weather seal to be provided through out the frame. The door frame shall be fixed to the wall bydrilling 100mm long stainless screws through the frame by using PVC fasteners on each side of the verticals. A minimum of 4 nos. ofscrews to be provided for each vertical member. (The work to be executed by specilised agency)

RM 31.00

Supplying and fixing SINTEX or approved PVC water tank with PVC fittings for inlet, outlet, Over flow, scour float valve, connections ofrequired size and dia. Including connections and hoisting/fixing the same tank on roof and other places at all heights with all bye‐works complete as per manufacturer's specification and direction of the Consultant. (Support of tank on brick/RCC/PCC will be paidunder relevant items)

a) 1000 litres capacity Nos 4.00

b) 500 litres capacity Nos 4.00

MS‐4

Supplying and fixing in position false ceiling with 12.5 mm thick Gypsum tiles of India gypsum, of size 595 x 595 mm , with standardand approved aluminium supporting arrangement ( Eezilock or Bestlok or equivalent) suspended from RCC slab with all accessoriessuch as screws, cleats, adjustable suspension rods, runners and Tees etc., including making suitable openings for air‐conditioning grill,light fittings, troughs etc., and painting false ceiling board with two coats of approved make and shade acrylic/ plastic emulsionpaints over and a coat of primer complete with all bye works at all locations and heights and as per drawings and manufacturersspecifications and instruction of Consultant.

SQM 407.00

MS‐5

Providing & laying/fixing in position first quality black 40 mm thick machine cut machine polished granite slab in single piece upto amaximum length of 1.80 metres laid over 20 mm thick cement mortar bedding 1:3 in support areas with best workmanship, makingcurvature of all exposed edges and their due polishing, providing necessary holes, finishing, curing etc. at all leads and lifts forplatforms in pantry etc.as per drawings, specifications and directions of Engineer Incharge.

SQM 50.00

MS‐6

Supplying and installing 4mm thk. APP modified bituminous polyester reinforced (minimum 140 gsm) water proofing membrane, UVresistant, granule surfaced, self protective, weather and heat resistant, tear and puncture resistant and flexible of approved makeincluding necessary surface preparation with all byeworks complete as per manufacturer's specifications and instructions of theEngineer Incharge. Guarantee of minimum 10 years shall be funished by the contractor.

SQM 1220.00

MS‐3


PAGE 24 OF 28

ITEM NO



BMM ISPAT LIMITED

MS‐7Supply and laying over water proofing treatment, chicken mesh of 26SWG, and then with 20 mm thick CM in 1:5 in panels of size notexceeding 1.2m x 1.2m and sealing the joints UV resistant bitumastic filler as directed by Consultant.

SQM 102.00

MS‐8Supplying and laying coarse aggregate (broken granite stone) of nominal size 40mm in the area of transformer , meter room, etc., asper drawing and as directed by Consultant.

CUM 26.00

MS‐9 Supplying & fixing approved quality hydraulic door closer conforming to IS:3564( Everite or equivqlent) as directed by Consultant Nos 6.00

Supplying & erecting in position precast concrete trench cover units of specified sizes and thickness using reinforced cement concreteof grade M30 with 20 mm down graded coarse aggregates including formwork to give fair and smooth finish, casting, vibrating usingstoring, providing lifting arrangement, loading / unloading transporting, load testing etc., complete but excluding cost ofreinforcement, all as per specification and as directed by the consultant.

a) Unit weight upto and including 150 kg CUM 11.00

MS‐11Supplying & fixing heavy duty PVC water spouts of 40 mm dia of required length, including chamfering the ends at chajjas/ parapets/sunken slab/ tank foundations etc. as per drawing and instruction of Consultant

RM 11.00

MS‐12

Supplying and fixing 400 to 550 mm high cavity floor of modular 600 x 600 approximate with pre moulded infilled access floor tilemade from steel and cementatious infill material (M/s Unitile or equivalent), with edge beading and faced with 2 mm thick antistatichigh pressure laminates. The panels shall be placed on GI snap lock grid system stringers channels supported over MS galvanisedpedestal supports of 16mm ID at 600mm c/c approximate both ways. The pedestal supports shall be rigidly fixed on to the floor withglue and mechanical fasteners and shall be made of 100 x 100 x 8 mm thick base plate and minimum 19 mm thick MS stools with acoupling and check nut for level adjustment. The work includes necessary opening for cables and panel mounting and cutting of tilesto required size and strengthening of pedestals with 300 x 300 mm RCC pedestal at locations of panels. The floor panels and stringersshall be completely removable and shall remain in position without screwing. The shade of the flooring material shall be as specifiedin the drawing or as directed by Consultant. (The cost includes supply of 1% spare tiles and pedestals, lifting tools).

SQM 305.00

Providing, fixing, lowering & laying factory made RCC spun hume pipes (Class NP2 of ISI) with necessary collars, jointing with hempyarn & cement mortar 1:1 including embedding in walls, beams, floors etc. caulking the joints, curing, finishing, aligning to properlevel etc. complete as specified at all lifts. Excavation and PCC bedding,and encasing, if specified ,shall be paid under relevant items.

a) 150 mm dia. Rm 92.00b) 300 mm dia. Rm 30.00

MS‐10

MS‐13


PAGE 25 OF 28

ITEM NO



BMM ISPAT LIMITED

Supplying and laying factory made RCC Hume pipe of NP3 class, for road crossings of the following diameters, including all incidentalslike collars & specials and jointing with CM 1:3, etc., as per drawings and directions of Consultant. Excavation and PCC bedding,aencasing if specified shall be paid under relevant items.

a) 250 mm dia RM 31.00

b) 300 mm dia RM 31.00

c) 450 mm dia RM 31.00

d) 600 mm dia RM 31.00

Supplying & laying water‐proofing system to reinforced concrete structures at all locations, depths and heights consisting of two coatsof approved acrylic polymer modified cementitious material over rendered blinding surface below base raft and over renderedexternal wall and roof surfaces in contact with soil placing of 15mm dia MS nozzles of suitable length all over the inside surfaces ofraft/wall/roof slab and all construction joints at regular intervals not exceeding 1.5m c/c, mixing approved super plasticizer cumcement water proofer during concreting and finally pressure injecting non‐shrink polymeric water‐proof grouting compond admixedwith cement milk throuth the nozzles and sealing the nozzles with approvd sealant after grouting all compleate with all bye‐works asrequired so as to make the structure water tight.(Manaufacturers specification shall be followed depending on approved materialsused and measurements shall be made on inside surface dimensions only and no separate payment will be made for rendering.)

a) For base slab raft SQM 885.00

b) For walls and slab other than base raft SQM 2552.00

MS‐15

MS‐14


PAGE 26 OF 28

ITEM NO



BMM ISPAT LIMITED

MS‐16

Designing, providing,installing and operating well point dewatering system consisting of borewells along the periphery of the facilityfor deep excavations of wagon tippler, tunnels / underground basements including design of the system based on permeability tests,for depths of excavation upto 9.5 m from the existing ground levels, for continuous operation of the system to keep the surface areaof the excavated portion dry and workable for a depth of 500 mm, including drilling of the wells at required spacing and insertion ofperforated pipes, filter media, connecting the pipes to headers and continuous pumping using pumps of appropriate capacities, forduration as direted by the consultant, including all bye works such as providing discharge pipes, channels to the drains, provision ofstandby arrangements for the pumps, cost of diesel, lubricants including necessary permiability test, etc (Payment will be made forthe theoretical area of excavation considering the largest possible dimensions of bed concrete. 10% of the cost to be paid oninstallation and completion of testing, 40% on completion of bed concrete and balance 50% on co

SQM 1281.00

MS‐17Supplying and laying rubble hard stones tightly held back for pitching,filling the joints with CM 1 :5 at all locations with stone size ofnot less than 200mm,including necessary dressing, cutting up to 300mm of top surface and disposal of unserviceable siol etc., within alead of 5 km and levelling complete with all bye‐works as per drawings and direction of Engineer.

CUM 1525.00

Installation of electrical concealed conduits (GI/ PVC) of the following sizes, including bends, clamps, junction boxes, pull boxesincluding pullling of GI wire/ Fish wire in RCC slabs, RCC walls,wall crossings, floors, etc.

a) 32mm dia RM 509.00

b) 25 mm dia RM 1017.00

c) 20 mm dia RM 509.00

Installation of electrical conduits GI under floors, entrance ramps of the following sizes, including bending, threading the ends andplugging.

a) 100mm dia RM 1525.00

b) 80 mm dia RM 2033.00

MS‐19

MS‐18


PAGE 27 OF 28

ITEM NO



BMM ISPAT LIMITED

MS‐20

Providing and applying waterproofing treatment in sunken floors and vertical surfaces of toilets and bathrooms etc. with twocomponent acrylic polymer based flexible cementitious coating of heavy duty flexible coating system with excellent waterproofingusing products of approved make. 10mm Cement/Sand (Ratio 1:4) protective screed, using Integral Waterproofing Compound addedas per manufacturer's specifications, shall be applied on top of the membrane. All works shall be carried out as per specifications andmanufacturer's instructions including all byeworks and at all heights and levels and also as per the directions of the Engineer Incharge.

Sqm 1960.00

Providing cinder fill for filling in the depression of toilets, bath room etc., as per the specifications of specialised waterproofingagencies & finishing the surface even, so as to be suitable to receive the tiles etc at all heights and levels as per specifications andinstructions of the Engineer Incharge.

Cum 780.00

Note :

The measurement shall be on cum basis. No deductions shall be made for the areas occupied by pans & other fittings & fixtures.

MS‐22Providing & fixing 25mm thick PREMOULDED BITUMINOUS FILLER ('Shalitex or other approved manufacture) for expansion jointsincluding painting concrete surface with primer as per specifications, cutting, positioning, supporting, scaffolding & filling withapproved sealing compound etc. complete at all heights and levels as per specifications and instructions of the Engineer Incharge.

Sqm 350.00

MS‐23Providing & applying polysulphide compound in 'V' grooves of sixe 20mm x 10 mm deep complete at all heights and levels as perspecifications and instructions of the Engineer Incharge.

Rm 100.00

MS‐24

Providing & fixing in position 1mm thick stainless steel (SS 304 grade) flats / angles / tees (of required size) of approved make forcovering the expansion joints in walls, floors, ceiling & columns etc. including drilling slotted holes on both sides, chasing the surfaceswherever required, fixing with wooden gutties, rawl plugs & C.P. brass screws, making good the surface etc. complete at all heightsand levels as per specifications and instructions of the Engineer Incharge.

Kgs 335.00

MS‐25

Providing and placing in position suitable PVC water stops conforming to IS 12200 : 2001 of approved manufacturer, for constructionjoints between two RCC members and fixed to the reinforcement with binding wire before pouring concrete, fusion jointing etc.complete at all leads and lifts. The water stop shall be serrated (minimum 225mm wide, 10mm thick) with central bulb of outer dia25mm).

Rm 1750.00

SECTION TOTAL ‐ MSTOTAL(EW+AT+CC+MN+FN+FL+WW+ST+AL+SW+RW+MS)

MS‐21


PAGE 28 OF 28

ITEM NO


SECTION ‐ EW ‐ EARTHWORK

Earthwork in excavation and backfilling in layer of 30 cm for Foundations of buildings, pipe supports, equipments, tunnels, trenches,culverts, manholes, etc., in Oridnary soils including Soft rock / Disintegrated rock, in both Dry and Wet conditions, including Pumping andBailing out Surface and Subsoil water, Shoring, Strutting, Slush removal at all heights and depths as per Drawing and Specificationswherever required , in Foundation pits and other places with excavated suitable surplus earth, including reclaiming from spoil heaps keptelsewhere including dressing and levelling,watering and mechanical compaction etc.,Transporting surplus unserviceable soil to Dumpingyards within plant site and spreading in layers as per Specifications and direction of Consultant. The Measurement for payment shall befor the Theoretical volume only i.e., the volume of the block of the excavation having maximum bottom dimension of the foundation asper Drawing and to actual depth.

( The Contractor shall take into account in his rate, the provision for excess excavation for necessary working space, slope etc., requiredfor excavation and other allied works and refilling the side slopes and working space)




Same as in item EW‐1but in hard rocks,excavation by blasting




Controlled earth filling under floors and other places with special compaction to achieve dry density of 95% standard proctor density withexcavated surplus earth including cost of excavation reclaiming from spoil heaps within plant site as per instruction of the Consultant atall heights/depths, transporting, depositing, compacting and dressing, trimming complete as desired in layers not exceeding 15 cmsincluding watering, consolidating by mechanical means as per specifications and instructions of the Consultant.

a) With available earth CUM 2500.00

BMM ISPAT LIMITED

PART ‐ B :CIVIL WORKS

EW1

EW2

EW‐3


PAGE 1 OF30

ITEM NO


BMM ISPAT LIMITED


EW‐4

Controlled earth filling in site levelling, under floors and other places with earth brought from outside sources, with special compaction toachieve dry density of 95% of standard proctor density as per instruction of the Engineer Incharge at all heights/depths (lifts),transporting, depositing, compacting and dressing, trimming complete as desired in layers not exceeding 250mm including watering,consolidating by mechanical means as per specifications and instructions of the Engineer Incharge. (Payment shall be made forconsolidated thickness only)

Cum 2500.00

EW‐5Supplying and filling approved quality sand in foundation or under floor, trenches, pits and other places, at all locations in layers of 200mm thickness including watering and ramming, all lead, lift and depth complete as per drawing and specification and direction of theConsultant

CUM 12350.00

SECTION TOTAL‐ EW

SECTION ‐ AT ‐ ANTITERMITE TREATMENT

AT‐1

Supplying and injecting with approved quality chemical emulsion at the rates and concentrations as per IS 6313‐1981 Part II forpreconstructional antitermite treatment and creating a chemical barrier under and alround the column pits, foundation, wall trenches,plinth filling, junctions of wall and floor, expansion joints, apron, surrounding of pipes, conduits etc., along the perimeter of the buildingincluding all byeworks complete as per specification and direction of Consultant(only ground floor plinth area of the building will bemeasured for the payment in the following three stages. i) 50% after completion of the foundations ii) 30% after completion of theground floor flooring iii) 20% after completion of all treatment works including ground floor doors & windows. Work to be executed byM/s Pest Control (India) or any other approved agency and specified guarantee for 10 (ten) years shall be furnished by thetenderer.Payment will be cleared only after submission of Guarantee.

SQM 1234.93

SECTION TOTAL‐ AT


PAGE 2 OF30

ITEM NO


BMM ISPAT LIMITED


SECTION ‐ CC ‐ PLAIN AND REINFORCED CONCRETE

Supplying and Laying Plain Cement Concrete of following Grades (including Shuttering if required) in all levelling courses underFoundation, Floors, Pipelines, Pits etc., at all depths complete all as per Drawings and Specifications and instruction of the Consultant.

a) M‐5 Grade Concrete, using 40 mm down graded coarse aggregate. CUM 4663.00

b) M‐7.5 Grade Concrete, using 40 mm down graded coarse aggregate. CUM 4663.00

c) M‐10 Grade Concrete, using 40 mm down graded coarse aggregate. CUM 6218.00

CC2

Supplying and laying plain cement concrete of proportion 1:2:4 at all leads and lifts, in all floors, aprons, pits, drains and other similarworks, steps, coping of compound wall etc. by mechanical mixing using graded stone aggregate 20 mm max. size and down includingmechanical mixing, transporting, consolidation, including shuttering, if required, as per specifications, drawings and instructions of theEngineer Incharge.

CUM 1600.00

Supplying & laying reinforced cement concrete flooring of thickness as mentioned in the drawing of following grades in long panels withnecessary slope using screed vibrators, etc., in floors and any other works as directed. The rates shall include the cost of necessaryshuttering (but excluding the cost of steel reinforcement) to maintain the line and level of the floor to achieve the flat and smooth surfacewithin the specified tolerance, cleaning and preparing the base surface and other necessary bye‐works, provision for construction joints,expansion joints, etc., all complete as per specification, drawings and direction of the Consultant.

a) M‐20 Grade, design mix, Concrete, using 20 mm down graded coarse aggregate. CUM 3705.00

Supplying and Laying of design mix, with minimum cement content per Cum of concrete to be not less than 320 kg) Reinforced CementConcrete of following Grades (excluding Shuttering and Reinforcement) at all depths and heights in all types of Foundations, Footings, pilecaps, equipment foundations, columns, lintels, ducts, beams, brackets, slabs, sloped roofs, walls, sills, parapets, bands and any otherworks both in under ground and Superstructures all complete as per Drawings, Specification and instruction of Consultant.

a) M‐25 Grade Design Mix Concrete, using 20 mm down graded coarse aggregate. CUM 160542.00

b) M‐30 Grade Design Mix Concrete, using 20 mm down graded coarse aggregate.(with cooling of aggregates/ use of ice for massconcreting of BF/ Stoves foundation)

CUM 12350.00

CC5Supplying and laying reinforced cement concrete grade M‐25 with stone aggregate of 20 mm and down graded (excluding shuttering andreinforcement) at all heights for super structures of silos, water tanks and chimneys of all shapes with all byeworks complete as perdrawings, specification & instruction of the consultants.

CUM 3705.00

Providing, Fixing and Stripping of Shuttering of good quality plywood or steel plate on steel frame for all types of Structures not coveredin respective items including Centering / Scaffolding, all complete as per Drawings, Specifications and directions of the Consultant.

a) For Structures at all depths and heights. SQM 740959.00CC6

CC3

CC4

CC1


PAGE 3 OF30

ITEM NO


BMM ISPAT LIMITED


b) For Structures at all depths and heights for curved shuttering. SQM 29639.00

CC7

Supplying and providing slip‐form shuttering for construction of cylindrical silos, water tank shafts, chimneys with sliding surfaces oninternal and external faces of the shaft with steel sheet form panels, with necessary widening at the bottom for ease of sliding upwards,with all necessary ribs, yoke frames, working platforms, suspended finishing platforms, hydraulic lifting jacks, pump sets, including jackingrods with all necessary accessories provided at designed centers, arrangements for verifying verticality, including arrangements forcorrection of out of plumb movement and twist or rotation in plan, elevation control mechanism, including all necessary bye‐works forprovision of inserts, openings and dowel bars as directed by engineer (Both internal and external faces shall be measured for payment.The scheme of slip‐form shuttering shall be got approved by the engineer in‐charge).

SQM 2470.00

Supplying, fabricating and fixing in position HIGH YIELD STRENGTH DEFORMED BARS ‐ TMT steel reinforcements of grade Fe 500 D at alllevels and positions, all leads and lifts including the cost of transport, straightening, cutting, bending, cranking, binding, fixing, tying inposition with two nos. of 1.6 mm dia. soft drawn annealed binding wire, welding, provision of necessary chairs and spacers, includingtying and bending dowel bars and their straightening upon deshuttering (wherever necessary) as per drawings and specifications andincluding cost of binding wire, labour, cover blocks in CM 1:2 etc., all complete for reinforced concrete as per specifications, drawings andinstructions of the Engineer Incharge. The pins,chairs and spacer bars provided will be measured for payment.

a) Reinforcement conforming to Grade Fe‐500 D of IS : 1786‐2008 ( TMT‐EQR bars from SAIL or equivalent from RINL/TATA STEEL) MT 5187.00

CC8


PAGE 4 OF30

ITEM NO


BMM ISPAT LIMITED


CC9

Suppliying,Fabricating, Fixing at all levels and positions Steel embedment/ Inserts like Anchor bolts,Plates, chequerred plates, Channels,Anchor boxes, Bolt with nuts and washers Bolt caps, GI pipe Sleeves including Threading etc., including two coats of approved qualitySynthetic enamel paint over a primer coat on the exposed Surfaces wherever necessary, complete as per Drawings, Specificationsand directions of the Consultant. Insert materials shall conform to IS:2062 ( Jigs, Templates and Fixtures will not be paid separately. )

KGS. 39518.00

CC10Supplying, Fabricating, Fixing at all levels and positions High tensile Bolt conforming to IS:1367‐1991with nuts and washers Bolt caps,including Threading etc., complete as per Drawings, Specifications and directions of the Consultant.( Jigs, Templates and Fixtures willnot be paid separately. )

KGS. 4940.00

Supplying and mixing approved water proofing admixture as per the manufacturer's specification including cost of material , complete,with all byeworks as per drawing and instruction of the Consultant.

a) Liquid water proofing compound (conplast X421 IC or equivalent) conforming to IS:2645‐1975 LITER 12350.00

Construction of Anchor holes or Anchor pockets of following Cross sections including necessary Shuttering and its removal, Cleaningand keeping it covered till Erection of bolts etc., as per Specifications, Drawings and direction of the Consultant.

a) Cross section upto and equal to 200 sqcm. RM 494.00

b) Cross section more than 200 sqcm and upto 650 sqcm RM 247.00

Supplying & Grouting ( including tamping ) for Foundations, Structures, Equipments, Base plates, Anchor holes etc., with CementConcrete of the following Grades (including Shuttering wherever necessary) at all levels and as per Drawings, Specifications and directionof the Consultant.

a) M‐30 Grade Design Mix Concrete,using 12 mm down graded coarse aggregate. CUM 62.00

CC13

CC11

CC12


PAGE 5 OF30

ITEM NO


BMM ISPAT LIMITED


CC‐14Supplying & grouting for foundations, equipment base plates, anchor bolts etc., with cement based non shrink compound such asShrinkomp of ACC or approved make including shuttering at all levels and as per drawings, specification and direction of Consultant.

CUM 13.00

CC‐15Supplying & laying roof screed with M‐15 grade concrete (12 mm down graded coarse aggregate) with smooth finish and required slope(ave.50 mm thick) includingmixing of water proof compound as per manufacturer's specification (payment for water proofing compoundwill be done under relevant item).

SQM 2470.00

CC‐16Providing and laying heat resistant concrete of grade M‐30 using basalt aggregates, basalt sand and Blast furnace slag cement, infoudations of Blastfurnace and stoves etc. as per specifications and direction of Consultant

CUM 2964.00

SECTION TOTAL ‐ CCSECTION ‐ MN ‐ STONE & BRICK MASONRY

MN1Supplying & Laying Random Rubble Masonry brought to courses with locally available stone in cement & sand mortar (1: 5) of any shapein foundations, superstructure plinths, trenches, drains etc., at all depths & height, curing, including filling of joints with CM 1:5 andracking of joints, etc. complete with all byeworks as per specification and drawings.

CUM 3705.00

MN2Supplying & Laying hollow cement concrete block work of 200 thk. (400x200x200‐D5 grade) in super structure,in cement mortar 1:5(1cement : 5 sand) including projections,pillars, parapet mantle all complete including cut work, scaffolding, curing etc.,with all bye‐worksas per specifications, drawings and directions of the Consultant.

CUM 3705.00

MN3Same as item no.MN‐2 but with 100mm thk. partition wall (400x100x200) in cement & sand mortar 1:4(1 cement : 4 sand) including RCCband 75mm thk. at every 5 courses with 2 bars of 8 mm dia.in each layer with one legged stirrup at every 300 c/c, with neccessaryshuttering for RCC band.

SQM 494.00

SECTION TOTAL ‐ MN


PAGE 6 OF30

ITEM NO


BMM ISPAT LIMITED


SECTION ‐ FN ‐PLASTERING & SURFACE FINISHES

FN1

Supplying and Laying 20 mm thick external sponge finish cement plaster 1:5 (1 cement : 5 sand) as per architectural shapes marked in thedrawings, at all depths and heights in two coats of 12mm & 8mm. 2nd coating 8mm shall be finished with sand faced plastering on facesof walls, pillars, projection, bands, cornices, fins, sills, etc., including raking out joints if any left out, necessary dabbing, curing, scaffolding,providing chicken mesh at junctions of columns, beams etc., complete at all heights as per specification and drawings, second layer withwater proofing compound (to be paid under relevant items).

SQM 7410.00

FN2Supplying & laying 12 mm thick cement plaster 1:4 (1 cement : 4 sand) smooth finish as per architectural shapes marked in the drawings,at all depths and heights in one layer on internal faces of walls, pillars, projection, bands, cornices etc., including necessary dabbing,curing, scaffolding, providing chicken mesh at junctions of columns, beams etc., complete at all heights as per specification and drawings.

SQM 12350.00

FN3Supplying and Laying 6 mm thick cement plaster 1:4 (1 cement : 4 sand) to ceiling of slabs, chajjas, bands, beams, columns, loft slabs,staircases, and any other location at all heights wherever required with all bye works dabbing, curing, scaffolding, including providingchicken mesh at junction of columns, beams,etc., complete at all heights and levels as per specification and drawings.

SQM 1235.00

FN4Supplying and Laying 12mm thick cement plaster CM 1:4 (1 cement : 4 sand) to apron, drain and any other location at all heights includingfloating coat of neat cement @ 2.2 kg/sqm wherever required with all bye‐works dabbing, curing, complete all heights and levels as perspecification and drawings and as directed by Consultant.

SQM 1482.00

FN5

Providing two coats of water based 100% acrylic exterior emulsion paint over a coat of approved primer which in turn shall be appliedover a coat of colourless biowash of approvedmake over external concrete/masonry/plastered surfaces as antifungal treatment includingprior washing of the surface with clean water, removal of dirt, debris etc. at all heights and levels, including surface preparation,scaffolding at all locations and heights with all byeworks complete as per manufacturer's specification and direction of the EngineerIncharge.

SQM 3700.00


PAGE 7 OF30

ITEM NO


BMM ISPAT LIMITED


FN6

Distempering with two coats of acrylic oil bound washable distemper over internal plastered surfaces, of approved shade & make overone coat of approved cement primer, including preparing the surfaces by applying BIRLA WHITE Wall Care Putty (Fine finish) / Gypsumwall putty from Supreme Gypsum 1.5mm thick, surface preparation, cleaning and all byeworks, filling hair cracks with putty / approvedfiller wherever required, scaffolding & cleaning, cost of all materials, labour etc. at all heights and lifts, all as per drawing, specificationsand as directed by Engineer Incharge etc. complete.

SQM 4939.73

FN7Supplying and applying waterproof cement paint of approved make and shade with textured finish in two coats at all locations over andincluding a priming coat over wall surface, etc., including preparation of surface complete with all bye works, specification and directionof the Consultant.

SQM 3700.00

FN8Supplying and applying 3coats of white wash all heights and locations with all bye works including scaffolding complete as perspecifications

SQM 7410.00

FN9Supplying & laying flush cement pointing to stone masonry on external face, in cement mortar 1:3 at all locations to a minimum depth of20 mm, complete as per specifications, drawings and directions of Consultant.

SQM 618.00

Supplying & Laying the following thickness lath plaster at all heights and locations for vertical fins, facias, bands, drops, etc., consisting ofcement‐sand plaster of proportion 1:3, including finishing the exposed faces smooth, providing of wire mesh to reinforcement bars,necessary shuttering, surface preparations, etc., all complete as per drawings and directions of the Consultant. The steel reinforcementsshall be paid for under reinforcement item.

a) 50 mm thick SQM 247.00b)75 mm thick SQM 124.00

FN‐11Supplying and painting two coats of Synthetic Enamel paint of approved colour and make over a coat of primer over new wooden/ steelwork, al all levels and heights, including preparation of surface for receiving the paint by surface scarping, rubbing, applying filler, etc.,including cost of filler, etc., complete as per specification and direction of consultant.

SQM 247.00

FN‐12Providing and applying two coats of Industrial grade hot bitumen 85/25 conforming to IS 702 over concrete surfaces including cleaning ofsurfaces of all undesirable material, cutting and removal of binding wires etc, filling voids with cement mortar 1:4 and rendering thesurface dry before application, as per specification and directions of Consultant, complete, for foundations, pedestals, pits, etc.

SQM 4940.00

FN10


PAGE 8 OF30

ITEM NO


BMM ISPAT LIMITED


FN‐13 Supplying and making 10 mm grooves in external wall plastering at the joints of beam/column and brick wall including scaffolding etc.. RM 1235.00

FN‐14Providing drip mould of size 20mm x 8mm over cement plastering of chajjas, roof projections etc. at all heights and levels in cementmortar 1:3, hacking, curing, scaffolding etc at all heights and lifts, all complete as per specifications and instructions of the EngineerIncharge.

RM 250.00

SECTION TOTAL ‐ FNSECTION ‐ FL ‐ FLOORING, PAVING & FACING

FL1

Supplying & laying hard core with hard granite stone boulders below floors and aprons including laying, packing, filling interstices withgood quality spalls, dry and wet consolidation with mechanical means, blinding with good quality moorum/ sand (cost inclusive) with allbye works complete for hard core upto 230 mm thick below floor and 115 mm thick, below apron as per specification and instruction ofthe Consultant (Consolidated thickness will be paid).

CUM 6175.00

FL2

Supplying and laying 40 mm thick grey cement concrete flooring laid in panels with a maximum panel area of 2.50 sqm. at all locationsand levels including skirting, steps, nosing, landing slab etc., consisting of plain cement concrete 1:2:4 base (under bed) 30 mm thick (1cement : 2 coarse sand : 4 stone chips 12 mm & down) and topping 10 mm thick (net after cutting) of mix 1:1:1 (1 cement : 1 mediumsand : 1 fine stone grit upto 3.0 mm size) and finished with a floating coat of neat cement 2.2 Kg of cement per Sqm of flooring, providingglass strips 4 mm thick upto 40 mm deep, complete with all bye works as per specification, drawing, (Chequerring in floor finish inclusiveif required) and as directed by the Consultant.

SQM 24699.00

Supplying and laying granolithic flooring with total thickness as given below, laid monolithically over base concrete in panels with amaximum panel area of 2.50 sqm. at all locations and heights including skirting, treads of steps, nosing, landing slab etc., with under bedconsisting of plain cement concrete 1:2:4(1cement: 2coarse sand:4stone chips, 12mm and down) and topping of mix1:1:1(1cement:1medium sand:1fine stone grit upto 3mm size), supplying and fixing 1.5mm thick aluminium strip for full depth,chequerring in floor finish inclusive if required, rounding, sloping, curing, finishing, preparation of slabs, steps, etc., all as perspecifications, drawings and directions of the Consultant.

a) 25mm thick with 19mm under‐bed and 6mm topping mixed with non‐metallic floor hardener as per manufacturer's specification andinstructions (Fosroc, Sika or equivalent)

SQM 1235.00

FL4

Providing and laying 21 mm thick grey cement skirting or dado on walls, risers of steps or in any other vertical surfaces at any locationsconsisting of 15 mm thick back coat of cement mortar 1:3 (1 cement : 3 sand) and 6 mm topping (net) with 1:1 cement stone chips mix (1cement : 1 medium sand : 1 fine stone chips 3 mm down graded) finishing with a floating coat of neat cement, in dado, etc. completewith all bye works as per specification and direction of the Consultant at all levels.

SQM 6300.00

FL3


PAGE 9 OF30

ITEM NO


BMM ISPAT LIMITED


Providing and laying anti‐skid ceramic tiles tiles conforming to IS:13754 and of approved colour at all levels and locations using approvedfirst quality tiles in flooring of toilets etc. and as shown in the drawing laid over and including minimum 35 mm bed (CM 1:3) joints filledwith white cement mixed with matching shade of pigment etc. at all leads and lifts, complete with all byeworks as per specification anddirection of Engineer Incharge

a) 300mm x 300mm x minimum 7.7mm thk. in flooring

i) Light shades Sqm 150.00

ii) Dark shades Sqm 50.00

Providing and laying ceramic tiles conforming to IS:13754 of approved colour at all levels and locations with necessary specials etc. usingapproved first quality tiles as shown in the drawing laid over and includingminimum 15 mm thk. CM 1:3) backing and tile fixing adhesivemixed to cement paste used for fixing the tiles, joints filled with white cement mixed with matching shade of pigment etc. at all leads andlifts, complete with all byeworks as per specification and direction of Engineer Incharge.

a) In dado / skirting using 300x 400 mm Tiles.i) Light shades Sqm 50.00ii) Dark shades Sqm 10.00b) Dado using 300 x 200 mm tiles (Light shade) Sqm 75.00c) In skirting using 200x 100 mm Tiles. (Light Shade) Sqm 75.00

FL‐7

Supplying and laying white glazed tiles conforming to IS 13753 (Part II) of size 200 x 100 x 6 mm in skirting / dado including providingbands of approved shade and size with 12 mm thick CM bed 1:3 as shown in the drawing and joints filled with white cement withapproved colour pigment complete with all bye works as per specifications and direction of Consultant, fixing tiles with approved fixingadhesive compounds as manufacture's specification.

SQM 371.00

FL5

FL‐6


PAGE 10 OF30

ITEM NO


BMM ISPAT LIMITED


Providing and laying vitrified ceramic tiles of approved colour and design at all levels and locations using approved first quality tiles in flooring with orwithout spacers as shown in the drawing, laid over a bedding of cement mortar bed of mix 1:4 to achieve overall flooring thickness as 40mm and abackcoat of white cement slurry and joints filled with white cement mixed with matching pigment complete with all byeworks like covering withplaster of paris, curing etc. at all leads and lifts and as per specification / instructions of the Engineer Incharge.





Providing and laying vitrified ceramic tiles of approved colour and design at all levels and locations using approved first quality tiles in skirting with orwithout spacers as shown in the drawing, laid using approved tile fixing adhesive and joints filled with white cement mixed with matching pigmentcomplete with all byeworks, curing etc. at all leads and lifts and as per specification / instructions of the Engineer Incharge.





FL‐8

FL‐9


PAGE 11 OF30

ITEM NO


BMM ISPAT LIMITED


FL‐10Providing and laying 20 mm thick polished granite slabs with bull nosing and partly flamed, making curvature of all exposed edges andtheir due polishing, over 20 mm thick 1:3 CM backing for treads of staircase and entrance steps etc. at all leads and lifts, complete as perdrawings, specifications and directions of Engineer Incharge.

SQM 99.00

FL‐11Supplying and laying 8mm thick polished grey granite tiles, over 12 mm thick 1:3 CM backing for risers of steps and skirting of staircaseand entrance steps etc. complete as per drawings and directions of Consultant.

SQM 25.00

Providing & laying/fixing in position 2.40m x 1.20m x 30 mm thick machine polished granite slabs of approved colour & quality includingmachine/handcut, polishing, buffing the edges all in line, level, laid over 20mm thk. cement mortar 1:3 bedding and a floating coat ofcement @4.39 Kg/sqm with best workmanship, finishing, curing, complete in flooring at all leads and lifts including all byeworks likecovering with plaster of paris, curing etc. as per drawings, specifications and instructions of the Engineer Incharge.

a) Black shade. Sqm 50.00

b) Other shades. Sqm 50.00

SECTION TOTAL ‐ FL

FL‐12


PAGE 12 OF30

ITEM NO


BMM ISPAT LIMITED


SECTION ‐ WW ‐ WOOD WORK

Supplying and fixing exterior grade block board flush board shutters bonded with phenol formaldehyde hot pressed (solid core) includingnon standard size, single or double hung in doors, wardrobes, cupboards, conforming to IS 2202 specification from approvedmanufacturer with all bye works complete as per specification and drawing, at all locations with necessary sand blocks, cleats whereverrequired but including the cost of fittings & fixing. The shutters shall be supplied with teakwood internal edge lipping from factory and6mm external edge lipping shall be provided at site

a) both faces teak veneered , 35 mm thick (including 4 heavy duty brass hinges with necessary screws & 6 levers godrej mortise dead lockwith grip handle)

SQM 75.00

Providing & fixing colour coated aluminium hardware fittings with approved quality and shade as per IS specifications/as approved byConsultant to woodwork with cadmium plated MS screws, suitable sockets in masonry/concrete surface if required including all bye‐works complete as per specification, drawing and instruction of Consultants (fittings shall not be paid separately in composite items whichspecify inclusions of fittings)

a) Butt hinges (extruded section 125 mm x 63 mm x 4 mm) Nos 99.00

b) Tower bolts (with barrel & bolts of extruded section ‐

(i) 250 mm x 12 mm (bolt size) Nos 75.00

(ii) 150 mm x 10 mm Nos 75.00

c) Sliding door bolts including locking arrangement (aldrop) Nos 38.00

(I) 250 mm long x 20 mm dia rod Nos 62.00

d) Grip handle without back plate of approved IS brand

(i) 150 mm long Nos 13.00

(ii) 100 mm long Nos 50.00

e) floor stopper of double type for door shutters up to 40 mm thick

(I) rubber ‐ double type Nos 8.00

Providing & fixing Godrej Mortise dead lock with back plate, duplicate keys & other fixtures complete with all bye‐works as perspecification and instruction of the Consultant

a) with 2 levers (depth 65 mm) Nos 38.00

b) with 6 levers (depth 76 mm) Nos 38.00SECTION TOTAL ‐ WW

WW‐1

WW‐2

WW‐3


PAGE 13 OF30

ITEM NO


BMM ISPAT LIMITED


SECTION ‐ ST ‐ STEEL & IRON WORK

Supplying and fixing pressed steel frames manufactured from commercial steel sheet 1.6mm thick and butt welded at the corners, fordoor frames including SS hinges (KICH make as shown in drawings), lock jambs, beads, brace ties, adjustable lugs jammed in PCC blocks1:2:4 , lock strike plate, shock absorbers, including two coats of synthetic anti corrosive enamel‐ Eco friendly paint with low volatileorganic compounds ( limit not exceeding 250g/ )over a coat of primer consisting of volatile organic compounds less than 250g/L, filling the frame with cement mortar 1:5 all complete at all heights and levels as per IS 4351 and drawings, specifications and instruction of theEngineer Incharge. SS hinges shall be paid for under relevant item.

a) 105mm (Profile ‐ A) RM 60.00b) 125mm (Profile ‐ B) RM 100.00

ST2

Supplying, fabricating and fixing fully glazed MS windows and ventilators made of pre painted, colled rolled steel of 0.6 mm thickneessconforming to IS 513 of approved make in single or composite units both openable and fixed type as approved drawings, galvanised onsides at 120 gm / sqm zinc coating primer of 5 microns with thermo setting expoxy resin and finish painted with a polyster based paint 20microns thick. The size of profiles is 46 x46 mm approximate for internal frames, 46 x 52 mm approximate for external frames, 46 x 70mm for mullion / transoms for ourter frame, 18 x 31 mm for fixed frames., fixing of 4 mm float glass with EPDM gaskets with hinges,handle, corner brackets, peg stays, etc. complete including fixing to the walls/ sills/ columns/ lintels as may be required with necessarygrouting of hold fasts.

SQM 247.00

Providing & fixing in position steel Rolling Shutters of approved make conforming to IS 6248, made from M.S. Laths (80 mm wide and1.25mm thick) including all necessary fixtures, fittings, top hood, guide channels, shutters suspension shaft with tested springs, ceilingstrips, locking arrangements, & painting with a coat of approved steel primer including fixing the guides in masonry/concrete with PCC1:2:4 etc. or with necessary coach screws, nuts, bolts etc. making good the masonry/concrete complete generally, at all heights andlevels, as per drawings, specifications and the instructions of the Engineer Incharge. Note: The measurement for Rolling shutters will be asper structural openings. Hood etc. will not be measured separately. Fabrication drawing for rolling shutters shall be prepared and gotapproved before taking up fabrication work.

a) Pull and Push type, hand operated Sqm 120.00

b) Gear type operated Sqm 75.00

c) Electrically operated type Sqm 55.00

ST‐3

ST1


PAGE 14 OF30

ITEM NO


BMM ISPAT LIMITED


ST‐4 Providing & fixing Ball Bearing of approved make for pull & push rolling shutters. Each 25.00

ST‐5 Extra for providing grills in rolling shutters in lieu of MS laths.Sqm of grill

60.00

ST‐6 Extra for providing wicket gate in rolling shutters in lieu of MS laths.Sqm of grill

44.00

ST‐7

Supplying, fabricating and fixing MS doors made of pre painted, colled rolled steel profiled sheets of 1.6 mm thickness conforming to IS513 and frames made of 0.6 mm deep drawing quality, galvanised on sides at 120 gm / sqm zinc coating primer of 5 microns with thermosetting expoxy resin and finish painted with a polyster based paint 20 microns thick. The size of profiles is 46 x46 mm (approximate) forinternal frames, 46 x 52 mm (approximate) for external frames, 23 x 130 mm for middle and bottom jams of internal shutter frame, fixingof 5 mm float glass viewing window of 0.05 sqm with EPDM gaskets, the door shutters shall be fixed to the frame with four hinges ,handle, corner brackets, locks, aldoprs, tower bolts etc. complete including fixing to the walls/ columns/ lintels as may be the case withnecessary grouting of hold fasts.

KGS 371.00

ST‐8

Supplying, transportation, Fabricating and fixing structural steel conforming to IS 2062, including all stiffeners, cleats, gussets, etc.,straightening if required, cutting to required length, drilling, welding, providing one shop coat of red oxide zinc chromate primer beforeerection, assembly, bolting and /or welding of joints, machining of joints when necessary, grinding, etc., a touchup coat after erection,and another coat of red oxide zinc chromate primer plus two coats of synthetic enamel paint as per specification, drawings, and asdirected by Consultant at all levels, for all light structural works such as hand rails, chequerred plates, cat ladders, platforms, etc.,involving rolled steel sections, tubes, etc., complete

Kg 4940.00

ST‐9

Structural steel in door, window, ventilator, louvres, cover frames using M.S. angles, flats, channels etc. of required sizes, includingcutting, fabrication, welding, erecting & fixing in position with necessary M.S. holdfasts, embedding in concrete, painting all steel workwith a coat of approved steel primer etc. complete at all heights and levels, as per drawings, specifications and instructions of theEngineer Incharge. (M.S. hold fasts will not be measured separetely for payment).

KGS 375.00

SECTION TOTAL ‐ ST


PAGE 15 OF30

ITEM NO


BMM ISPAT LIMITED


SECTION AL ‐ ALUMINIUM WORK

Supplying and fixing in position colour anodised aluminium glazed window with sliding shutters with or without fixed glazing, using threetrack bottom section of size 92 x 45.5 x 1.5 mm (or nearest size) with water drainage cavity and matching sections for side, top andintermediate frames section and 40 x 27.7 x 1.10 m interlock section for shutter. The shutter should be mounted on nylon rollers withapproved quality fixtures such as aluminium handle, tower bolts, etc., providing 4.0 mm thick plain or pinheaded glass for shutter fittedwith EPDM gasket. All aluminium sections shall be anodised minimum 15 microns and fabricated by reputed firm by cutting to requiredlength., joints mitered sub‐idviding the frame tenoned and reveled in the assembled frame to be stiffened with end clips, corner angles,etc., fixed to the wall, lintel, floor beam as the case may be with necessary stool screws, rawl plugs and teak wood guttas etc., includingcutting masonry/ concrete and making good to the original surface using cement mortar.

All aluminium sections shall be coated with greasy material for non adhesion of mortar or any sticky material. The coating shall becleaned after installation with all lead and lift, all complete as per specifications and drawings and directions of the Consultant. Thefabrication drawing shall be got approved by Consultant. The rate shall also include giving a coat of bitumastic paint on the aluminiumsurfaces in contact with masonry / concrete and closing the gaps around the frame and the adjoining surface with approved siliconesealant on both faces to achieve watertightness.

SQM 371.00

Al‐2

Supplying and fixing in position colour anodised aluminium glazed ventilators/ windows with top hung shutters and with or without fixedglazing made of approved aluminium extruded sections sections. The shutter shall be provided with approved quality fixtures such asaluminium handle, tower bolts, eye and hook etc., providing 4.0 mm thick plain glass for shutter fitted with glazing clips. All aluminiumsections shall be anodised minimum 15 microns and fabricated by reputed firm by cutting to required length., joints mitered sub‐idvidingthe frame tenoned and reveled in the assembled frame to be stiffened with end clips, corner angles, etc., fixed to the wall, lintel, floorbeam as the case may be with necessary stool screws, rawl plugs and teak wood guttas etc., including cutting masonry/ concrete andmaking good to the original surface using cement mortar. All aluminium sections shall be coated with greasy material for non adhesion ofmortar or any sticky material. The coating shall be cleaned after installation with all lead and lift, all complete as per specifications anddrawings and directions of the Consultant. The fabrication drawing shall be got approved by Consultant.

SQM 50.00

AL1


PAGE 16 OF30

ITEM NO


BMM ISPAT LIMITED


Supplying and fixing colour anodised aluminium glazed door with standard aluminium "INDAL" / JINDAL / HINDALCO extruded frame (size101.5mmx44.5x2.5mm) and standard "INDAL" /JINDAL/HINDALCO shutters with 5.50mm thick sheet glass of approved quality fixed withstandard glazing bead inside and outside including all fittings such as handles, 6 lever lock, bolts,2mm thick rubber gaskets around, etc., asper specifications, drawings and directions of the Consultant. The measurement for payments shall be for the full opening includingframes. The payment for floor spring shall be made under relevant item:

a) Single shutter SQM 38.00

b) Double shutter SQM 25.00Supplying and fixing heavy duty floor spring of approved make (Everite or equivalenta) Single action Nos. 13.00

b) Double action Nos. 13.00

Supplying and fixing colour anodised aluminium partition of following type with INDAL / JINDAL / HINDALCO standard extruded anodisedaluminium section as per drawing with 101.5 x 44.5 x 2.5mm standard colour anodised aluminium frames, firmly secured to RCC slababove with TW infills. Partitions shall be provided with glazed aluminium doors wherever shown in drgs. which will be measured and paidseparately. (payment shall be made for net area of partition excluding area of door openings). Vertical frames at approx. 0.6m to 0.8m c/cfixed rigidly at floor & ceiling and horizontal frames at floor levels, sill levels (1 m above floor level) & lintel level (2.1m above FFL) & ceilinglevel, complet including all bye works as per directions of Consultant.

a) full height partitions with 12 mm thick pre laminated board from FFL to sill level (1m ht.) & lintel level to false ceiling level & glazedpanel with 5mm thick float glass from sill level to lintel level

SQM 75.00

SECTION TOTAL ‐ AL

AL‐3

AL‐4

AL‐5


PAGE 17 OF30

ITEM NO


BMM ISPAT LIMITED


SECTION ‐SW ‐ SANITARY & WATER SUPPLY

Supplying, fitting and fixing white glazed vitreous china wash basin of superior quality (HSW No. 10.007 or approved equivalent makewith ISI mark of nearest size) having single or double holes with 15 mm CP brass piller tap, CP brass chain and plugs, 32mm CP brasswaste coupling, PVC flexible waste pipe, 15mm PVC inlet water pipe connection, MS angle brackets painted with anti corrosive paint, 15mm CP brass angle cock, etc. all complete bye works as per specifications and direction of Consultant.

a) size 510 mm x 400 mm Nos. 13.00

SW‐2

Supplying, fitting and fixing white glazed vitreous china oval shaped wash basin of size 550 mm x 400 mm, without tap holes (HSW No.10.016 or approved equivalent make with ISI mark of nearest size) with 15 mm CP brass pillar cock long necked foam flow, 32mm CPbrass waste coupling, PVC flexible waste pipe, 15mm PVC inlet water pipe connection, MS angle brackets painted with anti corrosivepaint, 15 mm CP brass angle cock, etc. all complete bye works as per specifications and direction of Consultant.

Nos. 13.00

SW‐3

Supplying and fixing vitreous china white glazed Indian type water closet of superior quality 580mm size Orissa pan (HSW No. 20.004 orapproved equivalent make with ISI mark) with 'P' or 'S' trap, vent hole, with low level PVC cistern of 10 liters capacity (Slimline orequivalent), siphon & standard flush fittings, PVC connecting flush pipe 32mm dia, 15mm CP brass angle cock, 15mm dia flexible PVC inletwater connection etc. all complete.

Nos. 13.00

SW‐4

Supplying and fixing white glazed vitreous china European water closet (EWC) of superior quality 40cm high (HSW No. 20.007 or approvedequivalent make with ISI mark), double trap syphonic pattern, 'P' or 'S' trap, with low level cistern of 10 liters capacity (Slim line orequivalent with syphon and standard flush fittings, white colour solid plastic seat cover & lid of superior approved quality, CP brass barhinges, screws, bolts, rubber, buffers 15mm dia PVC inlet pipe connection and CP brass angle cock, fixing EWC to floor with necessaryteak wood block & brass screws, all complete as per drawings, specifications and directions of the Consultant.

Nos 13.00

SW‐5

Supplying and fixing white glazed vitreous china flat back, front lipped standing urinal size 610x400x380mm of superior quality HSW No.60.002 or equivalent approved make with ISI mark,with 10 liter capacity high level flushing cistern, 15 mm PVC flfexible inlet connection,15mm CP brass angle cock, 15mm dia CP brass spreaders connceted to matching connecting pipe from cistern and 32mm dia PVC wastepipe upto floor all as per directions of the Consultant (partitions excluded):

Nos 13.00

SW‐1


PAGE 18 OF30

ITEM NO


BMM ISPAT LIMITED


SW‐6Supplying and fixing box type half‐round white glazed channels 100mm size with dead and outlet ends of approved make, set in cementmortar 1:3 and joints finished with white cement.

RM 50.00

SW‐7Supplying 5.5mm thick, 600 x 450mm size polished plate glass mirror bevelled edge, of approved make fixed to with 6mm thick asbestossheet backing with 4 nos SS dome screws including necessary drilling of mirror, fixing to wall by means of rawl plugs, all complete byeworks

Nos 13.00

SW‐8 Supplying and fixing 600 x 120 x 5.5mm thick plate glass shelf with CP guard rail Nos 13.00

SW‐9 Supplying and fixing vitreous china white glazed soap tray of superior quality HSW No. 40.010 or approved equivalen Nos 13.00SW‐10 Supplying and fixing CP brass soap container (Tilting type) Nos 13.00

SW‐11Supplying and fixing recessed toilet paper roll holder including roller white glazed vitreous china, HSW No. 40.025 or approved equivalentmake

Nos 13.00

SW‐12 Supplying and fixing CP brass towel rail 600mm long, 20 mm dia with CP brackets fixed to wall with SS screws and TW guttas. Nos 13.00

SW‐13Supplying and fixing 100 x 75 mm HCI floor/Nahani trap of self cleansing type with CP hinged heavy brass grating to be fixed in PCC M15Cand made water tight Cement shall be supplied by the OWNER. Contractor shall exclude the cost of cement in his quoted rate...

Nos 13.00

Construction of brick masonry inspection chamber with full bricks, in CM 1:5, provided with a light duty CI covers conforming to IS:1726,610 x 455 mm, weight not less than 52 kg, embedding the CI frame in 100 mm thick RCC top slab, neatly finished including 12mm thickplastering on both faces in CM 1:6, rounding, float coat of neat cement finish on the inner side, PCC bedding etc., all complete includingexcavtion and backfilling, shuttering, painting the frame and cover with two coats of approved anti corrosive paint etc., as perspecifications and direction of Consultant.

a) Internal size 600x600x900mm deep Nos 13.00

b) Extra over item SW‐14 a) for additional depth of inspection chamber including providing and fixing CI rungs. RM 25.00

SW‐15Supplying yard gully trap 150x100mm with CI grating 150 x 150mm and water tight light weight CI covers conforming to IS:1726 of size300x300mm including half‐brick masonry in CM (1:4) plastered neatly with CM (1:4) on both faces, 100mm thick PCC bed of mark M‐10C,necessary excavation, complete as per direction of the Consultant.

Nos 13.00

SW‐16

Supplying and laying 50mm dia Polypropylene Random Copolymer pipes suitable for both hot and cold water supply, jointing withsockets using solvent cement as per IS 15801 / 7634 Part 3 ‐ 2003 of maximum thickness with all necessary fittings such as bends, tees,elbows, reducers, unions, nipples, plugs etc., laid below ground including excavation in soil, removal of sharp objects / stones etc., testingfor water tightness, anchoring, if required, with concrete anchor blocks of 1:2:2 proportion over a wrap of rubber / foamed polythenesheet, backfilling with suitably good soil in layers of 75mm, watering, compacting, placing of marker plates to show location etc. completeas per specification and direction of the Engineer Incharge.

RM 50.00

SW‐14


PAGE 19 OF30

ITEM NO


BMM ISPAT LIMITED


Supplying and laying Polypropylene Random Copolymer pipes suitable for both hot and cold water supply, jointing with sockets usingsolvent cement as per IS 15801 / IS 7634 Part 3 ‐ 2003 of maximum thickness, with all necessary fittings such as bends, tees, elbows,reducers, unions, nipples, plugs, clamps, fixtures, etc., laid over ground including chasing and concealing in walls/floors with straps /clamps over compressible material such as rubber / foamed polyethylene, testing for water tightness complete as per specification anddirection of the Engineer Incharge.

a) 50 mm nominal bore RM 30.00b) 40 mm nominal bore RM 250.00c) 32 mm nominal bore RM 150.00d) 25 mm nominal bore RM 100.00e) 20 mm nominal bore RM 75.00f) 16 mm nominal bore RM 50.00

Supplying of UPVC pipes for rain water system (Type‐A pipes) , soil and waste discharge system (Type‐B pipes) of maximum thicknessin accordance to IS 13592 and laying below ground including jointing with sockets using solvent cement in accordance to IS 7634 Part 3 ‐2003, with all necessary fittings such as bends, tees, elbows, reducers, unions, nipples, plugs etc., inclusive of excavation in soil, removalof sharp objects / stones etc., testing for water tightness, anchoring, if required, with concrete anchor blocks of 1:2:2 proportion over awrap of rubber / foamed polythene sheet, backfilling with suitably good soil in layers of 75mm, watering, compacting, placing of markerplates to show location etc. complete as per specification and direction of the Engineer Incharge.

a) Type A Pipes ‐ 160mm dia RM 35.00b) Type B pipes ‐ 160mm dia RM 250.00

SW‐17

SW‐18


PAGE 20 OF30

ITEM NO


BMM ISPAT LIMITED


Supplying and laying UPVC pipes for rain water system (Type‐A pipes) , soil and waste discharge system (Type‐B pipes) of maximumthickness, capable of withstanding 6 Kg/sqm of pressure, jointing with sockets using solvent cement as per IS 13592 / IS 7634 Part 3 ‐2003, with all necessary fittings such as bends, tees, elbows, reducers, unions, nipples, plugs etc., laid over ground on walls/floors withstraps / clamps over compressible material such as rubber / foamed polyethylene, testing for water tightness complete as perspecification and direction of the Engineer Incharge.

a) Type A Pipes ‐ 75mm dia RM 450.00b) Type A Pipes ‐ 110mm dia RM 550.00c) Type B pipes ‐ 110mm dia RM 300.00

Supplying, fitting and fixing superior quality gun metal gate valve (full way) of "LEADER" make or equivalent with ISI mark

b) 40 mm dia Nos 8.00

c) 32mm dia Nos 8.00

d) 25mm dia Nos 8.00

SW‐21 Supplying and fitting 15mm dia CP brass bib cock of superior quality of approved make with ISI mark Nos 8.00

SW‐22 Providing and fitting long body CP brass 15 mm bib tap of superior quality with ISI mark Nos 8.00

SW‐23 Supplying and fixing in position Three pronged CP brass robe hooks in toilets/ bath rooms with necessary brass screws, etc. NOS 13.00

SW‐24Supplying and fixing 20 mm thick pre polished marble dividers in between two urinal stalls with all exposedv edges bull nosed, fixing tothe wall. Rates shall include cutting of wall tiles and dado, grout the divider into the wall 100mm deep and making good the surface. Theexposed area will 900 mm x 450 mm (width).

NOS 10.00

Supplying ,laying and commissioning IHP septic tanks of 2.5m long from indian hume pipe Co. or equivalent below ground level withmanhole covers,scum boards, vents,inlet,outlet connections made of high quality concrete including all bye works complete

a) 1100 dia. NOS 8.00

SW‐20

SW‐25

SW‐19


PAGE 21 OF30

ITEM NO


BMM ISPAT LIMITED


SW‐26

Construction of 230 thk.brick masonry circular soak pit of 1.0m inside diameter with full bricks, in CM 1:5, provided with RCC 100thk.precast cover slab neatly finished including 12mm thick plastering on both faces in CM 1:6, rounding, float coat of neat cement finishon the inner side, PCC bedding etc., all complete including excavtion and backfilling, shuttering, painting the frame and cover with twocoats of approved anti corrosive paint etc., as per specifications and direction of Consultant.

NOS 8.00

Construction of brick masonry circular type manhole with bricks of designation 5.0, in CM 1:4, side cement plaster 12mm thick in cementmortar 1:3 (1 cement : 3 coarse sand) mixed with water proofing compound at 0.2% of weight of cement, finishedwith a floating coat ofneat cement, foundation concrete 1:3:6 mix (1 cement : 3 coarse sand : 6 graded stone aggregate 40mm nominl size), and necessarychannel in cement concrete 1:2:4 (1 cement : 2 coarse sand : 4 graded stone aggregate 20mm nominal size) finished with a floating coatof neat cement all complete as per standard design, as per IS 4111 at all leads and lifts as per drawings, specifications and instructions ofthe Engineer Incharge.

a) 900mm dia manhole for depths upto and including 1650mm from GL. Nos. 6.00

b) 1200mm dia manhole for depths from 1650mm upto and including 2250mm. Nos. 11.00

c) 1500mm dia manhole for depths from 2250mm upto and including 3000mm. Nos. 2.00

d) 1500mm dia manhole for depths from 3000mm upto and including 5000mm. Nos. 2.00

e) 1500mm dia manhole for depths from 5000mm upto and including 9000mm. Nos. 2.00

Supplying and fixing CI manhole covers and frames conforming to IS 1726 including coating with material having base as black bituminousmaterial, locking devices, key holes, keys and lifting devices etc. and all byeworks as per specification and instructions of the EngineerIncharge.

a) Medium duty ‐ MD10 ‐ Circular shape 500mm dia Nos. 6.00

b) Heavy duty ‐ HD20 ‐ Circular shape 600mm dia Nos. 13.00

Providing and fixing brass ball valve with high pressure copper floats (horizontal plunger type) conforming to IS 1703 of the followingnominal bore along with necessary socket, backnut, reducers etc. complete with all byeworks at all leads and lifts as per drawings,specifications and instructions of the Engineer Incharge.

a) 32mm Nos. 6.00

b) 25mm Nos. 12.00

Providing and fixing sand cast iron fittings and accessories for soil and waste pipe conforming to IS 1729 including lead caulked joints asper IS 3114, painting two coats of anticorrosive bitumastic black paint, both internally and externally complete at all leads and lifts as perdrawings, specifications and instructions of the Engineer Incharge.

a) Floor trap with SS grating



SECTION TOTAL ‐ SW

SW‐27

SW‐28

SW‐29

SW-30


PAGE 22 OF30

ITEM NO


BMM ISPAT LIMITED


SECTION ‐ RD ‐ ROAD WORKS

RD‐1

Earth work in box cutting for roads in all kinds of soils excluding boulder studded soil/ rock requiring blasting or chiseling for formation ofsubgrade in cutting to required camber, gradient, including rolling, compaction and dressing up the surface, breaking clods, removal ofslush and water, transporting and depositing or stacking unserviceable earth, etc. elsewhere within the plant site/project area as directedby Consultant for all heights etc., complete as per specification.

CUM 23464.00

RD‐2Filling with approved murrum / gravel brought from outside sources & filling in layers not exceeding 150 mm thick including breakingclods, watering, rolling each layer with power roller of minimum 8 tonnes capacity to attain atleast 95% of the proctor density, dressingthe sides & top to the required profile & grade etc. complete as per specifications, drawings and instructions of the Engineer Incharge.

CUM 22000.00

RD‐3Supplying 50 mm I.R.C. hard trap stone metal in stacks at site of work for premeasurement complete as per specifications and directionsof the Engineer Incharge.

Cum 2890.00

Forming WATER BOUND MACADAM including preparing the sub‐grade, spreading 50 mm graded metal in layers, blinding the surfacewith grit or murrum ,watering, compacting by power roller to proper camber and gradient including dry and wet rolling etc. complete asper specifications and directions of the Engineer Incharge. a) 75 mm consolidated thickness in one layer as WBM 1st layer SQM 19265.00

b) 75mm consolidated thickness in second layer after necessary picking etc. SQM 19265.00

RD‐5supplying & laying 75 mm thick water bound macadam using 50 mm to 40 mm size quality metal, laid to proper camber and gradientwith templates, filling voids with approved quality moorum, dry and wet rolling wit 8 to 10 T roller, all as per specifications an directionsof Consultant.

SQM 18030.00

RD‐6

Providing and laying 50mm premix carpet (hot process) using paving bitumen grade 60 / 70 @ not less than 3.5 % by weight of total mixand aggregates as specified in the specifications including laying , rolling etc. over a tack coat at the rate of 7.50 Kgs / 10sqm usingmechanical pressure sprayer including cleaning of WBM surface prior to the application, all complete as per specifications and direction othe Engineer Incharge.

SQM 18030.00

RD‐7Providing and laying 12mm thick premix sand seal coat using aggregate as per standard code of practice, bitumen of grade 60 / 70 ,notless than 7.0% by weight of total mix, including laying, rolling etc. complete including applying a coat of bitumen 60 / 70 grade over the

surface grade at the rate of 1.47 kg./m2 and and final consolidation with 8 to 10 ton power roller etc. complete. SQM 18030.00

RD‐4


PAGE 23 OF30

ITEM NO


BMM ISPAT LIMITED


Supplying and fixing precast kerb stones made of PCC grade M15 using 20 mm down graded aggregate, properly cured, of the followingsizes, including making necessary casting yard, form work, machine mixing, compacting, finishing, submerged curing, conveying fromcasting yard to site of placing and fixing in position to correct line, level and curve, plumb over 20mm thick bedding in CM 1:6, jointing andpointing in CM 1:4 wherever required, painting with 2 coats of Yellow/ Black approved quality enamel paint for exposed surfaces, etc., allcomplete as directed. (The rate shall include the cost of excavation and backfilling for fixing kerb stones).

a) 555mm x 150mm x 450 mm NOS 3458.00

RD‐9

Earth work in forming embankment for roads for formation of subgrade to the full width of the road including slopes and cutting torequired camber, gradient, including rolling with 8 to 10t power roller compaction to get 95% proctor density and dressing up the surface,breaking clods, removal of slush and water,removal of surplus earth after formation, transporting, etc.with selected and approved earthwith optimum water content and in 200mm layers complete as per drawings and specifications and directed by the consultant.

CUM 12350.00

RD‐10

Construction of granular sub base by providing, laying, spreading and compacting of coarse graded material of grading 1 (minimum CBRvalue of 30%)spreading in uniform layers with motor grader on prepared surface, mixing by mix in place method with rotavator at OMC,and compacting with vibratory rollers 8 ‐ 10 tonne to achieve the desired density of 98% including protection of edges of GSB layer, costof all materials, labour, hire charges of machinery, lighting, guarding, barricading, all leads and lifts etc. complete aster drawings/ asdirected by engineer

CUM 2964.00

SECTION TOTAL ‐ RD

RD‐8


PAGE 24 OF30

ITEM NO


BMM ISPAT LIMITED


SECTION ‐ MS ‐ MISCELLANEOUS WORKS

MS‐1

Supplying and fixing 30 mm thick (Forex or equivalent) PVC panel door of approved shade and design made out of 5 mm thick C channelof width 50mm to form the styles and rails the inner panel shall be of min 5mm thick which is welded/sealed to the style and rails alongwith 5x25mm PVC beading on all sides and both faces . The shutter frames shall have square aluminium tube of heavy gauge 20x20mmon all sides complete including necessary SS hinges of 100 mm size 3 nos,SS tower bolt 100 x 10 mm dia 2 nos, as per instructions anddirection of consultant. (The work to be executed by specilised agency)

SQM 25.00

MS‐2

Suppying and fixing PVC door frame of size 50x47(Forex or equivalent) mm with a wall thickness of 5mm, made out of extruded 5mm rigidfoam sheet, mitre cut at two corners and jointed with 2 nos. of 150mm long brackets of 15x15mm aluminium square tube in two corners.The two vertical door profiles are to be reinforced with 19x19mm aluminium square tube & hardwood shall be inserted in the squaretube, EPDM rubber gasket weather seal to be provided through out the frame. The door frame shall be fixed to the wall by drilling100mm long stainless screws through the frame by using PVC fasteners on each side of the verticals. A minimum of 4 nos. of screws to beprovided for each vertical member. (The work to be executed by specilised agency)

RM 75.00

Supplying and fixing SINTEX or approved PVC water tank with PVC fittings for inlet, outlet, Over flow, scour float valve, connections ofrequired size and dia. Including connections and hoisting/fixing the same tank on roof and other places at all heights with all bye‐workscomplete as per manufacturer's specification and direction of the Consultant. (Support of tank on brick/RCC/PCC will be paid underrelevant items)

a) 1000 litres capacity Nos 8.00

b) 500 litres capacity Nos 8.00

MS‐4

Supplying and fixing in position false ceiling with 12.5 mm thick Gypsum tiles of India gypsum, of size 595 x 595 mm , with standard andapproved aluminium supporting arrangement ( Eezilock or Bestlok or equivalent) suspended from RCC slab with all accessories such asscrews, cleats, adjustable suspension rods, runners and Tees etc., including making suitable openings for air‐conditioning grill, lightfittings, troughs etc., and painting false ceiling board with two coats of approved make and shade acrylic/ plastic emulsion paints overand a coat of primer complete with all bye works at all locations and heights and as per drawings and manufacturers specifications andinstruction of Consultant.

SQM 988.00

MS‐3


PAGE 25 OF30

ITEM NO


BMM ISPAT LIMITED


MS‐5

Providing & laying/fixing in position first quality black 40 mm thick machine cut machine polished granite slab in single piece upto amaximum length of 1.80 metres laid over 20 mm thick cement mortar bedding 1:3 in support areas with best workmanship, makingcurvature of all exposed edges and their due polishing, providing necessary holes, finishing, curing etc. at all leads and lifts for platformsin pantry etc.as per drawings, specifications and directions of Engineer Incharge.

SQM 62.00

MS‐6

Supplying and installing 4mm thk. APP modified bituminous polyester reinforced (minimum 140 gsm) water proofing membrane, UVresistant, granule surfaced, self protective, weather and heat resistant, tear and puncture resistant and flexible of approved makeincluding necessary surface preparation with all byeworks complete as per manufacturer's specifications and instructions of the EngineerIncharge. Guarantee of minimum 10 years shall be funished by the contractor.

SQM 2964.00

MS‐7Supply and laying over water proofing treatment, chicken mesh of 26SWG, and then with 20 mm thick CM in 1:5 in panels of size notexceeding 1.2m x 1.2m and sealing the joints UV resistant bitumastic filler as directed by Consultant.

SQM 247.00

MS‐8Supplying and laying coarse aggregate (broken granite stone) of nominal size 40mm in the area of transformer , meter room, etc., as perdrawing and as directed by Consultant.

CUM 62.00

MS‐9 Supplying & fixing approved quality hydraulic door closer conforming to IS:3564( Everite or equivqlent) as directed by Consultant Nos 13.00

Supplying & erecting in position precast concrete trench cover units of specified sizes and thickness using reinforced cement concrete ofgrade M30 with 20 mm down graded coarse aggregates including formwork to give fair and smooth finish, casting, vibrating using storing,providing lifting arrangement, loading / unloading transporting, load testing etc., complete but excluding cost of reinforcement, all as perspecification and as directed by the consultant.

a) Unit weight upto and including 150 kg CUM 25.00

MS‐11Supplying & fixing heavy duty PVC water spouts of 40 mm dia of required length, including chamfering the ends at chajjas/ parapets/sunken slab/ tank foundations etc. as per drawing and instruction of Consultant

RM 25.00

MS‐10


PAGE 26 OF30

ITEM NO


BMM ISPAT LIMITED


MS‐12

Supplying and fixing 400 to 550 mm high cavity floor of modular 600 x 600 approximate with pre moulded infilled access floor tile madefrom steel and cementatious infill material (M/s Unitile or equivalent), with edge beading and faced with 2 mm thick antistatic highpressure laminates. The panels shall be placed on GI snap lock grid system stringers channels supported over MS galvanised pedestalsupports of 16mm ID at 600mm c/c approximate both ways. The pedestal supports shall be rigidly fixed on to the floor with glue andmechanical fasteners and shall be made of 100 x 100 x 8 mm thick base plate and minimum 19 mm thick MS stools with a coupling andcheck nut for level adjustment. The work includes necessary opening for cables and panel mounting and cutting of tiles to required sizeand strengthening of pedestals with 300 x 300 mm RCC pedestal at locations of panels. The floor panels and stringers shall be completelyremovable and shall remain in position without screwing. The shade of the flooring material shall be as specified in the drawing or asdirected by Consultant. (The cost includes supply of 1% spare tiles and pedestals, lifting tools).

SQM 741.00

Providing, fixing, lowering & laying factory made RCC spun hume pipes (Class NP2 of ISI) with necessary collars, jointing with hemp yarn &cement mortar 1:1 including embedding in walls, beams, floors etc. caulking the joints, curing, finishing, aligning to proper level etc.complete as specified at all lifts. Excavation and PCC bedding,and encasing, if specified ,shall be paid under relevant items.

a) 150 mm dia. Rm 225.00

b) 300 mm dia. Rm 30.00

MS‐13


PAGE 27 OF30

ITEM NO


BMM ISPAT LIMITED


Supplying and laying factory made RCC Hume pipe of NP3 class, for road crossings of the following diameters, including all incidentals likecollars & specials and jointing with CM 1:3, etc., as per drawings and directions of Consultant. Excavation and PCC bedding,a encasing ifspecified shall be paid under relevant items.

a) 250 mm dia RM 75.00

b) 300 mm dia RM 75.00

c) 450 mm dia RM 75.00

d) 600 mm dia RM 75.00

Supplying & laying water‐proofing system to reinforced concrete structures at all locations, depths and heights consisting of two coats ofapproved acrylic polymer modified cementitious material over rendered blinding surface below base raft and over rendered externalwall and roof surfaces in contact with soil placing of 15mm dia MS nozzles of suitable length all over the inside surfaces of raft/wall/roofslab and all construction joints at regular intervals not exceeding 1.5m c/c, mixing approved super plasticizer cum cement water prooferduring concreting and finally pressure injecting non‐shrink polymeric water‐proof grouting compond admixed with cement milk throuththe nozzles and sealing the nozzles with approvd sealant after grouting all compleate with all bye‐works as required so as to make thestructure water tight.(Manaufacturers specification shall be followed depending on approved materials used and measurements shall bemade on inside surface dimensions only and no separate payment will be made for rendering.)

a) For base slab raft SQM 2149.00

b) For walls and slab other than base raft SQM 6200.00

MS‐15

MS‐14


PAGE 28 OF30

ITEM NO


BMM ISPAT LIMITED


MS‐16

Designing, providing,installing and operating well point dewatering system consisting of borewells along the periphery of the facility fordeep excavations of wagon tippler, tunnels / underground basements including design of the system based on permeability tests, fordepths of excavation upto 9.5 m from the existing ground levels, for continuous operation of the system to keep the surface area of theexcavated portion dry and workable for a depth of 500 mm, including drilling of the wells at required spacing and insertion of perforatedpipes, filter media, connecting the pipes to headers and continuous pumping using pumps of appropriate capacities, for duration asdireted by the consultant, including all bye works such as providing discharge pipes, channels to the drains, provision of standbyarrangements for the pumps, cost of diesel, lubricants including necessary permiability test, etc (Payment will be made for thetheoretical area of excavation considering the largest possible dimensions of bed concrete. 10% of the cost to be paid on installation andcompletion of testing, 40% on completion of bed concrete and balance 50% on completion of the

SQM 3113.00

MS‐17Supplying and laying rubble hard stones tightly held back for pitching,filling the joints with CM 1 :5 at all locations with stone size of notless than 200mm,including necessary dressing, cutting up to 300mm of top surface and disposal of unserviceable siol etc., within a lead of5 km and levelling complete with all bye‐works as per drawings and direction of Engineer.

CUM 3705.00

Installation of electrical concealed conduits (GI/ PVC) of the following sizes, including bends, clamps, junction boxes, pull boxes includingpullling of GI wire/ Fish wire in RCC slabs, RCC walls,wall crossings, floors, etc.

a) 32mm dia RM 1235.00

b) 25 mm dia RM 2470.00

c) 20 mm dia RM 1235.00

Installation of electrical conduits GI under floors, entrance ramps of the following sizes, including bending, threading the ends andplugging.

a) 100mm dia RM 3705.00

b) 80 mm dia RM 4940.00

MS‐18

MS‐19


PAGE 29 OF30

ITEM NO


BMM ISPAT LIMITED


MS‐20

Providing and applying waterproofing treatment in sunken floors and vertical surfaces of toilets and bathrooms etc. with two componentacrylic polymer based flexible cementitious coating of heavy duty flexible coating system with excellent waterproofing using products ofapproved make. 10mm Cement/Sand (Ratio 1:4) protective screed, using Integral Waterproofing Compound added as per manufacturer'sspecifications, shall be applied on top of the membrane. All works shall be carried out as per specifications and manufacturer'sinstructions including all byeworks and at all heights and levels and also as per the directions of the Engineer Incharge.

Sqm 1960.00

Providing cinder fill for filling in the depression of toilets, bath room etc., as per the specifications of specialised waterproofing agencies &finishing the surface even, so as to be suitable to receive the tiles etc at all heights and levels as per specifications and instructions of theEngineer Incharge.

Cum 780.00

Note :

The measurement shall be on cum basis. No deductions shall be made for the areas occupied by pans & other fittings & fixtures.

MS‐22Providing & fixing 25mm thick PREMOULDED BITUMINOUS FILLER ('Shalitex or other approved manufacture) for expansion jointsincluding painting concrete surface with primer as per specifications, cutting, positioning, supporting, scaffolding & filling with approvedsealing compound etc. complete at all heights and levels as per specifications and instructions of the Engineer Incharge.

Sqm 350.00

MS‐23Providing & applying polysulphide compound in 'V' grooves of sixe 20mm x 10 mm deep complete at all heights and levels as perspecifications and instructions of the Engineer Incharge.

Rm 100.00

MS‐24

Providing & fixing in position 1mm thick stainless steel (SS 304 grade) flats / angles / tees (of required size) of approvedmake for coveringthe expansion joints in walls, floors, ceiling & columns etc. including drilling slotted holes on both sides, chasing the surfaces whereverrequired, fixing with wooden gutties, rawl plugs & C.P. brass screws, making good the surface etc. complete at all heights and levels asper specifications and instructions of the Engineer Incharge.

Kgs 335.00

MS‐25Providing and placing in position suitable PVC water stops conforming to IS 12200 : 2001 of approved manufacturer, for constructionjoints between two RCC members and fixed to the reinforcement with bindingwire before pouring concrete, fusion jointing etc. completeat all leads and lifts. The water stop shall be serrated (minimum 225mm wide, 10mm thick) with central bulb of outer dia 25mm).

Rm 1750.00

SECTION TOTAL ‐ MSTOTAL(EW+AT+CC+MN+FN+FL+WW+ST+AL+SW+RW+MS)

MS‐21


PAGE 30 OF30

BMM ISPAT LIMITED, DANAPUR VILLAGE, HOSPET

SECTION TITLE AMOUNT IN RUPEES

EW EARTHWORK

AT ANTITERMITE TREATMENT

CC PLAIN AND REINFORCEMENT CONCRETE

MN STONE AND BRICK MASONRY

FN PLASTERING AND SURFACE FINISHES

FL FLOORING, PAVING AND FACING

WW WOOD WORK

ST STEEL AND IRON WORK

AL ALUMINIUM WORK

SW SANITARY & WATER SUPPLY

RW ROAD WORKS

MS MISCELLANEOUS

TOTAL FOR [ EW+AT+CC+MN+FN+FL+WW+ST+AL+SW+MS ]

ABSTRACT OF CIVIL WORKS

BMM ISPAT LIMITED, DANAPUR VILLAGE, HOSPET

SECTION TITLE AMOUNT IN RUPEES

EW EARTHWORK

AT ANTITERMITE TREATMENT

CC PLAIN AND REINFORCEMENT CONCRETE

MN STONE AND BRICK MASONRY

FN PLASTERING AND SURFACE FINISHES

FL FLOORING, PAVING AND FACING

WW WOOD WORK

ST STEEL AND IRON WORK

AL ALUMINIUM WORK

SW SANITARY & WATER SUPPLY

RW ROAD WORKS

MS MISCELLANEOUS

TOTAL FOR [ EW+AT+CC+MN+FN+FL+WW+ST+AL+SW+MS ]

ABSTRACT OF CIVIL WORKS